US20070249014A1 - Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins - Google Patents

Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20070249014A1
US20070249014A1 US11/674,140 US67414007A US2007249014A1 US 20070249014 A1 US20070249014 A1 US 20070249014A1 US 67414007 A US67414007 A US 67414007A US 2007249014 A1 US2007249014 A1 US 2007249014A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
modified
protein
alkyne
azido
reporter molecule
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/674,140
Inventor
Brian Agnew
Kyle Gee
Tamara NYBERG
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Life Technologies Corp
Original Assignee
Invitrogen Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=38440198&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=US20070249014(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Priority to US11/674,140 priority Critical patent/US20070249014A1/en
Application filed by Invitrogen Corp filed Critical Invitrogen Corp
Priority to US11/674,623 priority patent/US8114636B2/en
Assigned to INVITROGEN CORPORATION reassignment INVITROGEN CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AGNEW, BRIAN, GEE, KYLE R., NYBERG, TAMARA G.
Publication of US20070249014A1 publication Critical patent/US20070249014A1/en
Assigned to BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT reassignment BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT SECURITY AGREEMENT Assignors: Life Technologies Corporation
Assigned to Life Technologies Corporation reassignment Life Technologies Corporation MERGER (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: INVITROGEN CORPORATION
Priority to US12/729,903 priority patent/US20100261181A1/en
Priority to US13/399,850 priority patent/US20120301894A1/en
Assigned to Life Technologies Corporation reassignment Life Technologies Corporation LIEN RELEASE Assignors: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.
Priority to US14/330,727 priority patent/US9645140B2/en
Priority to US14/447,230 priority patent/US20140336079A1/en
Assigned to Life Technologies Corporation reassignment Life Technologies Corporation CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE APPLICATION NO 09452626 PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 023882 FRAME 0551. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE MERGER SHOULD NOT HAVE BEEN RECORDED AGAINST THIS PATENT APPLICATION NUMBER. Assignors: INVITROGEN CORPORATION
Priority to US15/474,901 priority patent/US20170362624A1/en
Priority to US16/738,274 priority patent/US20200216871A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12PFERMENTATION OR ENZYME-USING PROCESSES TO SYNTHESISE A DESIRED CHEMICAL COMPOUND OR COMPOSITION OR TO SEPARATE OPTICAL ISOMERS FROM A RACEMIC MIXTURE
    • C12P21/00Preparation of peptides or proteins
    • C12P21/005Glycopeptides, glycoproteins
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/549Sugars, nucleosides, nucleotides or nucleic acids
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K1/00General methods for the preparation of peptides, i.e. processes for the organic chemical preparation of peptides or proteins of any length
    • C07K1/13Labelling of peptides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12YENZYMES
    • C12Y302/00Hydrolases acting on glycosyl compounds, i.e. glycosylases (3.2)
    • C12Y302/01Glycosidases, i.e. enzymes hydrolysing O- and S-glycosyl compounds (3.2.1)
    • C12Y302/01096Mannosyl-glycoprotein endo-beta-N-acetylglucosaminidase (3.2.1.96)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/531Production of immunochemical test materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/531Production of immunochemical test materials
    • G01N33/532Production of labelled immunochemicals
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/531Production of immunochemical test materials
    • G01N33/532Production of labelled immunochemicals
    • G01N33/533Production of labelled immunochemicals with fluorescent label
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/58Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances
    • G01N33/581Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances with enzyme label (including co-enzymes, co-factors, enzyme inhibitors or substrates)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/58Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances
    • G01N33/582Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances with fluorescent label
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/58Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances
    • G01N33/583Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving labelled substances with non-fluorescent dye label
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/10Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by their source of isolation or production
    • C07K2317/14Specific host cells or culture conditions, e.g. components, pH or temperature
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/20Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin
    • C07K2317/24Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin containing regions, domains or residues from different species, e.g. chimeric, humanized or veneered
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/40Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by post-translational modification
    • C07K2317/41Glycosylation, sialylation, or fucosylation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/531Production of immunochemical test materials
    • G01N33/532Production of labelled immunochemicals
    • G01N33/534Production of labelled immunochemicals with radioactive label
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T436/00Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing
    • Y10T436/17Nitrogen containing

Definitions

  • the invention generally relates to methods of labeling post translationally modified biomolecules using metabolic, enzymatic, or chemical incorporation of azide or alkyne-labeled macromolecules followed by chemical conjugation with paired azide, alkyne, activated alkyne, or triarylphospine reporter molecules appended to proteins post translation.
  • Protein glycosylation is one of the most abundant post-translational modifications and plays a fundamental role in the control of biological systems. For example, carbohydrate modifications are important for host-pathogen interactions, inflammation, development, and malignancy (Varki, A. Glycobiology 1993, 3, 97-130; Lasky, L. A. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 1995, 64, 113-139. (c) Capila, I.; Linhardt, R. J. Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. 2002, 41, 391-412; Rudd, P. M.; Elliott, T.; Cresswell, P.; Wilson, I. A.; Dwek, R. A.
  • O-GlcNAc glycosylation is the covalent modification of serine and threonine residues by D-N-acetylglucosamine (Wells, L.; Vosseller, K.; Hart, G. W. Science 2001, 291, 2376-2378; Zachara, N. E.; Hart, G. W. Chem. Rev. 2002, 102, 431).
  • the O-GlcNAc modification is found in all higher eukaryotic organisms from C. elegans to man and has been shown to be ubiquitous, inducible and highly dynamic, suggesting a regulatory role analogous to phosphorylation.
  • the regulatory nature of the modification i.e., dynamic, low cellular abundance
  • O-GlcNAc A common method to observe O-GlcNAc involves labeling proteins with ⁇ -1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT), an enzyme that catalyzes the transfer of [ 3 H]-Gal from UDP-[ 3 H]galactose to terminal GlcNAc groups (Roquemore, E. P.; Chou, T. Y.; Hart, G. W. Methods Enzymol. 1994, 230, 443-460). Unfortunately, this approach is expensive, involves handling of radioactive material, and requires exposure times of days to months. Antibodies and lectins offer alternative means of detection, but they can suffer from weak binding affinity and limited specificity (Snow, C. M.; Senior, A.; Gerace, L. J.
  • Isolated or synthesized antibodies such as IgGs are used therapeutically and for diagnostic and research purposes.
  • detectable labels such as, for example, fluorophores
  • antibodies can be used to specifically detect target biological molecules or cells.
  • Antibodies may also be tagged with binding reagents, such as, for example, biotin, so that they may be used to specifically bind target biological molecules or cells, followed by purification of the biological molecule or cell by using a reagent that binds to the tagged antibody, for example, streptavidin.
  • binding reagents such as, for example, biotin
  • Antibodies have generally been labeled at cysteine or lysine residues, which may often be present in the Fab, or binding portion of the antibody. Adding tags or labels in this region may disrupt or at least alter the binding properties of the antibody. Further, it is often difficult to quantitate the number of labeled molecules attached to each antibody.
  • glycoproteins One important class of glycoproteins is antibodies.
  • Therapeutic monoclonal antibodies have become indispensable drugs to combat cancer, rheumatoid arthritis, macular degeneration, and other diseases or conditions.
  • antibodies generated in non-human cell lines may have antigenic features recognized as foreign by the human immune system, limiting the antibodies' half-life and efficacy.
  • Incorporating human IgG sequences into transgenic mice has reduced, but not eliminated, immunogenicity problems.
  • the nature of the oligosaccharides attached to the IgG has a profound effect on immune-system recognition. Because glycosylation is cell type specific, IgGs produced in different host cells contain different patterns of oligosaccharides, which could affect the biological functions.
  • Metabolic oligosaccharide engineering refers to the introduction of subtle modifications into monosaccharide residues within cellular glycans.
  • researchers have used metabolic engineering to disrupt glycan biosynthesis, chemically modify cell surfaces, probe metabolic flux inside cells, and to identify specific glycoprotein subtypes from the proteome. (reviewed in Dube, D. H., and Bertozzi, C. R., Current Opinion in Chemical Biology, 2003, 7:616-625).
  • a glycoprotein is contacted with UDP-GalNAz in the presence of an appropriate enzyme.
  • the enzyme is Gal T.
  • the enzyme is a modified Gal T enzyme.
  • These azido modified glycoproteins can then be conjugated t a wide variety of reporter molecules, carrier molecules or solid supports provided that they contain an azide reactive group.
  • the azide reactive group is a terminal alkyne such that the conjugation reaction utilizes copper (I) catalyzed cycloaddition chemistry.
  • the azide reactive group is a phosphine such that the conjugation reaction performed is a Staudinger ligation type reaction.
  • a method for forming a reporter molecule-glycoprotein conjugate with an immobilized azido modified glycoprotein Glycoproteins are modified with azido sugars either metabolically or enzymatically and then immobilized on a solid or semi-solid matrix.
  • the solid or semi-solid matrix is a slide, an array, polymeric particle or a gel matrix.
  • the azido modified glycoproteins are separated by gel electrophoresis or capillary electrophoresis.
  • the immobilized azido modified glycoprotein is contacted with an azide reactive reporter molecule wherein the conjugate is formed either in a click chemistry type reaction or a Staudinger ligation type reaction. Subsequently the glycoprotein conjugate is detected after illumination with an appropriate wavelength.
  • the azide-alkyne [3+2]cycloaddition is a chemoselective ligation reaction that is catalyzed by the addition of copper (I).
  • the procedure involves the selective tagging of proteins with reactive probes containing either azide or alkyne groups.
  • the reactive probes can be toward total proteins, such as those that label specific amino acids like lysines or cysteines, or they can label (or derivatize) post-translationally modified amino acids within the proteins, such as phosphoamino acids or glycosylated amino acids.
  • protein modification can take place in vivo by metabolic labeling. This involves feeding cultured cells, bacteria, plants, or animals tagged metabolic precursors that are incorporated into specific molecules by the intracellular enzymatic machinery.
  • Primary protein labeling can be performed with an azide or alkyne probe as long as the detection is carried out with the alternate of the pair. Once the primary protein labeling step is completed, cellular extracts (or fractions) are separated by 1-D or 2-D gel electrophoresis.
  • the methods described for detection of proteins in gels can be completed within 3-4 hours, or less.
  • the method is devoid of the typical problems encountered with antibody detection on blots including the requirement to optimize primary and secondary antibody concentrations and issues of non-specific binding of the antibodies.
  • it is well-documented in-gel digested proteins are more compatible with detection by mass spectrometry than are electroblotted proteins.
  • FIG. 1 Shows metabolic labeling with unnatural azido sugars.
  • FIG. 2 Shows metabolic labeling and “click” detection of glycoprotein subclasses A) schematically and B) detection after separation on a gel.
  • FIG. 3 Shows separation of Ac 4 GlcNAz-treated soluble Jurkat cell proteins by 2-D gels and controls compared to the same gel stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain.
  • FIG. 4 Shows in gel detection of 40 and 50 kD azide-labeled model proteins, which were first labeled with a fluorescent alkyne tag and then separated on the gel.
  • FIG. 5 Shows Labeling Efficiency of 40 and 50 kd Azide-Labeled Model Proteins is Unchanged in Complex Protein Extracts.
  • FIG. 6 Shows the Enzymatic Labeling and Detection of ⁇ -crystallin O-GlcNAc.
  • FIG. 7 Shows the Comparison of GalT1 Enzyme Labeling with a-O-GlcNAc Monoclonal Antibody CTD 110.6.
  • FIG. 8 Shows the Multiplex Detection of O-GlcNAc Proteins, Phosphoproteins and Total Proteins in the Same 2-D gel.
  • FIG. 9 Shows Multiplexed Western Blot Detection of O-GlcNAc and Cofilin.
  • FIG. 10 Shows the Differential Detection of O-GlcNAc Modified Proteins in Control and Inhibitor-Treated Cultured Cell Extracts.
  • FIG. 11 Shows the A) UDPGalNAz in conjunction with GalT as a novel method for labeling antibodies via reaction of the terminal OGlcNAc molecules present on antibody carbohydrates (Scheme 2) and B) if no OGlcNAc sugars are present on an antibody, then use of the Endo-H (endo- ⁇ -N-acetylglucosaminidase H) enzyme will be used to generate a truncated chain which terminates with one N-acetylglucosamine residue.
  • Endo-H endo- ⁇ -N-acetylglucosaminidase H
  • FIG. 12 Shows structures of four present (A-D) and two potential (E,F) alkyne fluorophores that can be used to label biomolecules using the methods of the invention: A) TAMRA-alkyne; B) Alexa 488-Alkyne; C) Alexa 633-Alkyne; D) Alexa 532-Alkyne, E) a potential fluorogenic alkyne; F) a potential fluorogenic alkyne.
  • FIG. 13 shows the results of in-gel staining using the TAMRA-alkyne compound shown in FIG. 12A .
  • Lanes 2, 3, and 4 on the left side of the gel represent cellular extracts that were labeled with azide-modified sugars: lane 1 is the control, non-labeled cells.
  • control azide labeled proteins ovalbumin and myoglobin
  • non-labeled controls
  • FIG. 14 depicts gels showing the results of separating proteins labeled using the click reaction with different chelators.
  • the reaction contained 50 mM TRIS pH8, 25% propylene glycol, 1 mM CuSO 4 , 5 mM sodium ascorbate, 20 uM TAMRA alkyne.
  • the reactions were performed with and without chelator (10 mM TPEN [upper left gel], EDTA [upper right gel], bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS) [middle left gel] or neocuproine [middle right gel]).
  • Control reactions were performed without CuSO 4 [lower left gel] or without chelator [lower right gel].
  • the samples were precipitated, resolubilized in 7 mM urea/2 mM thiourea/65 mM DTT/2% CHAPS/ and approximately 30 ⁇ g was analyzed on 2-D gels (pH 4-7 IEF strips, 4-12% BIS-TRIS gels with MOPS buffer).
  • the TAMRA signal was imaged at 532 nm excitation, 580 long pass emission on a Fuji FLA3000 (14A) then the gels were post-stained with Sypro® Ruby total protein gel stain (14B).
  • FIG. 15 depicts gels showing the results of separating proteins labeled using the click reaction with different chelators.
  • the samples and click labeling conditions are the same as for FIG. 14 , except that chelator treatments include addition of either 5 mM TPEN, BCS or Neocuproine at the beginning of the reaction.
  • the samples were precipitated, resolubilized in LDS buffer+5 mM TCEP and serial 2-fold dilutions were performed. Dilutions were loaded onto 4-12% BIS-TRIS gels with MOPS running buffer (250 ng each of ovalbumin and myglobin in lane 1).
  • FIG. 15A shows that the chelators reduce the background of the image for the TAMRA signal without compromising sensitivity.
  • FIG. 15B post-staining with Sypro® Ruby total protein gel stain shows that the band resolution is much better for the samples with chelator.
  • FIG. 16 The samples and click labeling conditions are the same as for FIG. 14 , except that chelator treatments include addition of either 7 mM, 5 mM or 2 mM BCS or neocuproine.
  • the lanes marked with an asterisk in (A) indicate reactions in which the CuSO 4 and BCS were added to the reaction and vortexed prior adding the sodium ascorbate. In all other reactions the CuSO 4 and sodium ascorbate were added and vortexed prior to adding the BCS.
  • the gels show that it is imperative to add the sodium ascorbate and CuSO 4 to the reaction tube and mix prior to adding the chelator. If the chelator and CuSO 4 are added and vortexed prior to adding the sodium acorbate, the azide-alkyne labeling does not proceed, suggesting that the chelator inhibits the reduction of Cu II to Cu I.
  • FIG. 17 Shows the enzymatic labeling of antibodies using cliack chemistry: A) Lane 1—Goat antibody only (GAb); Lane 2—GAb with GalT1 enzyme but without UDP-GalNAz Control; Lane 3—GAb with enzyme and UDP-GalNAz. Lane 4—azide-labeled ovalbumin and myoglobin control proteins; Lane 5—MW markers unlabeled and B) Azide-labeled goat antibodies (from above) were run as a dilution series. Nanograms of antibodies were calculated for the heavy chains only. Gels were run, stained, and imaged as described above.
  • FIG. 18A Shows ⁇ -elimination in the lower trace only of RII peptide and the upper trace shows simultaneous ⁇ -elimination and azido-thioacetate addition of RII peptide.
  • ⁇ -elimination removes 98 Da from the peptide and azido-thioacetate addition adds 159 Da, therefore the expected mass of the addition product is 2253 Da (2192-98+159).
  • the 1980 Da peak corresponds to ⁇ -eliminated RII with the N-terminal alanine cleaved.
  • the 1655 Da peak corresponds to hydrolysis of RII at the phosphoserine residue and is not observed in the addition sample.
  • FIG. 18B Shows ⁇ -elimination on the lower trace only of RII peptide and the upper trace shows simultaneous ⁇ -elimination and azido-amine addition of RII peptide.
  • ⁇ -elimination removes 98 Da from the peptide and azido-amine addition adds 142 Da, therefore the expected mass of the addition product is 2236 Da (2192-98+142).
  • PDS MALDI analysis shows the same fragment masses as for the 2236 product suggesting that the products are related.
  • the 1980 Da peak corresponds to ⁇ -eliminated RII with the N-terminal alanine cleaved.
  • the 1655 Da peak corresponds to hydrolysis of RII at the phosphoserine residue and is observed in lesser amount in the addition sample than in the ⁇ -elimination-only sample.
  • FIG. 19 Shows the results of fluorescent Click labeling of live and fixed cells
  • FIG. 20 Shows gel analysis of cell surface versus total glycoprotein subclasses. Lanes 1 and 4: Control unfed; Lane 2: GalNAz fed, surface labeled live cells, no perm; Lane 3: GalNAz fed, total cell lysates labeled; Lane 5: ManNAz fed, surface labeled live cells, no perm; Lane 6: ManNAz fed, total cell lysate labeled.
  • FIG. 21 shows the results of gel analysis of labeled glycoproteins in live animals.
  • the upper panels below show 1-D gels of labeled tissue proteins from heart muscle (H), liver (L), or kidney (K). Lower panels show same gels after post-staining with SYPRO Ruby.
  • ManNAz N-alpha-azidoacetylmannosamine ManNBut N-butanoylmannosamine. ManNProp N-propanoylmannosamine. NCAM neural cell adhesion molecule. PSA Polysialic acid. Endo H Endoglycosidase H Endo M Endoglycosidase M
  • Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical centers) or double bonds; the racemates, diastereomers, geometric isomers and individual isomers are encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • the compounds described herein may be prepared as a single isomer (e.g., enantiomer, cis-trans, positional, diastereomer) or as a mixture of isomers.
  • the compounds are prepared as substantially a single isomer.
  • Methods of preparing substantially isomerically pure compounds are known in the art.
  • enantiomerically enriched mixtures and pure enantiomeric compounds can be prepared by using synthetic intermediates that are enantiomerically pure in combination with reactions that either leave the stereochemistry at a chiral center unchanged or result in its complete inversion.
  • the final product or intermediates along the synthetic route can be resolved into a single stereoisomer.
  • the compounds disclosed herein may also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compounds.
  • the compounds may be radiolabeled with radioactive isotopes, such as for example tritium ( 3 H), iodine-125 ( 125 I) or carbon-14 ( 14 C). All isotopic variations of the compounds of the present invention, whether radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • resonance stabilization may permit a formal electronic charge to be distributed over the entire molecule. While a particular charge may be depicted as localized on a particular ring system, or a particular heteroatom, it is commonly understood that a comparable resonance structure can be drawn in which the charge may be formally localized on an alternative portion of the compound.
  • Selected compounds having a formal electronic charge may be shown without an appropriate biologically compatible counterion.
  • a counterion serves to balance the positive or negative charge present on the compound.
  • a substance that is biologically compatible is not toxic as used, and does not have a substantially deleterious effect on biomolecules.
  • negatively charged counterions include, among others, chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, alkanesulfonate, arylsulfonate, phosphate, perchlorate, tetrafluoroborate, tetraarylboride, nitrate and anions of aromatic or aliphatic carboxylic acids.
  • Preferred counterions may include chloride, iodide, perchlorate and various sulfonates.
  • positively charged counterions include, among others, alkali metal, or alkaline earth metal ions, ammonium, or alkylammonium ions.
  • substituent groups are specified by their conventional chemical formulae, written from left to right, they equally encompass the chemically identical substituents, which would result from writing the structure from right to left, e.g., —CH 2 O— is intended to also recite —OCH 2 —.
  • acyl or “alkanoyl” by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combinations thereof, consisting of the stated number of carbon atoms and an acyl radical on at least one terminus of the alkane radical.
  • the “acyl radical” is the group derived from a carboxylic acid by removing the —OH moiety therefrom.
  • alkyl by itself or as part of another substituent means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combination thereof, which may be fully saturated, mono- or polyunsaturated and can include divalent (“alkylene”) and multivalent radicals, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e. C 1 -C 10 means one to ten carbons).
  • saturated hydrocarbon radicals include, but are not limited to, groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, cyclohexyl, (cyclohexyl)methyl, cyclopropylmethyl, homologs and isomers of, for example, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, and the like.
  • An unsaturated alkyl group is one having one or more double bonds or triple bonds.
  • alkyl groups examples include, but are not limited to, vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers.
  • alkyl unless otherwise noted, is also meant to include those derivatives of alkyl defined in more detail below, such as “heteroalkyl.” Alkyl groups that are limited to hydrocarbon groups are termed “homoalkyl”.
  • alkyl groups of use in the present invention contain between about one and about twenty five carbon atoms (e.g. methyl, ethyl and the like). Straight, branched or cyclic hydrocarbon chains having eight or fewer carbon atoms will also be referred to herein as “lower alkyl”.
  • alkyl as used herein further includes one or more substitutions at one or more carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon chain fragment.
  • amino refers to the group —NR′R′′ (or NRR′R′′) where R, R′ and R′′ are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, aryl alkyl, substituted aryl alkyl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl.
  • a substituted amine being an amine group wherein R′ or R′′ is other than hydrogen. In a primary amino group, both R′ and R′′ are hydrogen, whereas in a secondary amino group, either, but not both, R′ or R′′ is hydrogen.
  • the terms “amine” and “amino” can include protonated and quaternized versions of nitrogen, comprising the group —NRR′R′′ and its biologically compatible anionic counterions.
  • aryl refers to cyclic aromatic carbon chain having twenty or fewer carbon atoms, e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, and anthracenyl.
  • One or more carbon atoms of the aryl group may also be substituted with, e.g., alkyl; aryl; heteroaryl; a halogen; nitro; cyano; hydroxyl, alkoxyl or aryloxyl; thio or mercapto, alkyl-, or arylthio; amino, alkylamino, arylamino, dialkyl-, diaryl-, or arylalkylamino; aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl, or arylalkylaminocarbonyl; carboxyl, or alkyl- or aryloxycarbonyl; aldehyde
  • alkyl or heteroalkyl substituents of an aryl group may be combined to form fused aryl-alkyl or aryl-heteroalkyl ring systems (e.g., tetrahydronaphthyl).
  • aryl-alkyl or aryl-heteroalkyl ring systems e.g., tetrahydronaphthyl.
  • Substituents including heterocyclic groups e.g., heteroaryloxy, and heteroaralkylthio
  • heterocyclic groups e.g., heteroaryloxy, and heteroaralkylthio
  • alkoxy alkylamino and “alkylthio” (or thioalkoxy) are used in their conventional sense, and refer to those alkyl groups attached to the remainder of the molecule via an oxygen atom, an amino group, or a sulfur atom, respectively.
  • heteroalkyl by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain, or cyclic carbon-containing radical, or combinations thereof, consisting of the stated number of carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si, P, S, and Se and wherein the nitrogen, phosphorous, sulfur, and selenium atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom is optionally be quaternized.
  • the heteroatom(s) O, N, P, S, Si, and Se may be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule.
  • Examples include, but are not limited to, —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—CH 3 , —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 , —S(O)—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —S(O) 2 —CH 3 , —CH ⁇ CH—O—CH 3 , —Si(CH 3 ) 3 , —CH 2 —CH ⁇ N—OCH 3 , and —CH ⁇ CH—N(CH 3 )—CH 3 .
  • heteroalkylene by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified, but not limited by, —CH 2 —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 2 — and —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—CH 2 —.
  • heteroatoms can also occupy either or both of the chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxy, alkylenedioxy, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like). Still further, for alkylene and heteroalkylene linking groups, no orientation of the linking group is implied by the direction in which the formula of the linking group is written. For example, the formula —C(O) 2 R′— represents both —C(O) 2 R′— and —R′C(O) 2 —.
  • cycloalkyl and “heterocycloalkyl”, by themselves or in combination with other terms, represent, unless otherwise stated, cyclic versions of “alkyl” and “heteroalkyl”, respectively. Additionally, for heterocycloalkyl, a heteroatom can occupy the position at which the heterocycle is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples of cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohexenyl, 3-cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like.
  • heterocycloalkyl examples include, but are not limited to, 1-(1,2,5,6-tetrahydropyridyl), 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 3-morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuran-2-yl, tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, tetrahydrothien-2-yl, tetrahydrothien-3-yl, 1-piperazinyl, 2-piperazinyl, and the like.
  • aryl means, unless otherwise stated, a polyunsaturated, aromatic moiety that can be a single ring or multiple rings (preferably from 1 to 3 rings), which are fused together or linked covalently.
  • heteroaryl refers to aryl groups (or rings) that contain from one to four heteroatoms selected from N, O, S, and Se, wherein the nitrogen, sulfur, and selenium atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized.
  • a heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom.
  • Non-limiting examples of aryl and heteroaryl groups include phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-biphenyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, pyrazinyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl, 4-pyrimidyl, 5-benzothiazolyl, purinyl, 2-benzimidazolyl, 5-indolyl, 1-isoquinoly
  • aryl when used in combination with other terms (e.g., aryloxy, arylthioxy, arylalkyl) includes both aryl and heteroaryl rings as defined above.
  • arylalkyl is meant to include those radicals in which an aryl group is attached to an alkyl group (e.g., benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl and the like) including those alkyl groups in which a carbon atom (e.g., a methylene group) has been replaced by, for example, an oxygen atom (e.g., phenoxymethyl, 2-pyridyloxymethyl, 3-(1-naphthyloxy)propyl, and the like).
  • alkyl group e.g., benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl and the like
  • an oxygen atom e.g., phenoxymethyl, 2-pyridyloxymethyl, 3-(1-naph
  • alkyl and heteroalkyl radicals are generically referred to as “alkyl group substituents,” and they can be one or more of a variety of groups selected from, but not limited to: —OR′, ⁇ O, ⁇ NR′, ⁇ N—OR, —NR′R′′, —SR′, -halogen, —SiR′R′′R′′′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO 2 R′, —CONR′R′′, —OC(O)NR′R′′, —NR′′C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR′′R′′′, —NR′′C(O) 2 R′, —NR
  • R′, R′′, R′′′ and R′′′′ each preferably independently refer to hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, e.g., aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkoxy groups, or arylalkyl groups.
  • each of the R groups is independently selected as are each R′, R′′, R′′′ and R′′′′ groups when more than one of these groups is present.
  • R′ and R′′ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring.
  • —NR′R′′ is meant to include, but not be limited to, 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl.
  • alkyl is meant to include groups including carbon atoms bound to groups other than hydrogen groups, such as haloalkyl (e.g., —CF 3 and —CH 2 CF 3 ) and acyl (e.g., —C(O)CH 3 , —C(O)CF 3 , —C(O)CH 2 OCH 3 , and the like).
  • substituents for the aryl and heteroaryl groups are generically referred to as “aryl group substituents.”
  • the substituents are selected from, for example: halogen, —OR′, ⁇ O, ⁇ NR′, ⁇ N—OR′, —NR′R′′, —SR′, -halogen, —SiR′R′′R′′′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO 2 R′, —CONR′R′′, —OC(O)NR′R′′, —NR′′C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR′′R′′′, —NR′′C(O) 2 R′, —NR—C(NR′R′′R′′′) ⁇ NR′′′′, —NR—C(NR′R′′) ⁇ NR′′′, —S(O)R′, —S(O) 2 R′, —S(O) 2 NR′R′′
  • each of the R groups is independently selected as are each R′, R′′, R′′′ and R′′′′ groups when more than one of these groups is present.
  • the symbol X represents “R” as described above.
  • Two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of the aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -T-C(O)—(CRR′) q —U—, wherein T and U are independently —NR—, —O—, —CRR′— or a single bond, and q is an integer of from 0 to 3.
  • two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of the aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -A-(CH 2 ) r —B—, wherein A and B are independently —CRR′—, —O—, —NR—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NR′— or a single bond, and r is an integer of from 1 to 4.
  • One of the single bonds of the new ring so formed may optionally be replaced with a double bond.
  • two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of the aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula —(CRR′) s —X—(CR′′R′′′) d —, where s and d are independently integers of from 0 to 3, and X is —O—, —NR′—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, or —S(O) 2 NR′—.
  • the substituents R, R′, R′′ and R′′′ are preferably independently selected from hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl.
  • heteroatom includes oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), silicon (Si), and selenium (Se).
  • amino refers to the group —NR′R′′ (or N + RR′R′′) where R, R′ and R′′ are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, aryl alkyl, substituted aryl alkyl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl.
  • a substituted amine being an amine group wherein R′ or R′′ is other than hydrogen. In a primary amino group, both R′ and R′′ are hydrogen, whereas in a secondary amino group, either, but not both, R′ or R′′ is hydrogen.
  • the terms “amine” and “amino” can include protonated and quaternized versions of nitrogen, comprising the group —N + RR′R′′ and its biologically compatible anionic counterions.
  • aqueous solution refers to a solution that is predominantly water and retains the solution characteristics of water. Where the aqueous solution contains solvents in addition to water, water is typically the predominant solvent.
  • Carboxyalkyl refers to a group having the general formula —(CH 2 ) n COOH wherein n is 1-18.
  • activated alkyne refers to a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an azide reactive group on another molecule to form a covalent chemical bond between the activated alkyne group and the alkyne reactive group.
  • alkyne-reactive groups include azides.
  • Alkyne-reactive can also refer to a molecule that contains a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an alkyne group.
  • affinity refers to the strength of the binding interaction of two molecules, such as an antibody and an antigen or a positively charged moiety and a negatively charged moiety.
  • affinity is typically defined as the binding strength of one binding domain for the antigen, e.g. one Fab fragment for the antigen.
  • the binding strength of both binding domains together for the antigen is referred to as “avidity”.
  • High affinity refers to a ligand that binds to an antibody having an affinity constant (K a ) greater than 10 4 M ⁇ 1 , typically 10 5 -10 11 M ⁇ 1 ; as determined by inhibition ELISA or an equivalent affinity determined by comparable techniques such as, for example, Scatchard plots or using K d /dissociation constant, which is the reciprocal of the K a .
  • alkyne reactive refers to a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an alkyne modified group on another molecule to form a covalent chemical bond between the alkyne modified group and the alkyne reactive group.
  • alkyne-reactive groups include azides.
  • Alkyne-reactive can also refer to a molecule that contains a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an alkyne group.
  • antibody refers to a protein of the immunoglobulin (Ig) superfamily that binds noncovalently to certain substances (e.g. antigens and immunogens) to form an antibody-antigen complex.
  • Antibodies can be endogenous, or polyclonal wherein an animal is immunized to elicit a polyclonal antibody response or by recombinant methods resulting in monoclonal antibodies produced from hybridoma cells or other cell lines. It is understood that the term “antibody” as used herein includes within its scope any of the various classes or sub-classes of immunoglobulin derived from any of the animals conventionally used.
  • antibody fragments refers to fragments of antibodies that retain the principal selective binding characteristics of the whole antibody. Particular fragments are well-known in the art, for example, Fab, Fab′, and F(ab′) 2 , which are obtained by digestion with various proteases, pepsin or papain, and which lack the Fc fragment of an intact antibody or the so-called “half-molecule” fragments obtained by reductive cleavage of the disulfide bonds connecting the heavy chain components in the intact antibody.
  • Such fragments also include isolated fragments consisting of the light-chain-variable region, “Fv” fragments consisting of the variable regions of the heavy and light chains, and recombinant single chain polypeptide molecules in which light and heavy variable regions are connected by a peptide linker.
  • binding fragments include (i) the Fd fragment, consisting of the VH and CH1 domains; (ii) the dAb fragment (Ward, et al., Nature 341, 544 (1989)), which consists of a VH domain; (iii) isolated CDR regions; and (iv) single-chain Fv molecules (scFv) described above.
  • arbitrary fragments can be made using recombinant technology that retains antigen-recognition characteristics.
  • antigen refers to a molecule that induces, or is capable of inducing, the formation of an antibody or to which an antibody binds selectively, including but not limited to a biological material.
  • Antigen also refers to “immunogen”.
  • the target-binding antibodies selectively bind an antigen, as such the term can be used herein interchangeably with the term “target”.
  • anti-region antibody refers to an antibody that was produced by immunizing an animal with a select region that is a fragment of a foreign antibody wherein only the fragment is used as the immunogen. Regions of antibodies include the Fc region, hinge region, Fab region, etc. Anti-region antibodies include monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies.
  • anti-region fragment refers to a monovalent fragment that was generated from an anti-region antibody of the present invention by enzymatic cleavage.
  • aqueous solution refers to a solution that is predominantly water and retains the solution characteristics of water. Where the aqueous solution contains solvents in addition to water, water is typically the predominant solvent.
  • azide reactive refers to a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an azido modified group on another molecule to form a covalent chemical bond between the azido modified group and the azide reactive group.
  • azide-reactive groups include alkynes and phospines (e.g. triaryl phosphine).
  • Azide-reactive can also refer to a molecule that contains a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an azido group.
  • biomolecule refers to proteins, peptides, amino acids, glycoproteins, nucleic acids, nucleotides, nucleosides, oligonucleotides, sugars, oligosaccharides, lipids, hormones, proteoglycans, carbohydrates, polypeptides, polynucleotides, polysaccharides, which having characteristics typical of molecules found in living organisms and may be naturally occurring or may be artificial (not found in nature and not identical to a molecule found in nature).
  • buffer refers to a system that acts to minimize the change in acidity or basicity of the solution against addition or depletion of chemical substances.
  • carrier molecule refers to a biological or a non-biological component that is covalently bonded to compound of the present invention.
  • Such components include, but are not limited to, an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a polysaccharide, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid, a hapten, a psoralen, a drug, a hormone, a lipid, a lipid assembly, a synthetic polymer, a polymeric microparticle, a biological cell, a virus and combinations thereof.
  • chemical handle refers to a specific functional group, such as an azide, alkyne, activated alkyne, phosphite, phosphine, and the like.
  • the chemical handle is distinct from the reactive group, defined below, in that the chemical handle are moieties that are rarely found in naturally-occurring biomolecules and are chemically inert towards biomolecules (e.g., native cellular components), but when reacted with an azide- or alkyne-reactive group the reaction can take place efficiently under biologically relevant conditions (e.g., cell culture conditions, such as in the absence of excess heat or harsh reactants).
  • click chemistry refers to the Huisgen cycloaddition or the 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition between an azide and a terminal alkyne to form a 1,2,4-triazole.
  • Such chemical reactions can use, but are not limited to, simple heteroatomic organic reactants and are reliable, selective, stereospecific, and exothermic.
  • cycloaddition refers to a chemical reaction in which two or more ⁇ (pi)-electron systems (e.g., unsaturated molecules or unsaturated parts of the same molecule) combine to form a cyclic product in which there is a net reduction of the bond multiplicity.
  • ⁇ (pi)-electron systems e.g., unsaturated molecules or unsaturated parts of the same molecule
  • the ⁇ (pi) electrons are used to form new ⁇ (pi) bonds.
  • the product of a cycloaddition is called an “adduct” or “cycloadduct”.
  • Different types of cycloadditions are known in the art including, but not limited to, [3+2]cycloadditions and Diels-Alder reactions.
  • [3+2]cycloadditions which are also called 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions, occur between a 1,3-dipole and a dipolarophile and are typically used for the construction of five-membered heterocyclic rings.
  • the term “[3+2]cycloaddition” also encompasses “copperless” [3+2]cycloadditions between azides and cyclooctynes and difluorocyclooctynes described by Bertozzi et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2004, 126:15046-15047.
  • detectable response refers to an occurrence of, or a change in, a signal that is directly or indirectly detectable either by observation or by instrumentation.
  • the detectable response is an occurrence of a signal wherein the fluorophore is inherently fluorescent and does not produce a change in signal upon binding to a metal ion or biological compound.
  • the detectable response is an optical response resulting in a change in the wavelength distribution patterns or intensity of absorbance or fluorescence or a change in light scatter, fluorescence lifetime, fluorescence polarization, or a combination of the above parameters.
  • Other detectable responses include, for example, chemiluminescence, phosphorescence, radiation from radioisotopes, magnetic attraction, and electron density.
  • detectably distinct refers to a signal that is distinguishable or separable by a physical property either by observation or by instrumentation.
  • a fluorophore is readily distinguishable either by spectral characteristics or by fluorescence intensity, lifetime, polarization or photo-bleaching rate from another fluorophore in the sample, as well as from additional materials that are optionally present.
  • directly detectable refers to the presence of a material or the signal generated from the material is immediately detectable by observation, instrumentation, or film without requiring chemical modifications or additional substances.
  • fluorophore refers to a composition that is inherently fluorescent or demonstrates a change in fluorescence upon binding to a biological compound or metal ion, i.e., fluorogenic. Fluorophores may contain substitutents that alter the solubility, spectral properties or physical properties of the fluorophore.
  • fluorophores include, but are not limited to coumarin, cyanine, benzofuran, a quinoline, a quinazolinone, an indole, a benzazole, a borapolyazaindacene and xanthenes including fluoroscein, rhodamine and rhodol as well as other fluorophores described in RICHARD P. HAUGLAND, MOLECULAR PROBES HANDBOOK OF FLUORESCENT PROBES AND RESEARCH CHEMICALS (10 th edition, CD-ROM, September 2005), which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • glycoprotein refers to a protein that has been glycosolated and those that have been enzymatically modified, in vivo or in vitro, to comprise a sugar group.
  • kit refers to a packaged set of related components, typically one or more compounds or compositions.
  • label refers to a chemical moiety or protein that is directly or indirectly detectable (e.g. due to its spectral properties, conformation or activity) when attached to a target or compound and used in the present methods, including reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules.
  • the label can be directly detectable (fluorophore) or indirectly detectable (hapten or enzyme).
  • Such labels include, but are not limited to, radiolabels that can be measured with radiation-counting devices; pigments, dyes or other chromogens that can be visually observed or measured with a spectrophotometer; spin labels that can be measured with a spin label analyzer; and fluorescent labels (fluorophores), where the output signal is generated by the excitation of a suitable molecular adduct and that can be visualized by excitation with light that is absorbed by the dye or can be measured with standard fluorometers or imaging systems, for example.
  • radiolabels that can be measured with radiation-counting devices
  • pigments, dyes or other chromogens that can be visually observed or measured with a spectrophotometer
  • spin labels that can be measured with a spin label analyzer
  • fluorescent labels fluorophores
  • the label can be a chemiluminescent substance, where the output signal is generated by chemical modification of the signal compound; a metal-containing substance; or an enzyme, where there occurs an enzyme-dependent secondary generation of signal, such as the formation of a colored product from a colorless substrate.
  • the term label can also refer to a “tag” or hapten that can bind selectively to a conjugated molecule such that the conjugated molecule, when added subsequently along with a substrate, is used to generate a detectable signal.
  • biotin as a tag and then use an avidin or streptavidin conjugate of horseradish peroxidate (HRP) to bind to the tag, and then use a calorimetric substrate (e.g., tetramethylbenzidine (TMB)) or a fluorogenic substrate such as Amplex Red reagent (Molecular Probes, Inc.) to detect the presence of HRP.
  • a calorimetric substrate e.g., tetramethylbenzidine (TMB)
  • TMB tetramethylbenzidine
  • fluorogenic substrate such as Amplex Red reagent (Molecular Probes, Inc.)
  • Numerous labels are know by those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to, particles, fluorophores, haptens, enzymes and their calorimetric, fluorogenic and chemiluminescent substrates and other labels that are described in RICHARD P. HAUGLAND, MOLECULAR PROBES HANDBOOK OF FLUORESCENT PROBES AND RESEARCH PRO
  • linker refers to a single covalent bond or a series of stable covalent bonds incorporating 1-30 nonhydrogen atoms selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and P.
  • exemplary linking members include a moiety that includes —C(O)NH—, —C(O)O—, —NH—, —S—, —O—, and the like.
  • a “cleavable linker” is a linker that has one or more cleavable groups that may be broken by the result of a reaction or condition.
  • cleavable group refers to a moiety that allows for release of a portion, e.g., a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support, of a conjugate from the remainder of the conjugate by cleaving a bond linking the released moiety to the remainder of the conjugate. Such cleavage is either chemical in nature, or enzymatically mediated.
  • exemplary enzymatically cleavable groups include natural amino acids or peptide sequences that end with a natural amino acid.
  • non-enzymatic cleavage agents include, but are not limited to, acids, bases, light (e.g., nitrobenzyl derivatives, phenacyl groups, benzoin esters), and heat.
  • Many cleaveable groups are known in the art. See, for example, Jung et al., Biochem. Biophys. Acta, 761: 152-162 (1983); Joshi et al., J. Biol. Chem., 265: 14518-14525 (1990); Zarling et al., J. Immunol., 124: 913-920 (1980); Bouizar et al, Eur. J. Biochem., 155: 141-147 (1986); Park et al., J. Biol.
  • cleavable, bifunctional (both homo- and hetero-bifunctional) spacer arms are commercially available.
  • An exemplary cleavable group, an ester is cleavable group that may be cleaved by a reagent, e.g. sodium hydroxide, resulting in a carboxylate-containing fragment and a hydroxyl-containing product.
  • post translational moiety refers to any moiety that is naturally appended to a protein post translationally by a recombinant or naturally occurring enzyme. Examples include, but are not limited to, acetate, phosphate, various lipids and carbohydrates.
  • zido or alkyne modified post translational moiety means any post translational moiety that comprises an azido or alkyne group, which are groups rarely round in naturally occurring biological systems.
  • protein and “polypeptide” are used herein in a generic sense to include polymers of amino acid residues of any length.
  • peptide is used herein to refer to polypeptides having less than 100 amino acid residues, typically less than 10 amino acid residues. The terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residues are an artificial chemical analogue of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers.
  • purified refers to a preparation of a glycoprotein that is essentially free from contaminating proteins that normally would be present in association with the glycoprotein, e.g., in a cellular mixture or milieu in which the protein or complex is found endogenously such as serum proteins or cellular lysate.
  • reactive group refers to a group that is capable of reacting with another chemical group to form a covalent bond, i.e. is covalently reactive under suitable reaction conditions, and generally represents a point of attachment for another substance.
  • reactive groups refer to chemical moieties generally found in biological systems and that react under normal biological conditions, these are herein distinguished from the chemical handle, defined above, the azido and activated alkyne moieties of the present invention.
  • the reactive group is a moiety, such as carboxylic acid or succinimidyl ester, on the compounds of the present invention that is capable of chemically reacting with a functional group on a different compound to form a covalent linkage.
  • Reactive groups generally include nucleophiles, electrophiles and photoactivatable groups.
  • reporter molecule refers to any moiety capable of being attached to a modified post translationally modified protein of the present invention, and detected either directly or indirectly.
  • Reporter molecules include, without limitation, a chromophore, a fluorophore, a fluorescent protein, a phosphorescent dye, a tandem dye, a particle, a hapten, an enzyme and a radioisotope.
  • Preferred reporter molecules include fluorophores, fluorescent proteins, haptens, and enzymes.
  • sample refers to any material that may contain an analyte for detection or quantification or a modified post translationally modified protein of the present invention.
  • the analyte may include a reactive group, e.g., a group through which a compound of the invention can be conjugated to the analyte.
  • the sample may also include diluents, buffers, detergents, and contaminating species, debris and the like that are found mixed with the target.
  • Illustrative examples include urine, sera, blood plasma, total blood, saliva, tear fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, secretory fluids from nipples and the like.
  • the sample is a live cell, a biological fluid that comprises endogenous host cell proteins, nucleic acid polymers, nucleotides, oligonucleotides, peptides and buffer solutions.
  • the sample may be in an aqueous solution, a viable cell culture or immobilized on a solid or semi solid surface such as a polyacrylamide gel, membrane blot or on a microarray.
  • solid support refers to a material that is substantially insoluble in a selected solvent system, or which can be readily separated (e.g., by precipitation) from a selected solvent system in which it is soluble.
  • Solid supports useful in practicing the present invention can include groups that are activated or capable of activation to allow selected one or more compounds described herein to be bound to the solid support.
  • Staudinger ligation refers to a chemical reaction developed by Saxon and Bertozzi (E. Saxon and C. Bertozzi, Science, 2000, 287: 2007-2010) that is a modification of the classical Staudinger reaction.
  • the classical Staudinger reaction is a chemical reaction in which the combination of an azide with a phosphine or phosphite produces an aza-ylide intermediate, which upon hydrolysis yields a phosphine oxide and an amine.
  • a Staudinger reaction is a mild method of reducing an azide to an amine; and triphenylphosphine is commonly used as the reducing agent.
  • Staudinger ligation an electrophilic trap (usually a methyl ester) is appropriately placed on the aryl group of a triarylphosphine (usually ortho to the phosphorus atom) and reacted with the azide, to yield an aza-ylide intermediate, which rearranges in aqueous media to produce a compound with amide group and a phosphine oxide function.
  • the Staudinger ligation is so named because it ligates (attaches/covalently links) the two starting molecules together, whereas in the classical Staudinger reaction, the two products are not covalently linked after hydrolysis.
  • structural integrity of the [biomolecule] is not reduced” or “preservation of the structural integrity of the [biomolecule]”, as used herein, means that either: 1) when analyzed by gel electrophoresis and detection (such as staining), a band or spot arising from the labeled biomolecule is not reduced in intensity by more than 20%, and preferably not reduced by more than 10%, with respect to the corresponding band or spot arising from the same amount of the electrophoresed unlabeled biomolecule, arising from the labeled biomolecule analyzed; or 2) when analyzed by gel electrophoresis, a band or spot arising from the labeled biomolecule is not observed to be significantly less sharp than the corresponding band or spot arising from the same amount of the electrophoresed unlabeled biomolecule, where “significantly less sharp” (synonymous with “significantly more diffuse”) means the detectable band or spot takes up at least 5% more, preferably 10% more, more preferably 20% more area on the gel than the corresponding unlabeled biomolecule
  • the tagging/labeling of biomolecules can utilize various post-translation modifications to incorporate a bioorthoganol moiety into a biomolecule followed by chemical attachment of a label (reporter molecule, solid support, and carrier molecule).
  • An alternative approach is to incorporate a bioorthoganol moiety into the biomolecule using cellular biosynthetic pathways, or metabolic modifications.
  • bioorthogonol moieties are non-native, non-perturbing chemical handles possessing unique chemical functionality that can be modified through highly selective reactions.
  • moieties include, but are not limited to hyrazide and aminooxy derivatives, azides that can be selectively modified with phosphines (Staudinger ligation), azides that can be selectively modified with activated alkynes, and azides that can be selectively modified with terminal alkynes (“click” chemistry).
  • Post-translational modification is alteration of a primary structure of the protein after the protein has been translated. After translation, the post-translational modification of amino acids extends the range of functions of the protein by attaching to it other biochemical functional groups such as acetate, phosphate, various lipids and carbohydrates. In addition, the range of functions of proteins can be extended by post-translational modifications that change the chemical nature of an amino acid or by making structural changes such as disulfide bridges formation. Other post-translational modifications involve enzymes that remove amino acids from the amino end (N-terminus) of the protein, or cut the protein chain. Post-translational modifications act on individual residues either by cleavage at specific points, deletions, additions or by converting or modifying side chains.
  • the various post-translational modifications that can be used with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cleavage, N-terminal extensions, protein degradation, acylation of the N-terminus, biotinylation (acylation of lysine residues with a biotin), amidation of the C-terminal, glycosylation, iodination, covalent attachment of prosthetic groups, acetylation (the addition of an acetyl group, usually at the N-terminus of the protein), alkylation (the addition of an alkyl group (e.g.
  • Vitamin K is a cofactor in the carboxylation of glutamic acid residues resulting in the formation of a ⁇ -carboxyglutamate (a gla residue), glutamylation (covalent linkage of glutamic acid residues), glycylation (covalent linkage glycine residues), glycosylation (addition of a glycosyl group to either asparagine, hydroxylysine, serine, or threonine, resulting in a glycoprotein), isoprenylation (addition of an isoprenoid group such as farnesol and geranylger
  • the post-translational modifications that change the chemical nature of amino acids include, but are not limited to, citrullination (the conversion of arginine to citrulline by deimination), and deamidation (the conversion of glutamine to glutamic acid or asparagine to aspartic acid).
  • the post-translational modifications that involve structural changes include, but are not limited to, formation of disulfide bridges (covalent linkage of two cysteine amino acids) and proteolytic cleavage (cleavage of a protein at a peptide bond).
  • Certain post-translational modifications involve the addition of other proteins or peptides, such as ISGylation (covalent linkage to the ISG15 protein (Interferon-Stimulated Gene)), SUMOylation (covalent linkage to the SUMO protein (Small Ubiquitin-related MOdifier)) and ubiquitination (covalent linkage to the protein ubiquitin).
  • ISGylation covalent linkage to the ISG15 protein (Interferon-Stimulated Gene)
  • SUMOylation covalent linkage to the SUMO protein (Small Ubiquitin-related MOdifier)
  • ubiquitination covalent linkage to the protein ubiquitin.
  • selenoproteins are used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • Glycoproteins are biomolecules composed of proteins covalently linked to carbohydrates. Certain post-translational modifications append a sugar moiety (carbohydrate or oligosaccharide) onto a protein, thereby forming a glycoprotein.
  • the common monosaccharides found in glycoproteins include, but are not limited to, glucose, galactose, mannose, fucose, xylose, N-acetylgalactosamine (GalNAc), N-acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc) and N-acetylneuraminic acid (NANA, also known as sialic acid).
  • the sugar moiety can be a glycosyl group.
  • the carbohydrates can be linked to the protein component by either N-glycosylation or O-glycosylation.
  • N-glycosylation commonly occurs through asparagine forming an N-glycosidic linkage via an amide group.
  • O-glycosylation commonly occurs at hydroxylysine, hydroxyproline, serine, or threonine, forming an O-glycosidic linkage.
  • A) labeling alkyne modified biomolecules in solution followed by separation using methods known in the art for separating biomolecules based on size, weight and/or charge B) labeling immobilized alkyne modified biomolecules and C) novel methods for enzymatically labeling a biomolecule with an alkyne group.
  • These alkyne modified biomolecules can form conjugates with reporter molecules, carrier molecules or solid supports, that have azide groups, using either methods known in the art or the current methods provided herein.
  • the methods described herein can be used for metabolic and enzymatic selective labeling of different subclasses of glycoproteins, including cell surface N- and O-linked glycoproteins and intracellular O-GlcNAc-modified proteins.
  • labeling enables highly-sensitive detection of labeled glycoproteins using chromatographic and electrophoretic techniques including, but not limited to, gel electrophoresis and western blot analysis.
  • glycoproteins are “labeled” with azide modified sugar moieties, while in other embodiments glycoproteins are “labeled” with alkyne modified sugar moieties.
  • GalT galactose-1-phosphate uridyl transferase
  • Phosphoproteins are biomolecules composed of proteins having a phosphate group covalently linked to one or more serine, threonine, or tyrosine residues. Phosphate groups are added to proteins post translationally by kinases and removed by phoshphorylases; changes in the phosphorylation state of a protein can have a significant effect on its structure and function.
  • Phosphoproteins and phosphopeptides can also be modified by the addition of an azide or alkyne group.
  • a one or more phosphate groups on a phosphoprotein can be converted to an azido or alkyne, by using base treatment to remove the phosphate group of phosphoserine, converting it to dehydroamino-2-butyric acid, or to remove the phosphate group of threonine to convert it to dehydroalanine.
  • the dephosphorylated protein can then be reacted with a thiol or amine-containing compound that also comprises an azide or terminal alkyne to form an azido or alkyne labeled (phospho)protein.
  • a phosphoprotein so modified is referred to herein as a modified phosphoproteins, although all phosphate groups of the modified phosphoprotein may have been removed.
  • the invention thus includes a method of modifying a phosphoprotein to include an alkyne or azido group, in which the method includes: contacting a phosphoprotein that includes at least one phosphoserine residue or at least one phosphothreonine residue with a base solution that removes phosphates from threonine and serine residues of the phosphorylated protein to form a protein comprising at least one dehydroalanine or at least one dehydroamino-2-butyric acid; contacting the dehydroalanine or dehydroamino-2-butyric acid with a compound that includes a thio or amine group and has an azide or terminal alkyne to form an azido or alkyne modified protein; and contacting the azido or terminal alkyne-modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule, or solid support that comprises an azido moiety, where the phosphoprotein is labeled with a terminal alkyne, or a reporter molecule, carrier
  • the modified proteins used in the methods and compostions described herein can be formed by in vivo metabolic modification. Such in vivo metabolic modification of proteins can be accomplished using the methods described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,936,701.
  • cells are fed non-natural sugars having a desired functional group including, but not limited to, azide moieties and alkyne moieties and phosphine moieties. These non-natural sugars are then attached to the protein forming a glycoprotein conjugate which is then expressed by the cell.
  • the modified proteins are either naturally secreted and isolated, or they can be present, for example, in a cell lystate, extracellular milieu, cell fraction, or isolated from a complex protein mixture. The resulting modified protein is then used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • non-natural sugars contain a moiety that facilitates entry into the cell including, but not limited to, a tetraacetyl moiety.
  • non-natural sugar substrates used in the metabolic labeling of proteins used in the methods and compositions described herein, include small groups that the cellular machinery would be more likely to incorporate, and not recognize as being foreign. The cellular metabolic machinery incorporates the substrates into N- or O-linked glycans attached to the proteins.
  • One aspect of the methods provided herein involves metabolically labelling proteins with non-natural sugar substrates that have azido groups or alkyne groups that may be used for “click” chemistry as described herein.
  • Another aspect of the methods provided herein involves metabolically labelling proteins with non-natural sugar substrates that have azido groups or phosphine groups that may be used in a Staudinger ligation as described herein.
  • Such non-natural sugars can be synthesized using methods known in the art.
  • the non-natural sugars used to metabolically label proteins are non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but are not limited to, GlcNAz, GalNAz and ManNAz, or tetraacetylated non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but not limited to, GlcNAz, ManNAz, and GalNAz.
  • the non-natural sugars used to metabolically label glycoproteins or specific subsets of cellular glycoproteins in cultured cells are non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but are not limited to, GlcNAz, GalNAz and ManNAz, or tetraacetylated non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but not limited to, GlcNAz, ManNAz, and GalNAz.
  • FIG. 1 Certain embodiments of metabolic labeling with non-natural azido-containing sugars is shown in FIG. 1 , and described in Example 1, wherein cells are fed non-natural azido-containing sugars to obtain modified proteins, including modified glycoproteins, used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • FIG. 2 shows gel images of modified proteins obtained from Jurkat cells which were fed Ac 4 ManNAz or Ac 4 GalNAz for 3 days (A) or Ac 4 GlcNAz overnight (B).
  • the modified proteins were obtained from harvested cells and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe using “click” chemistry (C).
  • the gels were then stained with a protein stain that has different excitation/emission properties than the alkyne probe, thereby demonstrating the selectivity of “click” chemistry for glycoprotein labeling.
  • FIG. 3 shows a 2-D gel separation of proteins obtained from soluble Jurkat cell treated with Ac 4 GlcNAz and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe using click chemistry.
  • the control cell culture was not fed Ac 4 GlcNAz and therefore does not show the presence of the fluorescent alkyne probe.
  • staining with a protein stain shows the presence of protein in both gels.
  • the unnatural sugars described herein can be incorporated into various glycoproteins and subclasses of glycoproteins.
  • the glycoproteins are antibodies from antibody-producing cells such as, by way of example only, hybridoma cells, and any other cell that produces antibodies or recombinant antibodies.
  • the labeled antibodies may be directly labeled using an azide reactive reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule, as described herein.
  • the reporter molecules can include, but are not limited to labels, while the solid supports can include, but are not limited to, solid support resins, microtiter plates and microarray slides.
  • the carrier molecules can include, but are not limited to, affinity tags, nucleotides, oligonucleotides and polymers.
  • modified proteins used in the methods and compositions described herein can be modified in vitro using enzymatic post-translational modification.
  • post-translational modifications used in the methods and compostions described herein include, but are not limited to, glycosylation, isoprenylation, lipoylation and phosphorylation.
  • post-translational modifications are used to modify proteins with azide moieties, alkyne moieties, or phosphine moieties.
  • phosphine moieties include, but are not limited to, triaryl phosphines.
  • ⁇ -1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT), or a mutant thereof, to modify glycosylated proteins with azide moieties, alkyne moieties, or phosphine moieties.
  • ⁇ -1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT) is an enzyme that can catalyze the transfer of galactose from uridine diphosphate-GalNAz (UDP-GalNAz) to terminal GlcNAc groups.
  • UDP-GalNAz uridine diphosphate-GalNAz
  • glycoproteins are enzymatically labeled in vitro with azide modified sugar moieties, alkyne modified sugar moieties, or phosphine modifier sugar moieties.
  • GalT has been mutated, such as with a single Y289L mutation, to enlarge the binding pocket and to enhance the catalytic activity toward substrates.
  • Other mutations to GalT are contemplated such that the mutation provide enlargement of the binding pocket and enhancement of the catalytic activity toward substrates.
  • a mutant of ⁇ -GalT enzyme ⁇ -GalT1
  • UDP-GalNAz O-GlcNAc containing protein with azide
  • UDP-GalNAz is also a suitable substrate for the mutant of ⁇ -1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT1) resulting in the ability to enzymatically attach an non-natural azido-containing sugar to a glycoprotein.
  • the methods and compositions described herein for enzymatically labeling glycoproteins with azido-containing sugars, alkyne-containing sugars or phosphine-containing sugars provide for the rapid, selective and sensitive detection of post-translationally modified proteins, including, but not limited to, those with post-translational glycosylations.
  • detection methods utilize labeling using the selective reactivity of “click” chemistry, or Staudinger ligation, as described herein.
  • Such labeling methods can be used to detect post-translational modifications on proteins in which such modifications were undetectable using other techniques.
  • such labeling methods can be used to detect O-GlcNAc post-translational modifications on proteins in which such modifications are undetectable using other techniques.
  • enzymatic post-translational modification methods are used to selectively transfer azido, alkyne of phosphine functionality onto proteins using azido-containing substrates, alkyne-containing substrates or phosphine-containing substrates. Once transferred the modified protein can then be conjugated to a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier, molecule using a “click” chemistry, Staudinger ligation, or activated alkyne based reactions, thereby enabling detection, isolation and/or analysis of the modified protein.
  • the in vitro enzymatic labeling allows for sensitive detection of modified proteins from cells or tissues.
  • such methods are used to exploit the ability of an engineered mutant of ⁇ -1,4-galactosyltransferase to selectively transfer azido functionality onto O-GlcNAc glycosylated proteins using non-natural azido-containing sugars, alkyne functionality onto O-GlcNAc glycosylated proteins using non-natural alkyne-containing sugars, or phosphine functionality onto O-GlcNAc glycosylated proteins using non-natural phosphine-containing sugars.
  • the azido modified glycoprotein, alkyne modified glycoprotein or phosphine modified glycoprotein can then be conjugated to a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule using a “click” chemistry, Staudinger ligation or activated alkyne based reactions, thereby enabling detection, isolation and/or analysis of the modified protein.
  • the in vitro labeling with the modified ⁇ -GalT1 enzyme allows for sensitive detection of O-GlcNAc-modified proteins from cells or tissues and enables the characterization of inverse relationships between cellular O-GlcNAc modification and phosphorylation on the same proteins.
  • the methods and compositions described herein can be used to enzymatically label antibodies in vitro with azido-containing sugars, alkyne-containing sugars or phosphine-containing sugars can be used to label antibodies.
  • the labeled antibodies may be directly labeled using either an azide reactive, alkyne reactive or phosphine reaction reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule, as described herein.
  • antibodies can be enzymatically labeled with UDPGalNAz using GalT via reaction of the terminal OGlcNAc molecules present on antibody carbohydrates.
  • “Click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation can then be used to conjugate a dye or a hapten, such as biotin, (or other reporter molecules, solid supports or carrier molecules) to the attached azide moiety.
  • a dye or a hapten such as biotin, (or other reporter molecules, solid supports or carrier molecules)
  • a hapten such as biotin
  • FIG. 11B shows the enzymatic labeling of Goat antibody with UDP-GalNAz followed by conjugation with an alkyne-TAMRA dye using “click: chemistry. The selectivity and specificity of such conjugations is shown from the controls and general protein staining with a SYPRO® Ruby protein stain.
  • the invention also includes methods for enzymatically labeling proteins via attachment of an azido or alkyne modified phosphate to the protein.
  • Kinases that phosphorylate serine, threonine, and also tyrosine residues are known in the art and can be used for the attachment of azido or alkyne groups to a protein. Included herein is a method for forming a phosphoprotein comprising a terminal alkyne modified phosphate that includes contacting a protein with a terminal alkyne modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the terminal alkyne modified phosphate to the protein to form a terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein.
  • the protein has at least one serine, threonine, or tyrosine residue.
  • the invention also includes methods for forming a phosphoprotein conjugate, in which the phosphoprotein conjugate is attached to a reporter molecule, solid support, or carrier molecule, in which the method includes contacting a protein with a terminal alkyne modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the terminal alkyne modified phosphate to the protein to form a terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein; and contacting the terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises an azido moiety to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
  • Also included herein is a method for forming a phosphoprotein comprising a terminal azido modified phosphate that includes contacting a protein with an azido modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the azido modified phosphate to the protein to form an azido modified phosphoprotein.
  • the protein has at least one serine, threonine, or tyrosine residue.
  • the invention also includes methods for forming a phosphoprotein conjugate, in which the phosphoprotein conjugate is attached to a reporter molecule, solid support, or carrier molecule, in which the method includes contacting a protein with an azido modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the azido modified phosphate to the protein to form an azido modified phosphoprotein; and contacting the azido modified phosphoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises a terminal alkyne moiety to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
  • the methods described herein can also be used to label proteins which have been modified with lipids by post-translational lipoylation including, but not limited to, palmitoylation and myristolation.
  • azide-containing lipids, alkyne-containing lipids or phosphine-containing lipids are used to transfer azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties to proteins, whereupon such moieties are used to label the modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule and/or solid substrate using the methods described herein.
  • An example of such labeling of proteins is given in Example 32 and Example 33.
  • the methods described herein can be used to label proteins which have been modified with isoprenoid groups by post-translational isoprenylation including, but not limited to, farnesylation and geranylgeranylation.
  • azide-containing isoprenoids, alkyne-containing isoprenoids or phosphine-containing isoprenoids are used to transfer azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties to proteins, whereupon such moieties are used to label the modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule and/or solid substrate using the methods described herein.
  • An example of such labeling of proteins is given in Example 31.
  • Biomolecules that can be chemically modified using the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, proteins, peptides, amino acids, glycoproteins, nucleic acids, nucleotides, nucleosides, oligonucleotides, sugars, oligosaccharides, lipids, hormones, proteoglycans, carbohydrates, polypeptides, polynucleotides and polysaccharides.
  • Such biomolecules can contain azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties that are incorporated into biomolecules using post-translational modifications via cellular biosynthetic pathways (metabolic labeling) or enzymatic labeling as described herein.
  • azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties can be incorporated into biomolecules using chemical synthetic procedures as described herein.
  • These azide moieties, alkyne moieties and phosphine moieties are non-native, non-perturbing bioorthogonol chemical moieties that possess unique chemical functionality that can be modified through highly selective reactions.
  • the biomolecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can be labeled chemically, enzymatically (for example, by enzymatic in vitro incorporation into the biomolecule of a moiety that includes an azido group or terminal alkyne), or by supplying cells with alkyne or azido-containing molecular precursors (e.g., amino acids or sugars) that can be incorporated into biomolecules in vivo.
  • alkyne or azido-containing molecular precursors e.g., amino acids or sugars
  • Azides and terminal or internal alkynes can undergo a 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition (Huisgen cycloaddition) reaction to give a 1,2,3-triazole.
  • this reaction requires long reaction times and elevated temperatures.
  • azides and terminal alkynes can undergo Copper(I)-catalyzed Azide-Alkyne Cycloaddition (CuAAC) at room temperature.
  • CuAAC Copper(I)-catalyzed Azide-Alkyne Cycloaddition
  • Such copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions also known as “click” chemistry, is a variant of the Huisgen 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition wherein organic azides and terminal alkynes react to give 1,4-regioisomers of 1,2,3-triazoles.
  • click chemistry reactions are described by Sharpless et al. (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20050222427, published Oct. 6, 2005, PCT/US03/17311; Lewis W G, et al., Angewandte Chemie-Int'l Ed. 41 (6): 1053; method reviewed in Kolb, H. C., et al., Angew. Chem. Inst. Ed. 2001, 40:2004-2021), which developed reagents that react with each other in high yield and with few side reactions in a heteroatom linkage (as opposed to carbon-carbon bonds) in order to create libraries of chemical compounds.
  • click chemistry is used in the methods for labeling biomolecules.
  • the copper used as a catalyst for the “click” chemistry reaction used in the methods described herein to conjugate a label to a biomolecule is in the Cu (I) reduction state.
  • the sources of copper(I) used in such copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions can be any cuprous salt including, but not limited to, cuprous halides such as cuprous bromide or cuprous iodide.
  • this regioselective cycloaddition can also be conducted in the presence of a metal catalyst and a reducing agent.
  • copper can be provided in the Cu (II) reduction state (for example, as a salt, such as but not limited to Cu(NO 3 ) 2 Cu(OAc) 2 or CuSO 4 ), in the presence of a reducing agent wherein Cu(I) is formed in situ by the reduction of Cu(II).
  • a salt such as but not limited to Cu(NO 3 ) 2 Cu(OAc) 2 or CuSO 4
  • a reducing agent wherein Cu(I) is formed in situ by the reduction of Cu(II).
  • Such reducing agents include, but are not limited to, ascorbate, Tris(2-Carboxyethyl) Phosphine (TCEP), 2,4,6-trichlorophenol (TCP), NADH, NADPH, thiosulfate, metallic copper, quinone, hydroquinone, vitamin K 1 , glutathione, cysteine, 2-mercaptoethanol, dithiothreitol, Fe 2+ , Co 2+ , or an applied electric potential.
  • the reducing agents include metals selected from Al, Be, Co, Cr, Fe, Mg, Mn, Ni, Zn, Au, Ag, Hg, Cd, Zr, Ru, Fe, Co, Pt, Pd, Ni, Rh, and W.
  • the copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions for labeling biomolecules can be performed in water and a variety of solvents, including mixtures of water and a variety of (partially) miscible organic solvents including alcohols, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dimethyl formamide (DMF), tert-butanol (tBuOH) and acetone.
  • solvents including mixtures of water and a variety of (partially) miscible organic solvents including alcohols, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dimethyl formamide (DMF), tert-butanol (tBuOH) and acetone.
  • copper in the Cu (I) state is a preferred catalyst for the copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions, or “click” chemistry reactions, used in the methods described herein.
  • Certain metal ions are unstable in aqueous solvents, by way of example Cu(I), therefore stabilizing ligands/chelators can be used to improve the reaction.
  • at least one copper chelator is used in the methods described herein, wherein such chelators binds copper in the Cu (I) state.
  • at least one copper chelator is used in the methods described herein, wherein such chelators binds copper in the Cu (II) state.
  • the copper (I) chelator is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator.
  • phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelators include, but are not limited to, bathophenanthroline disulfonic acid (4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonic acid) and bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate).
  • chelators used in such methods include, but are not limited to, N-(2-acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid (PDA), S-carboxymethyl-L-cysteine (SCMC), trientine, tetra-ethylenepolyamine (TEPA), N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(2-pyridylmethyl)ethylenediamine (TPEN), EDTA, neocuproine, N-(2-acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid (PDA), S-carboxymethyl-L-cysteine (SCMC), tris-(benzyl-triazolylmethyl)amine (TBTA), or a derivative thereof.
  • ADA N-(2-acetamido)iminodiacetic acid
  • PDA pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid
  • SCMC S-carboxymethyl
  • metal chelators a wide variety of which are known in the chemical, biochemical, and medical arts, are known to chelate several metals, and thus metal chelators in general can be tested for their function in 1,3 cycloaddition reactions catalyzed by copper.
  • histidine is used as a chelator
  • glutathione is used as a chelator and a reducing agent.
  • the concentration of the reducing agents used in the “click” chemistry reaction described herein can be in the micromolar to millimolar range. In certain embodiments the concentration of the reducing agent is from about 100 micromolar to about 100 millimolar. In other embodiments the concentration of the reducing agent is from about 10 micromolar to about 10 millimolar. In other embodiments the concentration of the reducing agent is from about 1 micromolar to about 1 millimolar.
  • the methods describe herein for labeling biomolecules using “click” chemistry at least one copper chelator is added after copper(II) used in the reaction has been contacted with a reducing agent. In other embodiments, at least one copper chelator can be added immediately after contacting copper(II) with a reducing agent. In other embodiments, the copper chelator(s) is added between about five seconds and about twenty-four hours after copper(II) and a reducing agent have been combined in a reaction mixture.
  • At least one copper chelator can be added any time to a reaction mixture that includes copper(II) and a reducing agent, such as, by way of example only, immediately after contacting copper(II) and a reducing agent, or within about five minutes of contacting copper(II) and a reducing agent in the reaction mixture.
  • at least one copper chelator can be added between about five seconds and about one hour, between about one minute and about thirty minutes, between about five minutes and about one hour, between about thirty minutes and about two hours, between about one hour and about twenty-four hours, between about one hour and about five hours, between about two hours and about eight hours, after copper(II) and a reducing agent have been combined for use in a reaction mixture.
  • one or more copper chelators can be added more than once to such “click” chemistry reactions.
  • two or more of the copper chelators can bind copper in the Cu (I) state or, one or more of the copper chelators can bind copper in the Cu (I) state and one or more additional chelators can bind copper in the Cu (II) state.
  • one or more copper chelators can be added after the initial addition of a copper chelator to the “click” chemistry reaction.
  • the one or more copper chelators added after the initial addition of a copper chelator to the reaction can be the same or different from a copper chelator added at an earlier time to the reaction.
  • the concentration of a copper chelator used in the “click” chemistry reaction described herein can be determined and optimized using methods well known in the art, including those disclosed herein using “click” chemistry to label biomolecules followed by detecting such labeled biomolecules to determine the efficiency of the labeling reaction and the integrity of the labeled biomolecule(s) (see FIG. 5 ).
  • the chelator concentrations used in the methods described herein is in the micromolar to millimolar range, by way of example only, from 1 micromolar to 100 millimolar. In certain embodiments the chelator concentration is from about 10 micromolar to about 10 millimolar. In other embodiments the chelator concentration is from about 50 micromolar to about 10 millimolar.
  • the chelator can be provided in a solution that includes a water miscible solvent such as, alcohols, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dimethyl formamide (DMF), tert-butanol (tBuOH) and acetone.
  • a water miscible solvent such as, alcohols, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dimethyl formamide (DMF), tert-butanol (tBuOH) and acetone.
  • a solvent such as, for example, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) or dimethylformamide (DMF).
  • the biomolecule can possess an azide moiety, whereupon the label possesses an alkyne moiety, whereas in other embodiments the biomolecule can possess an alkyne moiety, and the label possesses an azide moiety.
  • the Staudinger reaction which involves reaction between trivalent phosphorous compounds and organic azides (Staudinger et al. Helv. Chim. Acta 1919, 2, 635), has been used for a multitude of applications. (Gololobov et al. Tetrahedron 1980, 37, 437); (Gololobov et al. Tetrahedron 1992, 48, 1353). There are almost no restrictions on the nature of the two reactants.
  • the Staudinger ligation is a modification of the Staudinger reaction in which an electrophilic trap (usually a methyl ester) is placed on a triaryl phosphine.
  • the aza-ylide intermediate rearranges, in aqueous media, to produce an amide linkage and the phosphine oxide, ligating the two molecules together, whereas in the Staudinger reaction the two products are not covalently linked after hydrolysis.
  • the phosphine can have a neighboring acyl group such as an ester, thioester or N-acyl imidazole (i.e. a phosphinoester, phosphinothioester, phosphinoimidazole) to trap the aza-ylide intermediate and form a stable amide bond upon hydrolysis.
  • the phosphine can be a di- or triarylphosphine to stabilize the phosphine.
  • the phosphines used in the Staudinger liagation methods described herein to conjugate a label to a biomolecule include, but are not limited to, cyclic or acyclic, halogenated, bisphosphorus, or even polymeric.
  • the azides can be alkyl, aryl, acyl or phosphoryl. In certain embodiments, such ligations are carried out under oxygen-free anhydrous conditions.
  • the proteins described herein can be modified using the modified sugars described herein, including but not limited to UDP-GalNAz, using a Staudinger reaction (see, for example, Saxon, E.; Luchansky, S. J.; Hang, H. C.; Yu, C.; Lee, S. C.; Bertozzi, C. R.; J. Am. Chem. Soc.; 2002; 124 (50); 14893-14902.).
  • Staudinger reaction see, for example, Saxon, E.; Luchansky, S. J.; Hang, H. C.; Yu, C.; Lee, S. C.; Bertozzi, C. R.; J. Am. Chem. Soc.; 2002; 124 (50); 14893-14902.
  • the biomolecule can possess an azide moiety, whereupon the label possesses a phosphine moiety, whereas in other embodiments the biomolecule can possess a phosphine moiety, and the label possesses an azide moiety.
  • Azides and alkynes can undergo catalyst free [3+2]cycloaddition by a using the reaction of activated alkynes with azides. Such catalyst free [3+2]cycloaddition can be used in methods described herein to conjugate a label to a biomolecule.
  • Alkynes can be activated by ring strain such as, by way of example only, eight membered ring structures, appending electron-withdrawing groups to such alkyne rings, or alkynes can be activated by the addition of a Lewis acid such as, by way of example only, Au(I) or Au(III).
  • the biomolecule can possess an azide moiety, whereupon the label possesses an activated alkyne moiety, whereas in other embodiments the biomolecule can possess an activated alkyne moiety, and the label possesses an azide moiety.
  • biomolecules including but not limited to proteins
  • they can be reacted under appropriate conditions to form conjugates with reporter molecules, solid supports or carrier molecules.
  • such proteins used for such conjugations may be present as a cell lysate, as isolated proteins, and/or as purified proteins, separated by gel electrophoresis or on a solid or semi-solid matrix.
  • the biomolecules are glycoproteins that have been modified, either metabolically or enzymatically, with azide-containing sugars, alkyne-containing sugars or phosphine-containing sugars.
  • the azide moiety, alkyne moiety or phosphine moiety is used as a reactive functional group on the modified biomolecule wherein an azide reactive moiety on a reporter molecule, a solid support or a carrier molecule, or an alkyne reactive moiety on a reporter molecule, a solid support or a carrier molecule, or a phosphine reactive moiety on a reporter molecule, a solid support or a carrier molecule is reacted with a modified biomolecule to form a covalent conjugate comprising the biomolecule and at least one reporter molecule, at least one solid support and/or at least one carrier molecule.
  • biomolecules are proteins, while in other embodiments such proteins are glycoproteins.
  • a glycoprotein containing an azide moiety can be selectively labeled with a reporter molecule, a solid support and/or a carrier molecule that contain azide reactive groups including, but not limited to, a terminal alkyne, an activated alkyne, or a phosphine.
  • a glycoprotein containing an alkyne moiety can be selectively labeled with a reporter molecule, a solid support and/or a carrier molecule that contain alkyne reactive groups including, but not limited to, an azide moiety.
  • a glycoprotein containing an activated alkyne moiety can be selectively labeled with a reporter molecule, a solid support and/or a carrier molecule that contain alkyne reactive groups including, but not limited to, an azide moiety.
  • two azide-reactive groups are use to label biomolecules: the first is an alkyne moiety used in a “click” chemistry reaction, and the second is a phosphine, such as a triarylphosphine, used in a Staudinger ligation.
  • “click” chemistry is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing an azide moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an alkyne moiety.
  • “click” chemistry is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing an alkyne moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support and/or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an azide moiety.
  • a Staudinger ligation is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing an azide moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support and/or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an triaryl phosphine moiety.
  • a Staudinger ligation is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing a triaryl phosphine moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support and/or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an azide moiety.
  • the methods described herein are not intended to be limited to these two azide-reactive groups, or chemical reactions, but it is envisioned that any chemical reaction utilizing an azide-reactive group attached to a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule can be used with the azide modified glycoproteins described herein.
  • Protein can be modified using nucleophilic substitution reactions with amines, carboxylates or sulfhydryl groups which are found more commonly on the surface of proteins.
  • the methods described herein utilize cycloaddition reactions, rather than nucleophilic substitution reactions, for selective modifications of proteins.
  • proteins described herein can be modified, with the modified sugars described herein, including but not limited to UDP-GalNAz, with extremely high selectivity.
  • Such reactions can be carried out at room temperature in aqueous conditions with excellent regioselectivity by the addition of catalytic amounts of Cu(I) salts to the reaction mixture. See, e.g., Tomoe, et al., (2002) Org. Chem.
  • the reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can contain at least one alkyne moiety or at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with an azide moiety.
  • the reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can contain at least one azide moiety capable of reacting with an alkyne moiety or a phosphine moiety.
  • the reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can contain at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with an azide moiety.
  • the phosphine moieties of the reporter molecules solid supports and carrier molecules described herein are triaryl phosphine moieties.
  • the reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can include, but are not limited to labels, while the solid supports can include, but are not limited to, solid support resins, microtiter plates and microarray slides.
  • the carrier molecules can include, but are not limited to, affinity tags, nucleotides, oligonucleotides and polymers.
  • the reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions provided herein include any directly or indirectly detectable reporter molecule known by one skilled in the art that can be covalently attached to a modified biomolecule, including a protein such as a glycoprotein.
  • modified glycoproteins can be azide modified glycoproteins, alkyne modified glycoproteins or phosphine modified glycoproteins.
  • the reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions provided herein include any directly or indirectly detectable reporter molecule known by one skilled in the art that can be covalently attached to an azide modified glycoprotein, an alkyne modified glycoprotein or a phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • Reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can contain, but are not limited to, a chromophore, a fluorophore, a fluorescent protein, a phosphorescent dye, a tandem dye, a particle, a hapten, an enzyme and a radioisotope.
  • reporter molecules include fluorophores, fluorescent proteins, haptens, and enzymes.
  • a fluorophore used in a reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein can contain one or more aromatic or heteroaromatic rings, that are optionally substituted one or more times by a variety of substituents, including without limitation, halogen, nitro, cyano, alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, acyl, aryl or heteroaryl ring system, benzo, or other substituents typically present on fluorophores known in the art.
  • a fluorophore used in a reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein is any chemical moiety that exhibits an absorption maximum at wavelengths greater than 280 nm, and retains its spectral properties when covalently attached to a labeling reagent such as, by way of example only, an azide, and alkyne or a phosphine.
  • Fluorophores used as in reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein include, without limitation; a pyrene (including any of the corresponding derivative compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • oxazines include resorufins (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in 5,242,805), aminooxazinones, diaminooxazines, and their benzo-substituted analogs.
  • Xanthene type fluorophores used in reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, a fluorescein, a rhodol (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,227,487 and 5,442,045), or a rhodamine (including any corresponding compounds in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,798,276; 5,846,737; U.S. Ser. No. 09/129,015).
  • fluorescein includes benzo- or dibenzofluoresceins, seminaphthofluoresceins, or naphthofluoresceins.
  • rhodol includes seminaphthorhodafluors (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,945,171).
  • the fluorophore is a xanthene that is bound via a linkage that is a single covalent bond at the 9-position of the xanthene.
  • the xanthenes include derivatives of 3H-xanthen-6-ol-3-one attached at the 9-position, derivatives of 6-amino-3H-xanthen-3-one attached at the 9-position, or derivatives of 6-amino-3H-xanthen-3-imine attached at the 9-position.
  • the fluorophores used in reporter molecules in the methods and compositions described herein include xanthene (rhodol, rhodamine, fluorescein and derivatives thereof) coumarin, cyanine, pyrene, oxazine and borapolyazaindacene.
  • fluorphores are sulfonated xanthenes, fluorinated xanthenes, sulfonated coumarins, fluorinated coumarins and sulfonated cyanines.
  • azide moieties or alkyne moieties When used in “click” chemistry reaction such fluorphores form triazole products which do not requires UV excitation and overcome any quenching effect due to conjugation of azido or alkyne groups to the fluorescent ⁇ -system.
  • the choice of the fluorophore attached to the labeling reagent will determine the absorption and fluorescence emission properties of the labeling reagent, modified glycoprotein and immuno-labeled complex.
  • Physical properties of a fluorophore label that can be used for detection of modified glycoproteins and an immuno-labeled complex include, but are not limited to, spectral characteristics (absorption, emission and stokes shift), fluorescence intensity, lifetime, polarization and photo-bleaching rate, or combination thereof. All of these physical properties can be used to distinguish one fluorophore from another, and thereby allow for multiplexed analysis.
  • the fluorophore has an absorption maximum at wavelengths greater than 480 nm.
  • the fluorophore absorbs at or near 488 nm to 514 nm (particularly suitable for excitation by the output of the argon-ion laser excitation source) or near 546 nm (particularly suitable for excitation by a mercury arc lamp).
  • fluorophores can also function as chromophores and thus the described fluorophores are also chromophores used in reporter molecules in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • enzymes In addition to fluorophores, enzymes also find use as labels for the detection reagents/reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein. Enzymes are desirable labels because amplification of the detectable signal can be obtained resulting in increased assay sensitivity. The enzyme itself does not produce a detectable response but functions to break down a substrate when it is contacted by an appropriate substrate such that the converted substrate produces a fluorescent, calorimetric or luminescent signal. Enzymes amplify the detectable signal because one enzyme on a labeling reagent can result in multiple substrates being converted to a detectable signal. This is advantageous where there is a low quantity of target present in the sample or a fluorophore does not exist that will give comparable or stronger signal than the enzyme.
  • the enzyme substrate is selected to yield the preferred measurable product, e.g. calorimetric, fluorescent or chemiluminescence.
  • Such substrates are extensively used in the art, many of which are described in the MOLECULAR PROBES HANDBOOK, supra.
  • calorimetric or fluorogenic substrate and enzyme combination use oxidoreductases such as, by way of example only, horseradish peroxidase and a substrate such as, by way of example only, 3,3′-diaminobenzidine (DAB) or 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole (AEC), which yield a distinguishing color (brown and red, respectively).
  • oxidoreductases such as, by way of example only, horseradish peroxidase and a substrate such as, by way of example only, 3,3′-diaminobenzidine (DAB) or 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole (AEC), which yield a distinguishing color (brown and red, respectively).
  • calorimetric oxidoreductase substrates used with the enzymatic reporter molecules described herein include, but are not limited to: 2,2-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid) (ABTS), o-phenylenediamine (OPD), 3,3′,5,5′-tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), o-dianisidine, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 4-chloro-1-naphthol.
  • Fluorogenic substrates used with the enzymatic reporter molecules described herein include, but are not limited to, homovanillic acid or 4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenylacetic acid, reduced phenoxazines and reduced benzothiazines, including Amplex® Red reagent and its variants (U.S. Pat. No. 4,384,042), Amplex UltraRed and its variants in (WO 05042504) and reduced dihydroxanthenes, including dihydrofluoresceins (U.S. Pat. No. 6,162,931) and dihydrorhodamines including dihydrorhodamine 123.
  • Peroxidase substrates can be used with the enzymatic reporter molecules described herein.
  • Such peroxide substrates include, but are not limited to, tyramides (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,196,306; 5,583,001 and 5,731,158) which represent a unique class of peroxidase substrates in that they can be intrinsically detectable before action of the enzyme but are “fixed in place” by the action of a peroxidase in the process described as tyramide signal amplification (TSA).
  • TSA tyramide signal amplification
  • the colorimetric (and in some cases fluorogenic) substrates and enzymes combination used in reporter molecules described herein include a phosphatase enzyme such as, by way of example only, an acid phosphatase, an alkaline phosphatase or a recombinant version of such a phosphatase.
  • a colorimetric substrate used in combination with such phosphatases include, but are not limited to, 5-bromo-6-chloro-3-indolyl phosphate (BCIP), 6-chloro-3-indolyl phosphate, 5-bromo-6-chloro-3-indolyl phosphate, p-nitrophenyl phosphate, or o-nitrophenyl phosphate or with a fluorogenic substrate such as 4-methylumbelliferyl phosphate, 6,8-difluoro-7-hydroxy-4-methylcoumarinyl phosphate (DiFMUP, U.S. Pat. No.
  • glycosidases including, but not limited to, beta-galactosidase, beta-glucuronidase and beta-glucosidase.
  • the colorimetric substrates used with such enzymes include, but are not limited to, 5-bromo-4-chloro-3-indolyl beta-D-galactopyranoside (X-gal) and similar indolyl galactosides, glucosides, and glucuronides, o-nitrophenyl beta-D-galactopyranoside (ONPG) and p-nitrophenyl beta-D-galactopyranoside.
  • Preferred fluorogenic substrates include resorufin beta-D-galactopyranoside, fluorescein digalactoside (FDG), fluorescein diglucuronide and their structural variants (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,208,148; 5,242,805; 5,362,628; 5,576,424 and 5,773,236), 4-methylumbelliferyl beta-D-galactopyranoside, carboxyumbelliferyl beta-D-galactopyranoside and fluorinated coumarin beta-D-galactopyranosides (U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,912).
  • Additional enzymes used in reporter molecules described herein include, but are not limited to, hydrolases such as cholinesterases and peptidases, oxidases such as glucose oxidase and cytochrome oxidases, and reductases for which suitable substrates are known.
  • Enzymes and their appropriate substrates that produce chemiluminescence can also be used in reporter molecules described herein.
  • Such enzymes include, but are not limited to, natural and recombinant forms of luciferases and aequorins.
  • the chemiluminescence-producing substrates for phosphatases, glycosidases and oxidases such as those containing stable dioxetanes, luminol, isoluminol and acridinium esters an also be used in reporter molecules described herein.
  • haptens can be used in label/reporter molecules described herein.
  • such haptens include hormones, naturally occurring and synthetic drugs, pollutants, allergens, affector molecules, growth factors, chemokines, cytokines, lymphokines, amino acids, peptides, chemical intermediates, nucleotides, biotin and the like.
  • Biotin is useful because it can function in an enzyme system to further amplify the detectable signal, and it can function as a tag to be used in affinity chromatography for isolation purposes.
  • an enzyme conjugate that has affinity for biotin is used, such as, by way of example only, avidin-Horse Radish Peroxidase (HRP). Subsequently a peroxidase substrate as described herein can be added to produce a detectable signal.
  • HRP avidin-Horse Radish Peroxidase
  • Fluorescent proteins can also be used in label/reporter molecules described herein for use in the methods, compositions and labeling reagents described herein.
  • Non-limiting examples of such fluorescent proteins include green fluorescent protein (GFP) and the phycobiliproteins and the derivatives thereof.
  • the fluorescent proteins, especially phycobiliprotein, are particularly useful for creating tandem dye labeled labeling reagents. These tandem dyes comprise a fluorescent protein and a fluorophore for the purposes of obtaining a larger stokes shift wherein the emission spectra is farther shifted from the wavelength of the fluorescent protein's absorption spectra.
  • the fluorescent protein and fluorophore function as an energy transfer pair wherein the fluorescent protein emits at the wavelength that the fluorophore absorbs and the fluorophore then emits at a wavelength farther from the fluorescent proteins emission wavelength than could have been obtained with only the fluorescent protein.
  • a particularly useful combination is the phycobiliproteins disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • the fluorophore functions as the energy donor and the fluorescent protein is the energy acceptor.
  • the modified biomolecules can be conjugated to a carrier molecule.
  • proteins such as glycoproteins
  • proteins are covalently conjugated to a carrier molecule. This includes, but is not limited to, any azide modified glycoprotein disclosed herein and any carrier molecule disclosed herein.
  • the glycoproteins contain at least one alkyne moiety or at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a carrier molecule containing an azide moiety.
  • the glycoproteins contain at least one azide moiety capable of reacting with a carrier molecule containing an alkyne moiety or a phosphine moiety.
  • the glycoproteins contain at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a carrier molecule containing an azide moiety.
  • the phosphine moieties of the glycoproteins and carrier molecules are triaryl phosphine moieties.
  • carrier molecules can be used in the methods and compositions described herein, including, but not limited to, antigens, steroids, vitamins, drugs, haptens, metabolites, toxins, environmental pollutants, amino acids, peptides, proteins, nucleic acids, nucleic acid polymers, carbohydrates, lipids, and polymers.
  • the carrier molecule contain an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a polysaccharide, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid, a hapten, a psoralen, a drug, a hormone, a lipid, a lipid assembly, a synthetic polymer, a polymeric microparticle, a biological cell, a virus or combinations thereof.
  • the carrier molecule is selected from a hapten, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid polymer, a protein, a peptide or a polysaccharide.
  • the carrier molecule is an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a polysaccharide, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid, a hapten, a psoralen, a drug, a hormone, a lipid, a lipid assembly, a tyramine, a synthetic polymer, a polymeric microparticle, a biological cell, cellular components, an ion chelating moiety, an enzymatic substrate or a virus.
  • the carrier molecule is an antibody or fragment thereof, an antigen, an avidin or streptavidin, a biotin, a dextran, an IgG binding protein, a fluorescent protein, agarose, and a non-biological microparticle.
  • the carrier molecule is an enzymatic substrate
  • the enzymatic substrate is selected from an amino acid, a peptide, a sugar, an alcohol, alkanoic acid, 4-guanidinobenzoic acid, a nucleic acid, a lipid, sulfate, phosphate, —CH 2 OCO-alkyl and combinations thereof.
  • such enzyme substrates can be cleaved by enzymes selected from peptidases, phosphatases, glycosidases, dealkylases, esterases, guanidinobenzotases, sulfatases, lipases, peroxidases, histone deacetylases, exonucleases, reductases, endoglycoceramidases and endonucleases.
  • enzymes selected from peptidases, phosphatases, glycosidases, dealkylases, esterases, guanidinobenzotases, sulfatases, lipases, peroxidases, histone deacetylases, exonucleases, reductases, endoglycoceramidases and endonucleases.
  • the carrier molecule is an amino acid (including those that are protected or are substituted by phosphates, carbohydrates, or C 1 to C 22 carboxylic acids), or a polymer of amino acids such as a peptide or protein.
  • the carrier molecule contains at least five amino acids, more preferably 5 to 36 amino acids.
  • peptides include, but are not limited to, neuropeptides, cytokines, toxins, protease substrates, and protein kinase substrates.
  • Other peptides may function as organelle localization peptides, that is, peptides that serve to target the conjugated compound for localization within a particular cellular substructure by cellular transport mechanisms, including, but not limited to, nuclear localization signal sequences.
  • the protein carrier molecules include enzymes, antibodies, lectins, glycoproteins, histones, albumins, lipoproteins, avidin, streptavidin, protein A, protein G, phycobiliproteins and other fluorescent proteins, hormones, toxins and growth factors.
  • the protein carrier molecule is an antibody, an antibody fragment, avidin, streptavidin, a toxin, a lectin, or a growth factor.
  • the carrier molecules contain haptens including, but not limited to, biotin, digoxigenin and fluorophores.
  • the carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also contain a nucleic acid base, nucleoside, nucleotide or a nucleic acid polymer, optionally containing an additional linker or spacer for attachment of a fluorophore or other ligand, such as an alkynyl linkage (U.S. Pat. No. 5,047,519), an aminoallyl linkage (U.S. Pat. No. 4,711,955) or other linkage.
  • a nucleic acid base nucleoside, nucleotide or a nucleic acid polymer
  • an additional linker or spacer for attachment of a fluorophore or other ligand such as an alkynyl linkage (U.S. Pat. No. 5,047,519), an aminoallyl linkage (U.S. Pat. No. 4,711,955) or other linkage.
  • the nucleotide carrier molecule is a nucleoside or a deoxynucleoside or a dideoxynucleoside, while in other embodiments, the carrier molecule contains a peptide nucleic acid (PNA) sequence or a locked nucleic acid (LNA) sequence.
  • PNA peptide nucleic acid
  • LNA locked nucleic acid
  • the nucleic acid polymer carrier molecules are single- or multi-stranded, natural or synthetic DNA or RNA oligonucleotides, or DNA/RNA hybrids, or incorporating an unusual linker such as morpholine derivatized phosphates (AntiVirals, Inc., Corvallis Oreg.), or peptide nucleic acids such as N-(2-aminoethyl)glycine units, where the nucleic acid contains fewer than 50 nucleotides, more typically fewer than 25 nucleotides.
  • an unusual linker such as morpholine derivatized phosphates (AntiVirals, Inc., Corvallis Oreg.)
  • peptide nucleic acids such as N-(2-aminoethyl)glycine units
  • the carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also contain a carbohydrate or polyol, including a polysaccharide, such as dextran, FICOLL, heparin, glycogen, amylopectin, mannan, inulin, starch, agarose and cellulose, or a polymer such as a poly(ethylene glycol).
  • the polysaccharide carrier molecule includes dextran, agarose or FICOLL.
  • the carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also include a lipid including, but not limited to, glycolipids, phospholipids, and sphingolipids. In certain embodiments, such lipids contain 6-25 carbons. In other embodiments, the carrier molecules include a lipid vesicle, such as a liposome, or is a lipoprotein (see below). Some lipophilic substituents are useful for facilitating transport of the conjugated dye into cells or cellular organelles.
  • the carrier molecule that possess a lipophilic substituent can be used to target lipid assemblies such as biological membranes or liposomes by non-covalent incorporation of the dye compound within the membrane, e.g., for use as probes for membrane structure or for incorporation in liposomes, lipoproteins, films, plastics, lipophilic microspheres or similar materials.
  • the carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also be a cell, cellular systems, cellular fragment, or subcellular particles, including virus particles, bacterial particles, virus components, biological cells (such as animal cells, plant cells, bacteria, or yeast), or cellular components.
  • Non-limiting examples of such cellular components that are useful as carrier molecules in the methods and composition described herein include lysosomes, endosomes, cytoplasm, nuclei, histones, mitochondria, Golgi apparatus, endoplasmic reticulum and vacuoles.
  • the carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also non-covalently associates with organic or inorganic materials.
  • the carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also include a specific binding pair member wherein the glycoproteins described herein can be conjugated to a specific binding pair member and used in the formation of a bound pair.
  • the presence of a labeled specific binding pair member indicates the location of the complementary member of that specific binding pair; each specific binding pair member having an area on the surface or in a cavity which specifically binds to, and is complementary with, a particular spatial and polar organization of the other.
  • the dye compounds (fluorophores or chromophores) described herein function as a reporter molecule for the specific binding pair. Exemplary binding pairs are set forth in Table 2.
  • the carrier molecule used in the methods and compositions described herein, is an antibody fragment, such as, but not limited to, anti-Fc, an anti-Fc isotype, anti-J chain, anti-kappa light chain, anti-lambda light chain, or a single-chain fragment variable protein; or a non-antibody peptide or protein, such as, for example but not limited to, soluble Fc receptor, protein G, protein A, protein L, lectins, or a fragment thereof.
  • the carrier molecule is a Fab fragment specific to the Fc portion of the target-binding antibody or to an isotype of the Fc portion of the target-binding antibody (U.S. Ser. No. 10/118,204).
  • the monovalent Fab fragments are typically produced from either murine monoclonal antibodies or polyclonal antibodies generated in a variety of animals, for example but not limited to, rabbit or goat. These fragments can be generated from any isotype such as murine IgM, IgG 1 , IgG 2a , IgG 2b or IgG 3 .
  • a non-antibody protein or peptide such as protein G, or other suitable proteins
  • albumin include human and bovine serum albumins or ovalbumin.
  • Protein A, G and L are defined to include those proteins known to one skilled in the art or derivatives thereof that comprise at least one binding domain for IgG, i.e. proteins that have affinity for IgG. These proteins can be modified but do not need to be and are conjugated to a reactive moiety in the same manner as the other carrier molecules described.
  • the carrier molecules, used in the methods and compositions described herein can be whole intact antibodies.
  • Antibody is a term of the art denoting the soluble substance or molecule secreted or produced by an animal in response to an antigen, and which has the particular property of combining specifically with the antigen that induced its formation.
  • Antibodies themselves also serve are antigens or immunogens because they are glycoproteins and therefore are used to generate anti-species antibodies.
  • Antibodies, also known as immunoglobulins are classified into five distinct classes—IgG, IgA, IgM, IgD, and IgE.
  • the basic IgG immunoglobulin structure consists of two identical light polypeptide chains and two identical heavy polypeptide chains (linked together by disulfide bonds).
  • Fab fragment When IgG is treated with the enzyme papain a monovalent antigen-binding fragment can be isolated, referred herein to as a Fab fragment.
  • pepsin another proteolytic enzyme
  • F(ab′) 2 a larger fragment is produced, F(ab′) 2 .
  • This fragment can be split in half by treating with a mild reducing buffer that results in the monovalent Fab′ fragment.
  • the Fab′ fragment is slightly larger than the Fab and contains one or more free sulfhydryls from the hinge region (which are not found in the smaller Fab fragment).
  • antibody fragment is used herein to define the Fab′, F(ab′) 2 and Fab portions of the antibody. It is well known in the art to treat antibody molecules with pepsin and papain in order to produce antibody fragments (Gorevic et al., Methods of Enzyol., 116:3 (1985)).
  • the monovalent Fab fragments used as carrier molecules in the methods and compositions described herein are produced from either murine monoclonal antibodies or polyclonal antibodies generated in a variety of animals that have been immunized with a foreign antibody or fragment thereof (U.S. Pat. No. 4,196,265 discloses a method of producing monoclonal antibodies).
  • secondary antibodies are derived from a polyclonal antibody that has been produced in a rabbit or goat but any animal known to one skilled in the art to produce polyclonal antibodies can be used to generate anti-species antibodies.
  • the term “primary antibody” describes an antibody that binds directly to the antigen as opposed to a “secondary antibody” that binds to a region of the primary antibody.
  • Monoclonal antibodies are equal, and in some cases, preferred over polyclonal antibodies provided that the ligand-binding antibody is compatible with the monoclonal antibodies that are typically produced from murine hybridoma cell lines using methods well known to one skilled in the art.
  • the antibodies used as carrier molecules in the methods and compositions described herein are generated against only the Fc region of a foreign antibody.
  • the animal is immunized with only the Fc region fragment of a foreign antibody, such as murine.
  • the polyclonal antibodies are collected from subsequent bleeds, digested with an enzyme, pepsin or papain, to produce monovalent fragments.
  • the fragments are then affinity purified on a column comprising whole immunoglobulin protein that the animal was immunized against or just the Fc fragments.
  • the modified biomolecules can be covalently conjugated to a solid support.
  • proteins such as glycoproteins, are covalently conjugated to a solid support. This includes, but is not limited to, any azide modified glycoprotein disclosed herein and any solid support disclosed herein.
  • the glycoproteins contain at least one alkyne moiety or at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a solid support containing an azide moiety.
  • the glycoproteins contain at least one azide moiety capable of reacting with a solid support containing an alkyne moiety or a phosphine moiety.
  • the glycoproteins contain at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a solid support containing an azide moiety.
  • the phosphine moieties of the glycoproteins and solid supports are triaryl phosphine moieties.
  • solid supports can be used in the methods and compositions described herein. Such solid supports are not limited to a specific type of support, and therefore a large number of supports are available and are known to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Such solid supports include, but are not limited to, solid and semi-solid matrixes, such as aerogels and hydrogels, resins, beads, biochips (including thin film coated biochips), microfluidic chip, a silicon chip, multi-well plates (also referred to as microtitre plates or microplates), membranes, conducting and nonconducting metals, glass (including microscope slides) and magnetic supports.
  • solid supports used in the methods and compositions described herein include silica gels, polymeric membranes, particles, derivatized plastic films, derivatized glass, derivatized silica, glass beads, cotton, plastic beads, alumina gels, polysaccharides such as Sepharose, poly(acrylate), polystyrene, poly(acrylamide), polyol, agarose, agar, cellulose, dextran, starch, FICOLL, heparin, glycogen, amylopectin, mannan, inulin, nitrocellulose, diazocellulose, polyvinylchloride, polypropylene, polyethylene (including poly(ethylene glycol)), nylon, latex bead, magnetic bead, paramagnetic bead, superparamagnetic bead, starch and the like.
  • the solid supports used in the methods and compositions described herein are substantially insoluble in liquid phases.
  • the solid support may include a solid support reactive functional group, including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the azide-containing glycoproteins described herein.
  • a solid support reactive functional group including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the azide-containing glycoproteins described herein.
  • the solid support may include a solid support reactive functional group, including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the alkyne-containing glycoproteins described herein.
  • a solid support reactive functional group including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the alkyne-containing glycoproteins described herein.
  • the solid support may include a solid support reactive functional group, including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the phosphine-containing glycoproteins described herein.
  • the solid supports include azide, alkyne or phosphine functional groups to covalently attach such modified glycoproteins.
  • a suitable solid phase support used in the methods and compositions described herein can be selected on the basis of desired end use and suitability for various synthetic protocols.
  • resins generally useful in peptide synthesis may be employed, such as polystyrene (e.g., PAM-resin obtained from Bachem Inc., Peninsula Laboratories, etc.), POLYHIPETM resin (obtained from Aminotech, Canada), polyamide resin (obtained from Peninsula Laboratories), polystyrene resin grafted with polyethylene glycol (TentaGelTM, Rapp Polymere, Tubingen, Germany), polydimethyl-acrylamide resin (available from Milligen/Biosearch, California), or PEGA beads (obtained from Polymer Laboratories).
  • polystyrene e.g., PAM-resin obtained from Bachem Inc., Peninsula Laboratories, etc.
  • POLYHIPETM resin obtained from Aminotech, Canada
  • polyamide resin obtained from Peninsula Laboratories
  • the modified glycoproteins described herein are deposited onto a solid support in an array format.
  • such deposition is accomplished by direct surface contact between the support surface and a delivery mechanism, such as a pin or a capillary, or by ink jet technologies which utilize piezoelectric and other forms of propulsion to transfer liquids from miniature nozzles to solid surfaces.
  • a delivery mechanism such as a pin or a capillary
  • ink jet technologies which utilize piezoelectric and other forms of propulsion to transfer liquids from miniature nozzles to solid surfaces.
  • robotic control systems and multiplexed printheads allow automated microarray fabrication.
  • robotic systems also allow for automatic microarray fabrication using either continuous and drop-on-demand devices.
  • the modified biomolecules, reporter molecules and carrier molecules provided herein can be used to form a first composition that includes a modified biomolecule, a first reporter molecule, and a carrier molecule.
  • the first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra.
  • the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap.
  • the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser.
  • the carrier molecule (or solid support) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule.
  • modified proteins such as glycoproteins, reporter molecules and carrier molecules provided herein can be used to form a first composition that includes a modified glycoprotein, a first reporter molecule, and a carrier molecule.
  • a second glycoprotein that includes a first composition in combination with a second conjugate, wherein the second conjugate comprises a carrier molecule or solid support that is covalently bonded to a second reporter molecule.
  • the first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra.
  • the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap.
  • the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser.
  • the carrier molecule (or solid support) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule.
  • the modified biomolecules, reporter molecules and solid supports provided herein can be used to form a first composition that comprises a modified biomolecule, a first reporter molecule, and a solid support.
  • a second composition that includes a first composition in combination with a second conjugate.
  • the second conjugate comprises a solid support or carrier molecule (described herein) that is covalently bonded to a second reporter molecule.
  • the first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra.
  • the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap.
  • the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser.
  • the solid support (or carrier molecule) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule.
  • the modified proteins such as glycoproteins, reporter molecules and solid supports provided herein can be used to form a first composition that comprises a modified glycoprotein, a first reporter molecule, and a solid support.
  • a second composition that includes a first composition in combination with a second conjugate.
  • the second conjugate comprises a solid support or carrier molecule (described herein) that is covalently bonded to a second reporter molecule.
  • the first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra.
  • the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap.
  • the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser.
  • the solid support (or carrier molecule) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule.
  • modified biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugates are described herein.
  • the biomolecules are glycoproteins that have been azido modified metabolically, enzymatically or chemically using the methods described herein.
  • the modified biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugates are formed in solution and then separated using methods known in the art.
  • the biomolecule labeled with the reporter molecule is a modified glycoprotein.
  • the biomolecule labeled with the reporter molecule is an azido modified glycoprotein, alkyne modified glycoprotein, or phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • “click” chemistry is used to form conjugates with alkyne modified biomolecules and a reporter molecule comprising an azide.
  • Staudinger ligation is used to form conjugates with azide modified biomolecules and a reporter molecule comprising a phosphine
  • Staudinger ligation to form conjugates with phosphine modified biomolecules and a reporter molecule comprising an azide.
  • Still other embodiments use activated alkyne modified biomolecules to form conjugates with reporter molecules comprising azides, or azide modified biomolecules forming conjugates with activated alkyne containing reporter molecules.
  • the methods of labeling biomolecules using “click” chemistry involve a biomolecule that includes an azido group and a label that includes a terminal alkyne that are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper (I) chelator, thereby producing a labeled biomolecule.
  • the biomolecules labeled in such methods can be polysaccharides, nucleic acids, proteins, or peptides.
  • the biomolecules used in the labeling methods described herein are glycoproteins
  • the biomolecules used in the labeling methods described herein are proteins, such as but not limited to glycoproteins.
  • the labeling methods used to label proteins, including glycoproteins include “click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation.
  • the labeling of glycoproteins occurs by “click” chemistry in which a glycoprotein that includes an azido group and a label that comprises a terminal alkyne react in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein.
  • the labeling of glycoproteins occurs by “click” chemistry in which a glycoprotein that includes an alkyne group and a label that comprises an azide react in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein.
  • the methods of labeling biomolecules using “click” chemistry wherein a biomolecule that includes an azido group and a label that comprises a terminal alkyne are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper (I) chelator to produce a labeled biomolecule, results in the preservation of the structural integrity of the labeled biomolecule.
  • the biomolecules labeled in such cycloaddition reactions can be polysaccharides, nucleic acids, proteins, or peptides.
  • the biomolecules used in such methods are proteins, such as but not limited to glycoproteins.
  • a glycoprotein that includes an azido group and a label that comprises a terminal alkyne are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper (I) chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein, and results in the preservation of the structural integrity of the labeled glycoprotein, wherein the structural integrity of the glycoprotein after labeling is not reduced.
  • the glycoproteins can be derivatized, for example, by in vivo incorporation of azido sugars or by in vitro enzymatic addition of azido sugars.
  • methods of labeling glycoproteins wherein the structural integrity of the glycoprotein after labeling is not reduced includes “click” chemistry in which a glycoprotein that includes a terminal alkyne and a label that comprises an azido group are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein.
  • the methods for labeling biomolecules that comprise an azido group using “click” chemistry described herein can also be used for biomolecules that comprise a terminal alkyne, wherein the label to be reacted with the biomolecule comprises an azido group.
  • the methods for labeling and detecting biomolecules that comprise an azido group using “click” chemistry described herein can also be used for biomolecules that comprise a terminal alkyne, wherein the label to be reacted with the biomolecule comprises an azido group.
  • the reaction mixture includes a reporter molecule with an azide moiety, an alkyne modified biomolecule, copper (II) ions, at least one reducing agent and a copper chelator.
  • the alkyne modified biomolecule are alkyne modified glycoproteins and such reporter molecule with an azide moiety are any reporter molecule described herein.
  • such alkyne modified biomolecule are alkyne modified glycoproteins and such reporter molecule with an azide moiety are any fluorophore based reporter molecule described herein.
  • the method includes: combining in a reaction mixture a biomolecule that comprises an azido group, a label that includes a terminal alkyne group, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper chelator; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule, separating the biomolecule using one or more biochemical or biophysical separation techniques, and detecting the biomolecule.
  • the method includes: combining in a reaction mixture a biomolecule that comprises an alkyne group, a label that includes an azide group, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper chelator; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule, separating the biomolecule using one or more biochemical or biophysical separation techniques, and detecting the biomolecule.
  • Such “click” chemistry reaction mixtures can include, without limitation, one or more buffers, polymers, salts, detergents, or solubilizing agents.
  • the reaction can be performed under anaerobic conditions, such as under nitrogen or argon gas, and can be performed for any feasible length of time, such as, for example, from ten minutes to six hours, from about twenty minutes to about three hours, or from about thirty minutes to about two hours.
  • the reaction can be performed at a wide range of temperatures, for example ranging from about 4 degrees Celsius to about 50 degrees Celsius, and is preferably performed at temperatures between about 10 degrees and about 40 degrees, and typically between about 15 degrees and about 30 degrees.
  • modified biomolecules after the modified biomolecules have been labeled, using “click” chemistry reactions, Saudinger ligation or activated alkyne reactions, and separated using, for example, chromatographic methods or electrophoresis methods such as, but not limited to, gel electrophoresis.
  • the modified biomolecules that can be labeled, separated and detected using the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, polysaccharides, nucleic acids, proteins, or peptides and glycoproteins. In certain embodiments such biomolecules have been modified using the methods described herein.
  • the separation methods used to separate such modified biomolecules includes, but are not limited to, thin layer or column chromatography (including, for example, size exclusion, ion exchange, or affinity chromatography) or isoelectric focusing, gel electrophoresis, capillary electrophoresis, capillary gel electrophoresis, and slab gel electrophoresis.
  • Gel electrophoresis can be denaturing or nondenaturing gel electrophoresis, and can include denaturing gel electrophoresis followed by nondenaturing gel electrophoresis (e.g., “2D” gels).
  • the modified biomolecules are used to form conjugates with a reporter molecule, a carrier molecule and/or a solid support prior to separation using the methods described herein. In other embodiments, the modified biomolecules are used to form conjugates with a reporter molecule, a carrier molecule and/or a solid support after separation using the methods described herein.
  • the separation methods used in such separation and detection methods can be any separation methods used for biomolecules, such as, for example, chromatography, capture to solid supports, and electrophoresis.
  • gel electrophoresis is used to separate biomolecules, such as but not limited to proteins.
  • Gel electrophoresis is well known in the art, and in the context of the present invention can be denaturing or nondenaturing gel electrophoresis and can be 1D or 2D gel electrophoresis.
  • FIG. 3 shows detection, via 2-D gel electrophoresis, of proteins modified with Ac 4 GlcNAz and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe using click chemistry.
  • gel electrophoresis is used to separate proteins, including glycoproteins, and the separated proteins are detected in the gel by the attached labels.
  • glycoproteins that have incorporated azido sugars can be labeled in a solution reaction with a terminal alkyne-containing fluorophore, and the proteins can be optionally further purified from the reaction mixture and electrophoresed on a 1D or 2D gel.
  • the proteins can be visualized in the gel using light of the appropriate wavelength to stimulate the fluorophore label.
  • Gel electrophoresis can use any feasible buffer system described herein including, but not limited to, Tris-acetate, Tris-borate, Tris-glycine, BisTris and Bistris-Tricine.
  • the electrophoresis gel used in the methods described herein comprise acrylamide, including by way for example only, acrylamide at a concentration from about 2.5% to about 30%, or from about 5% to about 20%.
  • such polyacrylamide electrophoresis gel comprise 1% to 10% crosslinker, including but not limited to, bisacrylamide.
  • the electrophoresis gel used in the methods described herein comprises agarose, including by way for example only, agarose at concentration from about 0.1% to about 5%, or from about 0.5% to about 4%, or from about 1% to about 3%.
  • the electrophoresis gel used in the methods described herein comprises acrylamide and agarose, including by way for example only, electrophoresis gels comprising from about 2.5% to about 30% acrylamide and from about 0.1% to about 5% agarose, or from about 5% to about 20% acrylamide and from about 0.2% to about 2.5% agarose.
  • such polyacrylamide/agarose electrophoresis gel comprise 1% to 10% crosslinker, including but not limited to, bisacrylamide.
  • the gels used to separate biomolecules can be gradient gels.
  • the methods described herein can be used to detect modified biomolecules for “in-gel” detection using slab gel electrophoresis or capillary gel electrophoresis.
  • such modified biomolecules are glycoproteins.
  • the method includes combining an azido modified biomolecule, a label that includes a terminal alkyne, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper (I) chelator in a reaction mixture; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule; separating the biomolecule using one or more biochemical separation techniques; and detecting the biomolecule.
  • the label used in such methods can be any label described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator.
  • the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II).
  • the method includes combining an alkyne modified biomolecule that comprises a terminal alkyne, a label that includes an azido group, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper (I) chelator in a reaction mixture; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule; separating the labeled biomolecule using one or more biochemical separation techniques; and detecting the biomolecule.
  • the label used in such methods can be any label described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator.
  • the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II).
  • In-gel fluorescence detection allows for quantitative differential analysis of protein glycosylation between different biological samples and is amenable to multiplexing with other protein gel stains.
  • utilizing fluorescent- and/or UV-excitable alkyne containing probes, or fluorescent- and/or UV-excitable azide containing probes allow for the multiplexed detection of glycoproteins, phosphoproteins, and total proteins in the same 1-D or 2-D gels.
  • FIG. 4 shows “in gel” detection of 40 and 50 kD azide-labeled model proteins, which were first labeled with a fluorescent alkyne tag and then separated on the gel.
  • the labels used in such separation and detection methods are any fluorophores described herein which has been derivatized to contain an alkyne, an azide or a phosphine.
  • fluorphores include, but are not limited to, fluorescein, rhodamine, TAMRA, an Alexa dye, a SYPRO dye, or a BODIPY dye.
  • the method described herein can be used for multiplexed detection of biomolecules, such as proteins by labeling the proteins with labels of different specificities.
  • a total proteins stain such as SYPRO Ruby can be used to stain a gel that includes proteins labeled using a fluorophore with distinct spectral emission using the methods of the present invention.
  • Proteins having other characteristics, such as oxidized proteins or phosphorylated proteins can be detected in the same gel by use of phosphoprotein specific labels used to stain the gel.
  • FIG. 9 shows multiplexed Western blot detection of O-GlcNAc and Cofilin.
  • proteins such as glycoproteins
  • an azido tag such as a fluorescent alkyne tag in the presence of copper (I).
  • Copper (I) can be added in its natural form (e.g. CuBr) or can be produced in situ from copper (II) compounds with the addition of a reducing agent.
  • the reducing agent used in such methods can be any reducing agent described herein, including but not limited to, ascorbate or TCEP. Addition of a chelator that stabilizes copper (I) can enhance the chemical ligation.
  • the fluorescent label used in such methods can be any fluorophore described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator.
  • the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II). After the ligation step, the gel is washed and the tagged proteins are visualized using standard fluorescence scanning devices.
  • proteins such as glycoproteins
  • an alkyne tag such as a fluorescent azide tag in the presence of copper (I).
  • Copper (I) can be added in its natural form (e.g. CuBr) or can be produced in situ from copper (II) compounds with the addition of a reducing agent.
  • the reducing agent used in such methods can be any reducing agent described herein, including but not limited to, ascorbate or TCEP. Addition of a chelator that stabilizes copper (I) can enhance the chemical ligation.
  • the fluorescent label used in such methods can be any fluorophore described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein.
  • the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator.
  • the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate.
  • the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II). After the ligation step, the gel is washed and the tagged proteins are visualized using standard fluorescence scanning devices.
  • proteins such as glycoproteins
  • an azide tag electrophoresed on gels
  • the resulting gels can be incubated with a phosphine tag, such as a fluorescent phosphine containing tag, using Staudinger ligation.
  • a phosphine tag such as a fluorescent phosphine containing tag
  • Staudinger ligation After the ligation step, the gel is washed and the tagged proteins are visualized using standard fluorescence scanning devices. In such methods the use of copper, which contributes to the degradation of biomolecules such as proteins, can be avoided.
  • detection of proteins labeled using the methods described herein can be by Western blot, in which biomolecules derivatized to include an azido group are labeled with a detectable label prior to gel electrophoresis and transferred to a blotting membrane.
  • Azido-containing biomolecules can be labeled, for example, with alkyl-biotin, and after electrophoretic separation and transfer to a blotting membrane, can be detected using streptavidin linked to an enzyme that converts a chromogenic substrate.
  • any feasible label that is directly detectable or indirectly detectable and can be derivatized to include a terminal alkyne or an azido group can be attached to a biomolecule that includes an azido group or a terminal alkyne and used to detect separated biomolecules, including separated biomolecules transferred to a membrane.
  • Western blotting analyses reveal glycoprotein subclass detection sensitivities in the low femtomole range and allow for multiplexing with protein-specific antibodies.
  • biotin-alkyne probes, or biotin-azide probes allow for multiplexed Western blot detection of glycoproteins and targeted proteins of interest using monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies. The results achieved with the combined glycoprotein detection strategy described herein, provide selectivity and sensitivity that is currently unachievable with commonly used lectin-based and antibody-based glycoprotein detection technologies.
  • the methods described herein utilizing copper catalyzed cycloaddition chemistry can result in highly sensitive detection of proteins modified with azides or alkynes, as shown by 1-D and 2-D fluorescent gel sensitivities on gel electrophoresis and Western blots (see FIGS. 8-10 ).
  • the detection sensitivity is in the low picomole range, while in other embodiments the detection sensitivity is in the mid-to-low femtomole range (see FIG. 6B ), and the labeling efficiency
  • a label attached to a biomolecule such as a protein, using a “click” chemistry reaction with a copper (I) chelator as disclosed herein, can also be used for the separation of biomolecules.
  • affinity chromatography or bead capture techniques can be used to separate biomolecules labeled with biotin or other affinity tags using the methods described herein.
  • the captured molecules can be detected using the affinity tags or by other means, and/or further analyzed for structure or function.
  • Another aspect of “in gel” detection is the total detection of proteins in electrophoresis gels or Western blot membranes using a “universal click” chemistry in which phenylboronic acid-containing molecules are tethered via a linker to an azide moiety or an alkyne moiety.
  • the phenylboronic acid associates with the cis-diol moieties on glycoproteins which is stable, except under acidic conditions.
  • Such labels can be used to modify glycoproteins after electrophoretic separation with either azide or alkyne moieties which can then be used to add a label via “click” chemistry, Staudinger ligation or activated alkyne chemistry. The gel is then visualized to detect the labeled glycoproteins.
  • glycoproteins of interest can be isolated by excising bands of interest after such labeling and treating the gel pieces under acidic conditions to reverse the association of the phenylboronic acid with the cis-diol moieties on glycoproteins, thereby releasing the glycoproteins.
  • the released glycoproteins can then be identified using mass spectrometry.
  • Another aspect provides a method for labeling modified biomolecules that have been immobilized on a solid support.
  • Solid supports used in such methods have been described herein, and can be solid or semi-solid matrix. Such solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass, slides, arrays, silica particles, polymeric particles, microtiter plates and polymeric gels.
  • the biomolecules are modified using the methods described herein.
  • such reactive groups are alkynes for reacting with azides.
  • such reactive groups are activated alkynes for reacting with azides.
  • such reactive groups are phosphines for reacting with azides.
  • such reactive groups are azides for reacting with alkynes.
  • the conjugate is formed under “click” chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises an alkyne or an azide.
  • the conjugate is formed under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine or an azide.
  • the conjugate is formed using activated alkynes wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises an activated alkyne or an azide.
  • the biomolecules are metabolically, enzymatically or chemically modified with an azide containing moiety, an alkyne containing moiety or a phosphine containing moiety using the methods described herein.
  • the modified biomolecule is an azido modified biomolecule, an alkyne modified biomolecule or a phosphine modified biomolecule.
  • the azido modified biomolecule is an azido modified glycoprotein.
  • the alkyne modified biomolecule is an alkyne modified glycoprotein.
  • the phosphine modified biomolecule is a phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • the conjugate is formed under “click” chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a terminal alkyne.
  • the conjugate is formed under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine.
  • azido modified glycoproteins are first immobilized onto a solid support, and then subsequently used to form a modified glycoprotein conjugate comprising a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprise an azide reactive group prior to forming the conjugate.
  • the conjugate is formed under “click” chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a terminal alkyne.
  • the conjugate is formed under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine.
  • the modified biomolecule is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than functional groups used in “click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation, whereupon the attached modified biomolecule is used to form a conjugate under “click” chemistry conditions or Staudinger ligation with reporter molecules, carrier molecule or another solid support that have functional groups used in “click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation.
  • the modified biomolecule can be immobilized to a solid support using hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide or sulfoxide functional groups.
  • the biomolecules are modified with an azide containing moiety, an alkyne containing moiety or a phosphine containing moiety using the methods described herein.
  • the modified biomolecule is an azido modified biomolecule, an alkyne modified biomolecule or a phosphine modified biomolecule.
  • the azido modified biomolecule is an azido modified glycoprotein.
  • the alkyne modified biomolecule is an alkyne modified glycoprotein.
  • the phosphine modified biomolecule is a phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • the azido modified biomolecule is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified biomolecule is used to form a conjugate under click chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or another solid support comprises a terminal alkyne.
  • the azido modified biomolecule is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified biomolecule is used to form a conjugate under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or other solid support comprises a triaryle phosphine.
  • an azido modified glycoprotein is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified glycoprotein is used to form a conjugate under click chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or another solid support comprises a terminal alkyne.
  • the azido modified glycoprotein is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified glycoprotein is used to form a conjugate under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or another solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine.
  • a method for detecting immobilized azido modified biomolecules includes the following:
  • a method for detecting immobilized alkyne modified biomolecules includes the following:
  • Samples that can be used with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, any biological derived material or aqueous solution that contains a biomolecule.
  • a samples also includes material in which a biomolecule has been added.
  • the sample that can be used with the methods and compositions described herein can be a biological fluid including, but not limited to, whole blood, plasma, serum, nasal secretions, sputum, saliva, urine, sweat, transdermal exudates, cerebrospinal fluid, or the like.
  • the sample are biological fluids that include tissue and cell culture medium wherein biomolecule of interest has been secreted into the medium.
  • Cells used in such cultures include, but are not limited to, prokaryotic cells and eukaryotic cells that include primary cultures and immortalized cell lines.
  • eukaryotic cells include, without limitation, ovary cells, epithelial cells, circulating immune cells, ⁇ cells, hepatocytes, and neurons.
  • the sample may be whole organs, tissue or cells from an animal, including but not limited to, muscle, eye, skin, gonads, lymph nodes, heart, brain, lung, liver, kidney, spleen, thymus, pancreas, solid tumors, macrophages, mammary glands, mesothelium, and the like.
  • buffers can be used in the methods described herein, including inorganic and organic buffers.
  • the organic buffer is a zwitterionic buffer.
  • buffers that can be used in the methods described herein include phosphate buffered saline (PBS), phosphate, succinate, citrate, borate, maleate, cacodylate, N-(2-Acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), 2-(N-morpholino)-ethanesulfonic acid (MES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES), piperazine-N,N′-2-ethanesulfonic acid (PIPES), 2-(N-morpholino)-2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (MOPSO), N,N-bis-(hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES), 3-(N-morpholino)-propanesulfonic acid (MOPS)
  • PBS phosphat
  • the concentration of such buffers used in the methods described herein is from about 0.1 mM to 1 M. In certain embodiments the concentration is between 10 mM to about 1 M. In certain embodiments the concentration is between about 20 mM and about 500 mM, and in other embodiments the concentration is between about 50 mM and about 300 mM. In certain embodiments, the buffer concentration is from about 0.1 mM to about 50 mM, while in other embodiments the buffer concentration if from about 0.5 mM to about 20 mM.
  • the pH will vary depending upon the particular assay system, generally within a readily determinable range wherein one or more of the sulfonic acid moieties is deprotonated.
  • buffers used in the methods described herein have a pH between 5 and 9 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8.5 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 7 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 5 and 9 at 25° C. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8.5 at 25° C. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8 at 25° C. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 7 at 25° C.
  • the sample used in the methods described herein have a non-ionic detergent to the sample.
  • non-ionic detergents added to the samples used in the methods described herein are polyoxyalkylene diols, ethers of fatty alcohols including alcohol ethoxylates (Neodol from Shell Chemical Company and Tergitol from Union Carbide Corporation), alkyl phenol ethoxylates (Igepal surfactants from General Aniline and Film Corporation), ethylene oxide/propylene oxide block copolymers (PLURONICTM Series from BASF Wyandotte Corporation), polyoxyethylene ester of a fatty acids (Stearox CD from Monsanto Company), alkyl phenol surfactants (Triton series, including Triton X-100 from Rohm and Haas Company), polyoxyethylene mercaptan analogs of alcohol ethoxylates (Nonic 218 and Stearox SK from Monsanto Company), polyoxyethylene adducts of alkylene diols, ether
  • Non-limiting examples of sorbitan esters include polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate (TWEEN20), polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monopalmitate (TWEEN40), polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate (TWEEN60) and polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate (TWEEN 80).
  • the concentration of such non-ionic detergents added to a sample is from 0.01 to 0.5%. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.4 vol. %. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.3 vol. %. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.2 vol. %. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.1 vol. %.
  • the compounds and compositions described herein may, at any time before, after or during an assay, be illuminated with a wavelength of light that results in a detectable optical response, and observed with a means for detecting the optical response.
  • illumination can be by a violet or visible wavelength emission lamp, an arc lamp, a laser, or even sunlight or ordinary room light, wherein the wavelength of such sources overlap the absorption spectrum of a fluorophore or chromaphore of the compounds or compositions described herein.
  • such illumination can be by a violet or visible wavelength emission lamp, an arc lamp, a laser, or even sunlight or ordinary room light, wherein the fluorescent compounds, including those bound to the complementary specific binding pair member, display intense visible absorption as well as fluorescence emission.
  • the sources used for illuminating the fluorophore or chromaphore of the compounds or compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, hand-held ultraviolet lamps, mercury arc lamps, xenon lamps, argon lasers, laser diodes, blue laser diodes, and YAG lasers. These illumination sources are optionally integrated into laser scanners, flow cytometer, fluorescence microplate readers, standard or mini fluorometers, or chromatographic detectors.
  • fluorescence emission of such fluorophores is optionally detected by visual inspection, or by use of any of the following devices: CCD cameras, video cameras, photographic film, laser scanning devices, fluorometers, photodiodes, photodiode arrays, quantum counters, epifluorescence microscopes, scanning microscopes, flow cytometers, fluorescence microplate readers, or by means for amplifying the signal such as photomultiplier tubes.
  • the instrument is optionally used to distinguish and discriminate between the fluorescent compounds of the invention and a second fluorophore with detectably different optical properties, typically by distinguishing the fluorescence response of the fluorescent compounds of the invention from that of the second fluorophore.
  • examination of the sample optionally includes isolation of particles within the sample based on the fluorescence response by using a sorting device.
  • fluorescence is optionally quenched using either physical or chemical quenching agents.
  • kits that include UDP-GalNAz, a GalT enzyme; an azide reactive reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support.
  • the invention includes a kit for labeling a biomolecule that includes at least one label that comprises a terminal alkyne, a solution comprising copper, and a solution that comprises a copper (I) chelator.
  • the kit can further comprise a solution that comprises a reducing agent, one or more buffers, or one or more detergents.
  • an alkyne label provided in a kit is a fluorophore, such as, but not limited to, a xanthene, coumarin, borapolyazaindacene, pyrene and cyanine.
  • a kit provides two or more different terminal alkyne-containing labels one or more of which is a fluorophore,
  • an alkyne label provided in a kit is a tag, such as but not limited to a peptide or a hapten, such as biotin.
  • a copper (I) chelator provided in the kit is a 1,10 phenanthroline, preferably bathocuproine disulfonic acid.
  • copper is provided in the form of a copper sulfate or copper acetate solution.
  • a reducing agent is provided in the form of ascorbate.
  • the invention includes a kit for labeling a biomolecule that includes at least one label that comprises an azido group, a solution comprising copper, an a solution that comprises a copper (I) chelator.
  • the kit can further comprise a solution that comprises a reducing agent, one or more buffers, or one or more detergents.
  • an azido-containing label provided in a kit is a fluorophore, such as, but not limited to, a xanthene, coumarin, borapolyazaindacene, pyrene and cyanine.
  • an azido label provided in a kit is a tag, such as but not limited to a peptide or a hapten, such as biotin.
  • a kit provides two or more different azido-containing labels one or more of which is a fluorophore
  • a copper (I) chelator provided in the kit is a 1,10 phenanthroline, preferably bathocuproine disulfonic acid.
  • copper is provided in the form of a copper sulfate or copper acetate solution.
  • a reducing agent is provided in the form of ascorbate.
  • kits can further include one or more reagents and solutions for chromogenic detection on Western blots.
  • Azidoacetic acid To a solution of iodoacetic acid (8.0 g, 43.0 mmol) and H 2 O (100 mL) was added sodium azide (5.62 g, 86.0 mmol). The solution was stirred at RT and protected from light. After 4 days, the solution was diluted with 1 N HCl (30 mL) and the pH was check to ensure that it was in the range of 2-3. The solution was extracted with EtOAc (2 ⁇ 100 mL), then the combined organics were washed with saturated NaHSO 3 (1 ⁇ 50 mL), brine (1 ⁇ 50 mL) and dried over MgSO 4 . The solution was decanted, concentrated and the crude azidoacetic acid (3.34 g, 53%) was used directly in the next step without further purification.
  • N-Azidoacetylgalactosamine (mix of anomers).
  • azidoacetic acid (3.34 g, 33.06 mmol) in methanol (170 mL) was added D-galactosamine hydrochloride (5.09 g, 23.62 mmol) followed by triethylamine (7.90 mL, 56.68 mmol). This solution was stirred at RT for 5 min and then cooled to 0° C.
  • Diallyldiisopropylphosphoramidite (0.70 mL, 2.64 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction was stirred at RT for 3 h.
  • the solution was subsequently cooled to ⁇ 40° C. in an acetonitrile/dry ice bath and 3-chloroperbenzoic acid (0.76 g, 4.41 mmol) and stirred at ⁇ 40° C. for 10 min.
  • the solution was then allowed to warm to RT slowly over 1 h (transferred from a ⁇ 40° C. bath to 0° C. bath packed with ice). After 1 hr, ice was still present so removed ice bath and let stir at RT for 20 min.
  • the reaction solution was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (45 mL), washed sequentially with 10% aqueous Na 2 SO 3 (2 ⁇ 45 mL), saturated NaHCO 3 (2 ⁇ 45 mL), and H 2 O (2 ⁇ 45 mL). The organic layer was then dried over Na 2 SO 4 , decanted and concentrated. The crude material was purified via silica gel column chromatography (60-100% EtOAc/hexanes) to afford the product, (0.18 g, 39%).
  • UDPGalNAz To a solution of diallyl (3,4,6-tetra-O-acetyl-2-azidoacetiamido-2-dexocy- ⁇ -D-galactopyranosyl phosphate (0.10 g, 0.18 mmol) and THF:MeOH (1:1, 2.1 mL:2.1 mL) under argon was added p-toluenesulfonic acid, sodium salt (0.14 g, 0.72 mmol) followed by tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (30 mg, 0.026 mmol). The solution was protected from light and stirred at RT for 3 h.
  • reaction solution was concentrated in vacuo and co-evaporated with toluene (3 ⁇ 20 mL).
  • the crude material was suspended in CH 3 CN (0.86 mL) and triethylamine (0.27 mL) was added.
  • the solution was cooled to O° C. and freshly prepared UMP-N-methylimidazole (0.22 mmol) in CH 3 CN (1.7 mL) was added dropwise.
  • the resulting yellow solution was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h.
  • the reaction solution was concentrated, then resuspended in a solution of MeOH:H 2 O:triethylamine (5:2:1, 10 mL) and stirred at RT for 20 h.
  • the solution was concentrated in vacuo to yield a crude yellow syrup.
  • This material was dissolved in H 2 O (15 mL) and extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (3 ⁇ 50 mL) to remove organic byproducts. The organic layer was discarded and the aqueous layer was concentrated and co-evaporated with toluene. The resulting viscous, pale orange, clear oil was obtained.
  • the crude material was dissolved in 100 mM NH 4 HCO 3 degassed buffer (2.0 mL). Because the solution was cloudy in appearance and not clear, it was filtered through a Acrodisc PF 0.8/0.2 mM Supor, sterile, single use, non-pyrogenic filter from Gelman Sciences, prod #4187.
  • Uridine 5′-monophosphate triethylammonium salt (5′-UMP triethylammonium salt).
  • Uridine 5′-monophosphate disodium salt (1.0 g) was dissolved in H 2 O (2 ml) and passed through Dowex resin triethylammonium salt (2.7 cm ⁇ 7.0 cm column size) with H 2 O as eluent. All of the eluent was concentrated and after the UV active material ceased eluting from the column. The solution was concentrated and co-evaporated with toluene to until a white, crystalline solid was obtained (0.78 g, 80%).
  • Uridine monophosphate-N-methylimidazole Uridine monophosphate-N-methylimidazole (UMP-N-methylimidazole).
  • UMP-N-methylimidazole To a suspension of uridine 5′-monophosphate triethylammonium salt (0.097 g, 0.22 mmol) in CH 3 CN (0.70 mL) was added N,N-dimethylaniline (0.11 mL, 0.864 mmol), and triethylamine (0.03 mL, 0.22 mmol). The suspension was cooled to 0° C. In a separate flask, trifluoroacetic anhydride (0.15 mL, 1.08 mmol) was added to CH 3 CN (0.21 mL) and cooled to 0° C.
  • Dapoxyl® alkyne The synthesis of Dapoxyl® alkyne is shown in the following reaction scheme.
  • succinimidyl ester 5-TAMRA-SE, 0.10 g, 0.19 mmol
  • DMF 0.5 mL
  • propargylamine 25 ⁇ L, 0.38 mmol
  • H 2 O 0.5 mL
  • the solution was concentrated in vacuo.
  • Purification via HPLC Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 25-40% CH 3 CN in 25 mM TEAA, pH 4.7, flow rate of 15 mL/min
  • gave 68 mg of product (82%, a purple solid) t R 23-33 min.
  • R f 0.67.
  • Jurkat cells were fed 40 ⁇ M Ac 4 ManNAz or Ac 4 GalNAz for 3 days (A) or 250 ⁇ M Ac 4 GlcNAz overnight (B).
  • Harvested cells were sonicated in 50 mM Tris buffer, pH 8.0 with protease and phosphatase inhibitors, and the lysates were subjected to high-speed centrifugation (100 K ⁇ g).
  • the membrane pellet proteins from ManNAz- and GalNAz-treated cells, and the soluble supernatant cells from the GlcNAc-treated cells were precipitated with chloroform/methanol, dissolved in detergent, and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe in the presence of 1 mM CuSO4, and 5 mM ascorbic acid (1).
  • HeLa cells were fed Ac 4 GalNAz or Ac 4 ManNAz sugars for 48 hours.
  • cell surface glycoprotein analysis the surfaces of live cells were labeled with dye-alkyne, lysed, and the purified proteins were analyzed by gel electrophoresis (lanes 2 and 5, see legend).
  • total glycoprotein subclass analysis cells were lysed, the purified proteins were labeled in solution, and ran on the gel (lanes 3 and 6). Control unfed cells are shown in gel lanes 1 and 4. 20 ⁇ g of protein was loaded per gel lane.
  • the GalNAz incorporated proteins in lane 2 represent cell surface O-linked glycoproteins only, whereas total GalNAz metabolically labeled glycoproteins are shown in lane 3.
  • Lane 5 represents ManNAz labeling of cell surface sialic acid-containing glycoproteins
  • lane 6 represents labeling of both cell surface sialic acid-containing glycoproteins and intracellular sialic acid-containing glycoproteins located in golgi apparatus and transport vesicles.
  • Metabolic labeling of O-linked and sialic acid-containing glycoproteins was accomplished by administration of the unnatural tetraacetylated azide-modified sugar precursors, Ac 4 GalNAz or Ac 4 ManNAz, respectively (300 mg/kg in 70% DMSO), to activated Her2/Neu transgenic mice over a 7 day regimen. After 7 days the mice were sacrificed and various organ tissues were dissected, lysed, and protein extracts were reacted with 10 mM fluorescent TAMRA alkyne in Tris Buffer, pH 8.0, with 2 mM CuSO4, 20 mM ascorbate, 5 mM BCS, and 25% propylene glycol.
  • Labeled glycoproteins were precipitated, dissolved in 1-D SDS-PAGE buffer, analyzed by gel electrophoresis, and detected by fluorescence laser scanning. After scanning the gels were post-stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain to view total proteins.
  • the upper panels below show 1-D gels of labeled tissue proteins from heart muscle (H), liver (L), or kidney (K). Lower panels show same gels after post-staining with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain.
  • Jurkat cells were fed 30 ⁇ M Ac 4 HexNAz sugars, ManNAz, GalNAz, or GlcNAz, for 3 days.
  • A live Jurkat cells were labeled with 10 mM Alexa Fluor 488 alkyne probe for 30 minutes in the presence of Tris buffer, pH 8.0, 2 mM CuSO4, 20 mM ascorbate, and 5 mM BCS. The cells were then fixed with 4% formaldehyde/PBS for 15 min and analyzed by flow cytometry.
  • B cells were fixed and permeablized, before labeling under the same conditions as in A, and analyzed by flow cytometry.
  • ⁇ -crystallin O-GlcNAc was enzymatically labeled with azide (UDP-GalNAz) using a modified b-GalT1 enzyme. The protein was subsequently reacted with a fluorescent alkyne probe as described. The proteins were run on 1-D NuPAGE® Novex® 4-12% gels at the dilutions shown. Note: Only 2-10% of ⁇ -crystallin is O-GlcNAc-modified and therefore the detection sensitivity of the O-GlcNAc moiety is in the mid-to-low femtomole range (10-45 fmols). See FIG. 6 .
  • ⁇ -crystallin was enzymatically labeled with the modified GalT1 enzyme and subsequently reacted with a biotin-alkyne probe.
  • the proteins were run on 1-D NuPAGE® Novex® 4-12% MES gels, at the dilutions shown, and blotted onto PVDF membrane.
  • the PVDF membrane was then incubated in streptavidin-HRP and proteins were detected using ECL PlusTM (GE Biosystems).
  • Lane 2 (NE) represents the 8 pmoL no-enzyme added control. Note: In A, the detection sensitivity of O-GlcNAc by Western blot is in the low femtomole range (3-10 fmols).
  • Soluble extracts from GlcNAz-fed Jurkat cells were labeled with UV excitable alkyne dye for 2 hours.
  • the chloroform/methanol precipitated proteins were run on 2-D gels as described previously.
  • the gel was rinsed in water and imaged with UV transillumination and 600/bp emission on a Lumi-ImagerTM (Roche).
  • the gel was then stained with Pro-Q® Diamond phosphoprotein stain, imaged with 532 nm excitation/580 LP emission on a FLA-3000 laser imager, stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain, and imaged again with 473 nm excitation and 580 nm longpass emission according to the manufacturer's instructions. See FIG. 8 .
  • soluble Jurkat cell proteins from Example 12 were run on 2-D gels as described and blotted onto PVDF membrane.
  • the PVDF membrane was incubated in ⁇ -cofilin polyclonal Ab and detected with GAR-HRP secondary Ab with ECL PlusTM detection (GE Biosystems). After imaging, the blot was incubated in streptavidin AP and O-GlcNAc proteins were detected using the WesternBreeze® chemiluminescent detection kit (Invitrogen). See FIG. 9 .
  • Fluorescent alkyne compounds for use in in-gel ligation are shown in FIG. 12 (A-D). Additionally, 2 potential fluorogenic alkynes are shown in E and F.
  • the TAMRA-alkyne compound, shown in the upper left-hand frame, was used in in-gel staining experiments whereby azido groups were incorporated into proteins in vitro using a reactive azido-succinimidyl ester, or in vivo, by feeding cells azido-modified sugars.
  • the proteins should be in 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0 with 1.0% SDS. Final volume is 200 uL. Component Volume Final Protein in 1% SDS, 50 mMTris pH8 50 uL 100-200 ug Tris-HCl, pH 8.0 (1 M) 7.5 uL 50 mM Propylene glycol 50 uL 25% CuSO 4 (50 mM) 4 uL 1 mM DMSO, 0.5 M 4 uL 10 mM H20 62.5 uL to 200 uL Alkyne compound 2 uL 10 uM 1 mM (eg TAMRA or biotin) Na Ascorbate (100 mM) 10 uL 5 mM Combine all components adding the ascorbate last. Vortex gently. Add 10 uL of 100 mM BCS (it will turn orange if CuI is present). Vortex gently. Layer with argon. Mix on rotator at room temperature for 1 hour.
  • chloroform/methanol precipitate the protein using the following protocol: 200 uL Reaction 600 uL MeOH,. vortex 20 secs, (freeze 30′if protein amt. is low) 200 uL chloroform vortex 20 secs 450 uL H 2 O vortex 20 secs Spin @ 18 Kxg for 5 min Remove upper phase and add 450 MeOH. Vortex 20 secs Spin @ 18 Kxg for 5 min Remove supernatant and discard Add 600 uL MeOH only, vortex, and briefly sonicate to disperse pellet Spin @ 18 Kxg for 5 min
  • FIG. 13 shows the results of electrophoresis of proteins labeled with the TAMRA-Alkyne compound using the protocol provided. Lanes 2, 3, and 4 on the left side of the gel represent cellular extracts that had incorporated azido-modified sugars, lane 1 is the control, non-azide sugar fed cells. On the right, control azide labeled proteins (ovalbumin and myoglobin) (+) or non-labeled controls ( ⁇ ) are shown at varying concentrations. The results show very efficient and selective in-gel detection of azido-modified proteins.
  • FIG. 15 A shows that the chelators reduce the background of the image for the TAMRA signal without compromising sensitivity.
  • FIG. 15 B post-staining with Sypro® Ruby total protein gel stain shows that the band resolution is much better for the samples with chelator.
  • Goat IgG antibodies were reduced and alkylated, then deglycosylated in 2 separate aliquots using Endo Hf enzyme.
  • Deglycosylated antibodies (2 separate preps) were then labeled with GalNAz using 33 ng/uL Gal T1 Y289L enzyme and 500 uM UDP GalNAz (0.5 ug/uL goat antibody) in a 150 uL reaction. Reactions were incubated at 4 degrees C. overnight. 4-500 ng of goat antibody (treated as listed on gel; either no-GalNAz control or azide labeled) was loaded into each lane of a 4-12% Bis Tris gel. Electrophoresis was performed at 200 v for ⁇ 50 min. using MES buffer. Gels were stained with TAMRA-alkyne stain and imaged on the Fuji imager at 532 nm (excitation) and 580 nm emission. Gels were poststained with SYPRO Ruby using the overnight protocol. See FIG. 17
  • COS7 and Jurkat cells were fed Lovastatin to suppress endogenous isoprenylation and azido-farnesyl alcohol (FN3-OH) for 36 or 72 hours.
  • the dose was either 25 ⁇ M Lovastatin and 20 uM FN3-OH or 50 ⁇ M lovastatin and 50 ⁇ M FN3-OH.
  • the media was replaced (including FN3-OH, but not lovastatin) for one set of samples cultured for 72 hours.
  • Lysates were prepared by washing the cells 3 times with PBS and lysing with 1% SDS/100 mM TRIS pH 8+ protease inhibitors (1 mL of lysis buffer per 100 cm culture dish). The lysate was sonicated, heated at 70° C.
  • Precipitated pellets were resolubilized with 50 ⁇ L of 1% SDS/100 mM TRIS pH 8, labeled with the TAMRA Click-iTTM detection kit (C33370) and 20 ⁇ g was analyzed on a 4-12% BIS-TRIS gel using MOPS buffer.
  • the gels were imaged on the BioRad FX imager using the 532 nm laser and 555 nm long pass emission filter.
  • the gels were post-stained with SYPRO® Ruby protein gel stain and imaged using the 488 nm laser and 555 nm long pass emission filter.
  • Azido-labeled fatty acid compounds such as the palmitate compound shown below, or alkyne-labeled fatty acid compounds are added to cultured cells for a time period that allows the compound to enter the cells and become incorporated into fatty acid-modified macromolecules, including proteins. Compounds that facilitate entry of the analogs into the cells can also be used.
  • the cells are lysed and cellular azide- or alkyne-modified proteins are labeled using the appropriate click partner probe in the presence of copper(I), or copper(II) in the presence of a copper(II) reducing agent, a copper(I) chelating agent such as BCS, and an appropriate buffer to maintain optimal pH conditions.
  • Azido-labeled fatty acid compounds such as the palmitate compound shown below, or alkyne-labeled fatty acid compounds are added to cellular extracts in vitro, or under in vitro translation conditions.
  • the fatty acylated proteins are detected by labeling the azide- or alkyne-modified proteins using the appropriate click partner probe in the presence of copper(I), or copper(II) in the presence of a copper(II) reducing agent, a copper(I) chelating agent such as BCS, and an appropriate buffer to maintain optimal pH conditions.
  • succinimidyl ester azide The synthesis of succinimidyl ester azide is shown in the following reaction scheme.
  • 6-Amino-hexanyl-1-azide (0.83 mmol) was dissolved in THF (1.0 mL) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.29 mL, 1.65 mmol) was added. The solution was stirred at RT for 10 min then glutaric anhydride (0.47 g, 4.13 mmol) was added. The pale yellow solution was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction solution was diluted with CHCl 3 (30 mL) and H 2 O (10 mL), and acidified to a pH of 1 with 1% HCl; the organic layer was removed. The aqueous layer was extracted two more times with CHCl 3 (2 ⁇ 30 mL).
  • succinimidyl ester alkyne The synthesis of succinimidyl ester alkyne is shown in the following reaction scheme.
  • N-(iodoacetamide)-propargylamine N-(iodoacetamide)-propargylamine.
  • iodoacetic anhydride iodoacetic anhydride in the dark.
  • the reaction was stopped and the solution was partitioned between CHCl 3 and H 2 O.
  • the organic layer was removed and the aqueous layer was reextracted with CHCl 3 .
  • the combined organics were rinsed with saturated NaCl, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , decanted and concentrated.
  • Propargylamine maleimide After the reaction of propargylamine and maleic anhydride in the presence of TEA, the intermediate acid was cyclized in the presence of acetic anhydride and sodium acetate at 70° C., to afford the desired propargylamine maleimide.
  • N-(6-Azido-aminohexyl)maleimide After the reaction of 6-amino-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt and maleic anhydride in the presence of TEA, the intermediate acid was cyclized in the presence of acetic anhydride and sodium acetate at 70° C., to afford the desired N-(6-azido-aminohexyl)maleimide.
  • RII phosphopeptide (DLDVPIPGRFDRRVpSVAAE, 2192.08 Da) was azido-labeled by simultaneous ⁇ -elimination of the phosphate and addition of either thioacetate-azide or amino-azide to the resulting dehydroalanine residue. 2 nmol of peptide and 3 ⁇ mol of azide tag was incubated in 30 ⁇ L of 0.1M barium hydroxide for 2 hours at 35° C. After incubation, the barium was precipitated with 7 ⁇ L of 0.5M ammonium sulfate.
  • tertiary amines and hindered secondary amines such as but not limited to: phosphazene compounds, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, TEMED, triethanolamine 2,2,6,6-teramethylpiperidine, Proton Sponge DABCO, N-methylmorpholine 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 4-pyrrolidinylpyridine, an ion exchange resin such as Dowez 1 hydrixide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltriethylammonium hydroxide, or other phase transfer bases calcium hydroxide, barium hydroxide, or gallium hydroxide (which will also complex the phosphate group).
  • phosphazene compounds triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, TEMED, triethanolamine 2,2,6,6-teramethylpiperidine, Proton Sponge DABCO, N-methylmorpholine 4-dimethylaminopyridine
  • Phosphoproteins could be labeled in vivo or in vitro using alkyne or azide-tagged nucleotides whereby the azide or alkyne moiety is placed on the gamma phosphate.
  • alkyne or azide-tagged nucleotides whereby the azide or alkyne moiety is placed on the gamma phosphate.
  • one of the nucleotides shown below is added to a reaction mixture containing a protein kinase and a kinase target molecule. After tagging the molecule is reacted with the appropriate alkyne or azide detection or affinity reagent for quantitation, visualization, or enrichment.
  • modified nucleotide substrates may be added directly to cultured cells for metabolic incorporation of the tagged gamma-phosphate molecule into cellular macromolecules including proteins.
  • the process may involve treatment of the cells with pharmacological agents to detect alterations in phosphorylation dynamics. Entry of the compounds into live cultured cells could be enhanced by modifying the nucleotides with functional groups that would afford permeability, or by concomitant addition of cell permeablizing agents.
  • the kinase reaction could be performed in vitro using cellular extracts as the source of kinases and substrates. The modified nucleotides would be added to the reaction mixture and the reaction mixtures incubated with or without the addition of pharmacological agents of interest.
  • the in vitro reaction may also entail adding an exogenous kinase or substrate source to the cellular extract along with the nucleotide analogs.
  • the method could be used in vitro without cellular extracts, using purified kinases and kinase substrates.
  • the reaction mix may contain a buffer optimized for the particular kinases of interest, a kinase source, a metal ion source, glycerol, nucleotide ATP analog, and ATP.
  • the “click” detection reaction with an alkyne probe would be performed in the presence of copper(I), or copper(II) in the presence of a copper(II) reducing agent, a copper(I) chelating agent, and an appropriate buffer to maintaining optimal pH conditions.
  • Rhodamine GreenTM azide (mix of 5- and 6-isomers).
  • DMF 0.5 mL
  • DIEA 50 ⁇ L, 0.28 mmol
  • Rhodamine GreenTM carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester, hydrochloride 50 mg, 0.10 mmol
  • Alexa Fluor® 488 azide (5 isomer).
  • DMF 0.5 mL
  • DIEA 0.11 mL, 0.88 mmol
  • Alexa Fluor® 4885-carboxylic acid, 2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl ester, bis(triethylammonium salt) 200 mg, 0.22 mmol.
  • Alexa Fuor® 546 azide To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.093 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (32 ⁇ L, 0.19 mmol) was added Alexa Fluor® 546 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester, (50 mg, 0.05 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 2 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo.
  • Alexa Fluor® 594 azide (5 isomer).
  • DMF 0.5 mL
  • DIEA 42 ⁇ L, 0.24 mmol
  • Alexa Fluor® 594 carboxylic acid succinimidyl ester *5-isomer* (50 mg, 0.06 mmol).
  • Dapoxyl azide To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.25 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (43 ⁇ L, 0.25 mmol) was added Dapoxyl® carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (50 mg, 0.12 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 1 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. Purified by SPE (Supelco C18 DSC) to give 41.6 mg of product (78%); ESI-pos m/z 433 (M + , C 24 H 28 N 6 O 2 requires 433).
  • succinimidyl ester 5-TAMRA-SE, 0.10 g, 0.19 mmol
  • DMF 0.5 mL
  • propargylamine 25 ⁇ L, 0.38 mmol
  • H 2 O 0.5 mL
  • Oregon Green® 488-alkyne Oregon Green® 488-alkyne.
  • succinimidyl ester 50 mg, 0.98 mmol
  • DMF 0.5 mL
  • propargylamine 0.26 ⁇ L, 0.40 mmol
  • H 2 O 0.1 mL
  • Alexa Fluor® 532-alkyne To a solution of Alexa Fluor® 532 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (51 mg, 0.07 mmol) in DMF (4.0 mL) was added propargylamine (0.1 mL) and H 2 O (1.0 mL). The solution was stirred at RT for 1 h then concentrated in vacuo to afford the crude product.
  • Alexa Fluor® 568-azide To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.04 mmol) in DMF (0.2 mL) and DIEA (7 ⁇ L, 0.04 mmol) was added Alexa Fluor® 568 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (mix of isomers, 25 mg, 0.02 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 2.5 h, H 2 O (0.2 mL) was added and the solution was concentrated in vacuo.

Abstract

Provided in certain embodiments are new methods for forming azido modified biomolecule conjugates of reporter molecules, carrier molecules or solid support. In other embodiments are provided methods for enzymatically labeling a biomolecules with an azide group.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION(S)
  • This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/772,221, filed Feb. 10, 2006 and U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/804,640, filed Jun. 13, 2006, the contents of which are incorporated by reference as if set forth fully herein.
  • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention generally relates to methods of labeling post translationally modified biomolecules using metabolic, enzymatic, or chemical incorporation of azide or alkyne-labeled macromolecules followed by chemical conjugation with paired azide, alkyne, activated alkyne, or triarylphospine reporter molecules appended to proteins post translation.
  • BACKGROUND INFORMATION
  • Protein glycosylation is one of the most abundant post-translational modifications and plays a fundamental role in the control of biological systems. For example, carbohydrate modifications are important for host-pathogen interactions, inflammation, development, and malignancy (Varki, A. Glycobiology 1993, 3, 97-130; Lasky, L. A. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 1995, 64, 113-139. (c) Capila, I.; Linhardt, R. J. Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. 2002, 41, 391-412; Rudd, P. M.; Elliott, T.; Cresswell, P.; Wilson, I. A.; Dwek, R. A. Science 2001, 291, 2370-2376.) One such covalent modification is O-GlcNAc glycosylation, which is the covalent modification of serine and threonine residues by D-N-acetylglucosamine (Wells, L.; Vosseller, K.; Hart, G. W. Science 2001, 291, 2376-2378; Zachara, N. E.; Hart, G. W. Chem. Rev. 2002, 102, 431). The O-GlcNAc modification is found in all higher eukaryotic organisms from C. elegans to man and has been shown to be ubiquitous, inducible and highly dynamic, suggesting a regulatory role analogous to phosphorylation. However, the regulatory nature of the modification (i.e., dynamic, low cellular abundance) also represents a central challenge in its detection and study.
  • A common method to observe O-GlcNAc involves labeling proteins with β-1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT), an enzyme that catalyzes the transfer of [3H]-Gal from UDP-[3H]galactose to terminal GlcNAc groups (Roquemore, E. P.; Chou, T. Y.; Hart, G. W. Methods Enzymol. 1994, 230, 443-460). Unfortunately, this approach is expensive, involves handling of radioactive material, and requires exposure times of days to months. Antibodies and lectins offer alternative means of detection, but they can suffer from weak binding affinity and limited specificity (Snow, C. M.; Senior, A.; Gerace, L. J. Cell Biol. 1987, 104, 1143-1156; Comer, F. I.; Vosseller, K.; Wells, L.; Accavitti, M. A.; Hart, G. W. Anal. Biochem. 2001, 293, 169-177).
  • Isolated or synthesized antibodies, such as IgGs, are used therapeutically and for diagnostic and research purposes. By labeling antibodies with detectable labels, such as, for example, fluorophores, antibodies can be used to specifically detect target biological molecules or cells. Antibodies may also be tagged with binding reagents, such as, for example, biotin, so that they may be used to specifically bind target biological molecules or cells, followed by purification of the biological molecule or cell by using a reagent that binds to the tagged antibody, for example, streptavidin. Antibodies have generally been labeled at cysteine or lysine residues, which may often be present in the Fab, or binding portion of the antibody. Adding tags or labels in this region may disrupt or at least alter the binding properties of the antibody. Further, it is often difficult to quantitate the number of labeled molecules attached to each antibody.
  • One important class of glycoproteins is antibodies. Therapeutic monoclonal antibodies (Mabs) have become indispensable drugs to combat cancer, rheumatoid arthritis, macular degeneration, and other diseases or conditions. However, antibodies generated in non-human cell lines may have antigenic features recognized as foreign by the human immune system, limiting the antibodies' half-life and efficacy. Incorporating human IgG sequences into transgenic mice has reduced, but not eliminated, immunogenicity problems. Besides the protein sequence, the nature of the oligosaccharides attached to the IgG has a profound effect on immune-system recognition. Because glycosylation is cell type specific, IgGs produced in different host cells contain different patterns of oligosaccharides, which could affect the biological functions. Even where cells, such as human embryonic stem cells, are grown on mouse feeder layers in the presence of animal-derived serum replacements, the cells incorporated a nonhuman, and immunogenic, sialic acid, and the sialic acid was then found on the cell surface. (Martin, M. J., et al., Nature Medicine, 2005, 11:228-232). Although the therapeutic antibody industry has tried to avoid these problems by producing less antigenic IgG with defucosylated oligosaccharides, defucosylated antibodies are not equivalent to humanized antibodies, and may still have immunogenicity issues, as well as having different half-lives than natural human antibodies.
  • Metabolic oligosaccharide engineering refers to the introduction of subtle modifications into monosaccharide residues within cellular glycans. Researchers have used metabolic engineering to disrupt glycan biosynthesis, chemically modify cell surfaces, probe metabolic flux inside cells, and to identify specific glycoprotein subtypes from the proteome. (reviewed in Dube, D. H., and Bertozzi, C. R., Current Opinion in Chemical Biology, 2003, 7:616-625).
  • There is a need for antibodies that have tags or labels at sites other than the binding region, and for antibodies that may be easily labeled using simple and efficient chemical reactions. There is also a need for antibodies that have post-translational modifications that are more like human antibodies.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Provided in certain embodiments are methods for enzymatically labeling a glycoprotein with an azide moiety. In one aspect a glycoprotein is contacted with UDP-GalNAz in the presence of an appropriate enzyme. In one aspect the enzyme is Gal T. In another aspect the enzyme is a modified Gal T enzyme. These azido modified glycoproteins can then be conjugated t a wide variety of reporter molecules, carrier molecules or solid supports provided that they contain an azide reactive group. In one aspect the azide reactive group is a terminal alkyne such that the conjugation reaction utilizes copper (I) catalyzed cycloaddition chemistry. In another aspect the azide reactive group is a phosphine such that the conjugation reaction performed is a Staudinger ligation type reaction.
  • In another embodiment is provided a method for forming a reporter molecule-glycoprotein conjugate with an immobilized azido modified glycoprotein. Glycoproteins are modified with azido sugars either metabolically or enzymatically and then immobilized on a solid or semi-solid matrix. In one embodiment the solid or semi-solid matrix is a slide, an array, polymeric particle or a gel matrix. In a particular aspect the azido modified glycoproteins are separated by gel electrophoresis or capillary electrophoresis. The immobilized azido modified glycoprotein is contacted with an azide reactive reporter molecule wherein the conjugate is formed either in a click chemistry type reaction or a Staudinger ligation type reaction. Subsequently the glycoprotein conjugate is detected after illumination with an appropriate wavelength.
  • The azide-alkyne [3+2]cycloaddition is a chemoselective ligation reaction that is catalyzed by the addition of copper (I). Although the reaction has been applied to a variety of different bioconjugation reactions over the past several years, it has never been applied to the in-gel fluorescence detection of modified proteins. The procedure involves the selective tagging of proteins with reactive probes containing either azide or alkyne groups. The reactive probes can be toward total proteins, such as those that label specific amino acids like lysines or cysteines, or they can label (or derivatize) post-translationally modified amino acids within the proteins, such as phosphoamino acids or glycosylated amino acids. Additionally, protein modification can take place in vivo by metabolic labeling. This involves feeding cultured cells, bacteria, plants, or animals tagged metabolic precursors that are incorporated into specific molecules by the intracellular enzymatic machinery. Primary protein labeling can be performed with an azide or alkyne probe as long as the detection is carried out with the alternate of the pair. Once the primary protein labeling step is completed, cellular extracts (or fractions) are separated by 1-D or 2-D gel electrophoresis.
  • The methods described for detection of proteins in gels can be completed within 3-4 hours, or less. The method is devoid of the typical problems encountered with antibody detection on blots including the requirement to optimize primary and secondary antibody concentrations and issues of non-specific binding of the antibodies. Finally, it is well-documented in-gel digested proteins are more compatible with detection by mass spectrometry than are electroblotted proteins.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1: Shows metabolic labeling with unnatural azido sugars.
  • FIG. 2: Shows metabolic labeling and “click” detection of glycoprotein subclasses A) schematically and B) detection after separation on a gel.
  • FIG. 3: Shows separation of Ac4GlcNAz-treated soluble Jurkat cell proteins by 2-D gels and controls compared to the same gel stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain.
  • FIG. 4: Shows in gel detection of 40 and 50 kD azide-labeled model proteins, which were first labeled with a fluorescent alkyne tag and then separated on the gel.
  • FIG. 5: Shows Labeling Efficiency of 40 and 50 kd Azide-Labeled Model Proteins is Unchanged in Complex Protein Extracts.
  • FIG. 6: Shows the Enzymatic Labeling and Detection of α-crystallin O-GlcNAc.
  • FIG. 7: Shows the Comparison of GalT1 Enzyme Labeling with a-O-GlcNAc Monoclonal Antibody CTD 110.6.
  • FIG. 8: Shows the Multiplex Detection of O-GlcNAc Proteins, Phosphoproteins and Total Proteins in the Same 2-D gel.
  • FIG. 9: Shows Multiplexed Western Blot Detection of O-GlcNAc and Cofilin.
  • FIG. 10: Shows the Differential Detection of O-GlcNAc Modified Proteins in Control and Inhibitor-Treated Cultured Cell Extracts.
  • FIG. 11: Shows the A) UDPGalNAz in conjunction with GalT as a novel method for labeling antibodies via reaction of the terminal OGlcNAc molecules present on antibody carbohydrates (Scheme 2) and B) if no OGlcNAc sugars are present on an antibody, then use of the Endo-H (endo-β-N-acetylglucosaminidase H) enzyme will be used to generate a truncated chain which terminates with one N-acetylglucosamine residue.
  • FIG. 12: Shows structures of four present (A-D) and two potential (E,F) alkyne fluorophores that can be used to label biomolecules using the methods of the invention: A) TAMRA-alkyne; B) Alexa 488-Alkyne; C) Alexa 633-Alkyne; D) Alexa 532-Alkyne, E) a potential fluorogenic alkyne; F) a potential fluorogenic alkyne.
  • FIG. 13: shows the results of in-gel staining using the TAMRA-alkyne compound shown in FIG. 12A. Lanes 2, 3, and 4 on the left side of the gel represent cellular extracts that were labeled with azide-modified sugars: lane 1 is the control, non-labeled cells. On the right, control azide labeled proteins (ovalbumin and myoglobin) (+) or non-labeled controls (−) are shown at varying concentrations. The results show very efficient and selective in-gel labeling of azido-modified proteins.
  • FIG. 14 depicts gels showing the results of separating proteins labeled using the click reaction with different chelators. 2.5 μg each of azido-ovalbumin and azido-myoglobin spiked into 80 ug of unlabeled Jurkat lysate was labeled with TAMRA alkyne for 2 hrs. The reaction contained 50 mM TRIS pH8, 25% propylene glycol, 1 mM CuSO4, 5 mM sodium ascorbate, 20 uM TAMRA alkyne. The reactions were performed with and without chelator (10 mM TPEN [upper left gel], EDTA [upper right gel], bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS) [middle left gel] or neocuproine [middle right gel]). Control reactions were performed without CuSO4 [lower left gel] or without chelator [lower right gel]. After labeling, the samples were precipitated, resolubilized in 7 mM urea/2 mM thiourea/65 mM DTT/2% CHAPS/ and approximately 30 μg was analyzed on 2-D gels (pH 4-7 IEF strips, 4-12% BIS-TRIS gels with MOPS buffer). The TAMRA signal was imaged at 532 nm excitation, 580 long pass emission on a Fuji FLA3000 (14A) then the gels were post-stained with Sypro® Ruby total protein gel stain (14B).
  • FIG. 15 depicts gels showing the results of separating proteins labeled using the click reaction with different chelators. The samples and click labeling conditions are the same as for FIG. 14, except that chelator treatments include addition of either 5 mM TPEN, BCS or Neocuproine at the beginning of the reaction. After labeling, the samples were precipitated, resolubilized in LDS buffer+5 mM TCEP and serial 2-fold dilutions were performed. Dilutions were loaded onto 4-12% BIS-TRIS gels with MOPS running buffer (250 ng each of ovalbumin and myglobin in lane 1). FIG. 15A shows that the chelators reduce the background of the image for the TAMRA signal without compromising sensitivity. In FIG. 15B, post-staining with Sypro® Ruby total protein gel stain shows that the band resolution is much better for the samples with chelator.
  • FIG. 16 The samples and click labeling conditions are the same as for FIG. 14, except that chelator treatments include addition of either 7 mM, 5 mM or 2 mM BCS or neocuproine. The lanes marked with an asterisk in (A) indicate reactions in which the CuSO4 and BCS were added to the reaction and vortexed prior adding the sodium ascorbate. In all other reactions the CuSO4 and sodium ascorbate were added and vortexed prior to adding the BCS. The gels show that it is imperative to add the sodium ascorbate and CuSO4 to the reaction tube and mix prior to adding the chelator. If the chelator and CuSO4 are added and vortexed prior to adding the sodium acorbate, the azide-alkyne labeling does not proceed, suggesting that the chelator inhibits the reduction of Cu II to Cu I.
  • FIG. 17: Shows the enzymatic labeling of antibodies using cliack chemistry: A) Lane 1—Goat antibody only (GAb); Lane 2—GAb with GalT1 enzyme but without UDP-GalNAz Control; Lane 3—GAb with enzyme and UDP-GalNAz. Lane 4—azide-labeled ovalbumin and myoglobin control proteins; Lane 5—MW markers unlabeled and B) Azide-labeled goat antibodies (from above) were run as a dilution series. Nanograms of antibodies were calculated for the heavy chains only. Gels were run, stained, and imaged as described above.
  • FIG. 18A: Shows β-elimination in the lower trace only of RII peptide and the upper trace shows simultaneous β-elimination and azido-thioacetate addition of RII peptide. β-elimination removes 98 Da from the peptide and azido-thioacetate addition adds 159 Da, therefore the expected mass of the addition product is 2253 Da (2192-98+159). The 1980 Da peak corresponds to β-eliminated RII with the N-terminal alanine cleaved. The 1655 Da peak corresponds to hydrolysis of RII at the phosphoserine residue and is not observed in the addition sample.
  • FIG. 18B: Shows β-elimination on the lower trace only of RII peptide and the upper trace shows simultaneous β-elimination and azido-amine addition of RII peptide. β-elimination removes 98 Da from the peptide and azido-amine addition adds 142 Da, therefore the expected mass of the addition product is 2236 Da (2192-98+142). Another addition product corresponding to +130 Da (expected mass=2224) is observed. PDS MALDI analysis shows the same fragment masses as for the 2236 product suggesting that the products are related. The 1980 Da peak corresponds to β-eliminated RII with the N-terminal alanine cleaved. The 1655 Da peak corresponds to hydrolysis of RII at the phosphoserine residue and is observed in lesser amount in the addition sample than in the β-elimination-only sample.
  • FIG. 19 Shows the results of fluorescent Click labeling of live and fixed cells
  • FIG. 20: Shows gel analysis of cell surface versus total glycoprotein subclasses. Lanes 1 and 4: Control unfed; Lane 2: GalNAz fed, surface labeled live cells, no perm; Lane 3: GalNAz fed, total cell lysates labeled; Lane 5: ManNAz fed, surface labeled live cells, no perm; Lane 6: ManNAz fed, total cell lysate labeled.
  • FIG. 21: shows the results of gel analysis of labeled glycoproteins in live animals. The upper panels below show 1-D gels of labeled tissue proteins from heart muscle (H), liver (L), or kidney (K). Lower panels show same gels after post-staining with SYPRO Ruby.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • Definitions and Abbreviations
  • Before describing the present invention in detail, it is to be understood that this invention is not limited to specific compositions or process steps, as such may vary. It must be noted that, as used in this specification and the appended claims, the singular form “a”, “an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to “a ligand” includes a plurality of ligands and reference to “an antibody” includes a plurality of antibodies and the like.
  • Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention is related. The following terms and abbreviations (Table 1) are defined for purposes of the invention as described herein.
    TABLE 1
    List of Abbreviations
    Abbreviation Term.
    GalNAz N-alpha-azidoacetylgalactosamine.
    GlcNAz N-alpha-azidoacetylglucosamine.
    GalNAc N-acetylgalactosamine.
    GlcNAc N-acetylglucosamine
    LOS Lipooligosaccharide.
    ManLev N-levulinoylmannosamine.
    ManNAc N-acetylmannosamine.
    ManNAz N-alpha-azidoacetylmannosamine.
    ManNBut N-butanoylmannosamine.
    ManNProp N-propanoylmannosamine.
    NCAM neural cell adhesion molecule.
    PSA Polysialic acid.
    Endo H Endoglycosidase H
    Endo M Endoglycosidase M
  • Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical centers) or double bonds; the racemates, diastereomers, geometric isomers and individual isomers are encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • The compounds described herein may be prepared as a single isomer (e.g., enantiomer, cis-trans, positional, diastereomer) or as a mixture of isomers. In a preferred embodiment, the compounds are prepared as substantially a single isomer. Methods of preparing substantially isomerically pure compounds are known in the art. For example, enantiomerically enriched mixtures and pure enantiomeric compounds can be prepared by using synthetic intermediates that are enantiomerically pure in combination with reactions that either leave the stereochemistry at a chiral center unchanged or result in its complete inversion. Alternatively, the final product or intermediates along the synthetic route can be resolved into a single stereoisomer. Techniques for inverting or leaving unchanged a particular stereocenter, and those for resolving mixtures of stereoisomers are well known in the art and it is well within the ability of one of skill in the art to choose and appropriate method for a particular situation. See, generally, Furniss et al. (eds.) VOGEL'S ENCYCLOPEDIA OF PRACTICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 5TH ED., Longman Scientific and Technical Ltd., Essex, 1991, pp. 809-816; and Heller, Acc. Chem. Res. 23: 128 (1990).
  • The compounds disclosed herein may also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compounds. For example, the compounds may be radiolabeled with radioactive isotopes, such as for example tritium (3H), iodine-125 (125I) or carbon-14 (14C). All isotopic variations of the compounds of the present invention, whether radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • Where a disclosed compound includes a conjugated ring system, resonance stabilization may permit a formal electronic charge to be distributed over the entire molecule. While a particular charge may be depicted as localized on a particular ring system, or a particular heteroatom, it is commonly understood that a comparable resonance structure can be drawn in which the charge may be formally localized on an alternative portion of the compound.
  • Selected compounds having a formal electronic charge may be shown without an appropriate biologically compatible counterion. Such a counterion serves to balance the positive or negative charge present on the compound. As used herein, a substance that is biologically compatible is not toxic as used, and does not have a substantially deleterious effect on biomolecules. Examples of negatively charged counterions include, among others, chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, alkanesulfonate, arylsulfonate, phosphate, perchlorate, tetrafluoroborate, tetraarylboride, nitrate and anions of aromatic or aliphatic carboxylic acids. Preferred counterions may include chloride, iodide, perchlorate and various sulfonates. Examples of positively charged counterions include, among others, alkali metal, or alkaline earth metal ions, ammonium, or alkylammonium ions.
  • Where substituent groups are specified by their conventional chemical formulae, written from left to right, they equally encompass the chemically identical substituents, which would result from writing the structure from right to left, e.g., —CH2O— is intended to also recite —OCH2—.
  • The term “acyl” or “alkanoyl” by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combinations thereof, consisting of the stated number of carbon atoms and an acyl radical on at least one terminus of the alkane radical. The “acyl radical” is the group derived from a carboxylic acid by removing the —OH moiety therefrom.
  • The term “alkyl,” by itself or as part of another substituent means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combination thereof, which may be fully saturated, mono- or polyunsaturated and can include divalent (“alkylene”) and multivalent radicals, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e. C1-C10 means one to ten carbons). Examples of saturated hydrocarbon radicals include, but are not limited to, groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, cyclohexyl, (cyclohexyl)methyl, cyclopropylmethyl, homologs and isomers of, for example, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, and the like. An unsaturated alkyl group is one having one or more double bonds or triple bonds. Examples of unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers. The term “alkyl,” unless otherwise noted, is also meant to include those derivatives of alkyl defined in more detail below, such as “heteroalkyl.” Alkyl groups that are limited to hydrocarbon groups are termed “homoalkyl”.
  • Exemplary alkyl groups of use in the present invention contain between about one and about twenty five carbon atoms (e.g. methyl, ethyl and the like). Straight, branched or cyclic hydrocarbon chains having eight or fewer carbon atoms will also be referred to herein as “lower alkyl”. In addition, the term “alkyl” as used herein further includes one or more substitutions at one or more carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon chain fragment.
  • The term “amino” or “amine group” refers to the group —NR′R″ (or NRR′R″) where R, R′ and R″ are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, aryl alkyl, substituted aryl alkyl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl. A substituted amine being an amine group wherein R′ or R″ is other than hydrogen. In a primary amino group, both R′ and R″ are hydrogen, whereas in a secondary amino group, either, but not both, R′ or R″ is hydrogen. In addition, the terms “amine” and “amino” can include protonated and quaternized versions of nitrogen, comprising the group —NRR′R″ and its biologically compatible anionic counterions.
  • The term “aryl” as used herein refers to cyclic aromatic carbon chain having twenty or fewer carbon atoms, e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, biphenyl, and anthracenyl. One or more carbon atoms of the aryl group may also be substituted with, e.g., alkyl; aryl; heteroaryl; a halogen; nitro; cyano; hydroxyl, alkoxyl or aryloxyl; thio or mercapto, alkyl-, or arylthio; amino, alkylamino, arylamino, dialkyl-, diaryl-, or arylalkylamino; aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, diarylaminocarbonyl, or arylalkylaminocarbonyl; carboxyl, or alkyl- or aryloxycarbonyl; aldehyde; aryl- or alkylcarbonyl; iminyl, or aryl- or alkyliminyl; sulfo; alkyl- or alkylcarbonyl; iminyl, or aryl- or alkyliminyl; sulfo; alkyl- or arylsulfonyl; hydroximinyl, or aryl- or alkoximinyl. In addition, two or more alkyl or heteroalkyl substituents of an aryl group may be combined to form fused aryl-alkyl or aryl-heteroalkyl ring systems (e.g., tetrahydronaphthyl). Substituents including heterocyclic groups (e.g., heteroaryloxy, and heteroaralkylthio) are defined by analogy to the above-described terms.
  • The terms “alkoxy,” “alkylamino” and “alkylthio” (or thioalkoxy) are used in their conventional sense, and refer to those alkyl groups attached to the remainder of the molecule via an oxygen atom, an amino group, or a sulfur atom, respectively.
  • The term “heteroalkyl,” by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain, or cyclic carbon-containing radical, or combinations thereof, consisting of the stated number of carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si, P, S, and Se and wherein the nitrogen, phosphorous, sulfur, and selenium atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom is optionally be quaternized. The heteroatom(s) O, N, P, S, Si, and Se may be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples include, but are not limited to, —CH2—CH2—O—CH3, —CH2—CH2—NH—CH3, —CH2—CH2—N(CH3)—CH3, —CH2—S—CH2—CH3, —CH2—CH2, —S(O)—CH3, —CH2—CH2—S(O)2—CH3, —CH═CH—O—CH3, —Si(CH3)3, —CH2—CH═N—OCH3, and —CH═CH—N(CH3)—CH3. Up to two heteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, —CH2—NH—OCH3 and —CH2—O—Si(CH3)3. Similarly, the term “heteroalkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified, but not limited by, —CH2—CH2—S—CH2—CH2— and —CH2—S—CH2—CH2—NH—CH2—. For heteroalkylene groups, heteroatoms can also occupy either or both of the chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxy, alkylenedioxy, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like). Still further, for alkylene and heteroalkylene linking groups, no orientation of the linking group is implied by the direction in which the formula of the linking group is written. For example, the formula —C(O)2R′— represents both —C(O)2R′— and —R′C(O)2—.
  • The terms “cycloalkyl” and “heterocycloalkyl”, by themselves or in combination with other terms, represent, unless otherwise stated, cyclic versions of “alkyl” and “heteroalkyl”, respectively. Additionally, for heterocycloalkyl, a heteroatom can occupy the position at which the heterocycle is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples of cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohexenyl, 3-cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like. Examples of heterocycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, 1-(1,2,5,6-tetrahydropyridyl), 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 3-morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuran-2-yl, tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, tetrahydrothien-2-yl, tetrahydrothien-3-yl, 1-piperazinyl, 2-piperazinyl, and the like.
  • The term “aryl” means, unless otherwise stated, a polyunsaturated, aromatic moiety that can be a single ring or multiple rings (preferably from 1 to 3 rings), which are fused together or linked covalently. The term “heteroaryl” refers to aryl groups (or rings) that contain from one to four heteroatoms selected from N, O, S, and Se, wherein the nitrogen, sulfur, and selenium atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized. A heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom. Non-limiting examples of aryl and heteroaryl groups include phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-biphenyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, pyrazinyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl, 4-pyrimidyl, 5-benzothiazolyl, purinyl, 2-benzimidazolyl, 5-indolyl, 1-isoquinolyl, 5-isoquinolyl, 2-quinoxalinyl, 5-quinoxalinyl, 3-quinolyl, tetrazolyl, benzo[b]furanyl, benzo[b]thienyl, 2,3-dihydrobenzo[1,4]dioxin-6-yl, benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-yl and 6-quinolyl. Substituents for each of the above noted aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are selected from the group of acceptable substituents described below.
  • For brevity, the term “aryl” when used in combination with other terms (e.g., aryloxy, arylthioxy, arylalkyl) includes both aryl and heteroaryl rings as defined above. Thus, the term “arylalkyl” is meant to include those radicals in which an aryl group is attached to an alkyl group (e.g., benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl and the like) including those alkyl groups in which a carbon atom (e.g., a methylene group) has been replaced by, for example, an oxygen atom (e.g., phenoxymethyl, 2-pyridyloxymethyl, 3-(1-naphthyloxy)propyl, and the like).
  • Each of the above terms (e.g., “alkyl,” “heteroalkyl,” “aryl” and “heteroaryl”) includes both substituted and unsubstituted forms of the indicated radical. Preferred substituents for each type of radical are provided below.
  • Substituents for the alkyl and heteroalkyl radicals (including those groups often referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and heterocycloalkenyl) are generically referred to as “alkyl group substituents,” and they can be one or more of a variety of groups selected from, but not limited to: —OR′, ═O, ═NR′, ═N—OR, —NR′R″, —SR′, -halogen, —SiR′R″R′″, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO2R′, —CONR′R″, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR″R′″, —NR″C(O)2R′, —NR—C(NR′R″R′″)═NR″″, —NR—C(NR′R″)═NR′″, —S(O)R′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)2NR′R″, —NRSO2R′, —CN and —NO2 in a number ranging from zero to (2m′+1), where m′ is the total number of carbon atoms in such radical. R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ each preferably independently refer to hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, e.g., aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkoxy groups, or arylalkyl groups. When a compound includes more than one R group, for example, each of the R groups is independently selected as are each R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ groups when more than one of these groups is present. When R′ and R″ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring. For example, —NR′R″ is meant to include, but not be limited to, 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl. From the above discussion of substituents, one of skill in the art will understand that the term “alkyl” is meant to include groups including carbon atoms bound to groups other than hydrogen groups, such as haloalkyl (e.g., —CF3 and —CH2CF3) and acyl (e.g., —C(O)CH3, —C(O)CF3, —C(O)CH2OCH3, and the like).
  • Similar to the substituents described for the alkyl radical, substituents for the aryl and heteroaryl groups are generically referred to as “aryl group substituents.” The substituents are selected from, for example: halogen, —OR′, ═O, ═NR′, ═N—OR′, —NR′R″, —SR′, -halogen, —SiR′R″R′″, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO2R′, —CONR′R″, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR″R′″, —NR″C(O)2R′, —NR—C(NR′R″R′″)═NR″″, —NR—C(NR′R″)═NR′″, —S(O)R′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)2NR′R″, —NRSO2R′, —CN and —NO2, —R′, —N3, —CH(Ph)2, fluoro(C1-C4)alkoxy, and fluoro(C1-C4)alkyl, in a number ranging from zero to the total number of open valences on the aromatic ring system; and where R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ are preferably independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. When a compound includes more than one R group, for example, each of the R groups is independently selected as are each R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ groups when more than one of these groups is present. In the schemes that follow, the symbol X represents “R” as described above.
  • Two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of the aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -T-C(O)—(CRR′)q—U—, wherein T and U are independently —NR—, —O—, —CRR′— or a single bond, and q is an integer of from 0 to 3. Alternatively, two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of the aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -A-(CH2)r—B—, wherein A and B are independently —CRR′—, —O—, —NR—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)2NR′— or a single bond, and r is an integer of from 1 to 4. One of the single bonds of the new ring so formed may optionally be replaced with a double bond. Alternatively, two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of the aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula —(CRR′)s—X—(CR″R′″)d—, where s and d are independently integers of from 0 to 3, and X is —O—, —NR′—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, or —S(O)2NR′—. The substituents R, R′, R″ and R′″ are preferably independently selected from hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted (C1-C6)alkyl.
  • As used herein, the term “heteroatom” includes oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), silicon (Si), and selenium (Se).
  • The term “amino” or “amine group” refers to the group —NR′R″ (or N+RR′R″) where R, R′ and R″ are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, aryl alkyl, substituted aryl alkyl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl. A substituted amine being an amine group wherein R′ or R″ is other than hydrogen. In a primary amino group, both R′ and R″ are hydrogen, whereas in a secondary amino group, either, but not both, R′ or R″ is hydrogen. In addition, the terms “amine” and “amino” can include protonated and quaternized versions of nitrogen, comprising the group —N+RR′R″ and its biologically compatible anionic counterions.
  • The term “aqueous solution” as used herein refers to a solution that is predominantly water and retains the solution characteristics of water. Where the aqueous solution contains solvents in addition to water, water is typically the predominant solvent.
  • The term “Carboxyalkyl” as used herein refers to a group having the general formula —(CH2)nCOOH wherein n is 1-18.
  • The term “activated alkyne,” as used herein, refers to a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an azide reactive group on another molecule to form a covalent chemical bond between the activated alkyne group and the alkyne reactive group. Examples of alkyne-reactive groups include azides. “Alkyne-reactive” can also refer to a molecule that contains a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an alkyne group.
  • The term “affinity,” as used herein, refers to the strength of the binding interaction of two molecules, such as an antibody and an antigen or a positively charged moiety and a negatively charged moiety. For bivalent molecules such as antibodies, affinity is typically defined as the binding strength of one binding domain for the antigen, e.g. one Fab fragment for the antigen. The binding strength of both binding domains together for the antigen is referred to as “avidity”. As used herein “High affinity” refers to a ligand that binds to an antibody having an affinity constant (Ka) greater than 104 M−1, typically 105-1011 M−1; as determined by inhibition ELISA or an equivalent affinity determined by comparable techniques such as, for example, Scatchard plots or using Kd/dissociation constant, which is the reciprocal of the Ka.
  • The term “alkyne reactive,” as used herein, refers to a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an alkyne modified group on another molecule to form a covalent chemical bond between the alkyne modified group and the alkyne reactive group. Examples of alkyne-reactive groups include azides. “Alkyne-reactive” can also refer to a molecule that contains a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an alkyne group.
  • The term “antibody,” as used herein, refers to a protein of the immunoglobulin (Ig) superfamily that binds noncovalently to certain substances (e.g. antigens and immunogens) to form an antibody-antigen complex. Antibodies can be endogenous, or polyclonal wherein an animal is immunized to elicit a polyclonal antibody response or by recombinant methods resulting in monoclonal antibodies produced from hybridoma cells or other cell lines. It is understood that the term “antibody” as used herein includes within its scope any of the various classes or sub-classes of immunoglobulin derived from any of the animals conventionally used.
  • The term “antibody fragments,” as used herein, refers to fragments of antibodies that retain the principal selective binding characteristics of the whole antibody. Particular fragments are well-known in the art, for example, Fab, Fab′, and F(ab′)2, which are obtained by digestion with various proteases, pepsin or papain, and which lack the Fc fragment of an intact antibody or the so-called “half-molecule” fragments obtained by reductive cleavage of the disulfide bonds connecting the heavy chain components in the intact antibody. Such fragments also include isolated fragments consisting of the light-chain-variable region, “Fv” fragments consisting of the variable regions of the heavy and light chains, and recombinant single chain polypeptide molecules in which light and heavy variable regions are connected by a peptide linker. Other examples of binding fragments include (i) the Fd fragment, consisting of the VH and CH1 domains; (ii) the dAb fragment (Ward, et al., Nature 341, 544 (1989)), which consists of a VH domain; (iii) isolated CDR regions; and (iv) single-chain Fv molecules (scFv) described above. In addition, arbitrary fragments can be made using recombinant technology that retains antigen-recognition characteristics.
  • The term “antigen,” as used herein, refers to a molecule that induces, or is capable of inducing, the formation of an antibody or to which an antibody binds selectively, including but not limited to a biological material. Antigen also refers to “immunogen”. The target-binding antibodies selectively bind an antigen, as such the term can be used herein interchangeably with the term “target”.
  • The term “anti-region antibody,” as used herein, refers to an antibody that was produced by immunizing an animal with a select region that is a fragment of a foreign antibody wherein only the fragment is used as the immunogen. Regions of antibodies include the Fc region, hinge region, Fab region, etc. Anti-region antibodies include monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies. The term “anti-region fragment” as used herein refers to a monovalent fragment that was generated from an anti-region antibody of the present invention by enzymatic cleavage.
  • The term “aqueous solution,” as used herein, refers to a solution that is predominantly water and retains the solution characteristics of water. Where the aqueous solution contains solvents in addition to water, water is typically the predominant solvent.
  • The term “azide reactive,” as used herein, refers to a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an azido modified group on another molecule to form a covalent chemical bond between the azido modified group and the azide reactive group. Examples of azide-reactive groups include alkynes and phospines (e.g. triaryl phosphine). “Azide-reactive” can also refer to a molecule that contains a chemical moiety that selectively reacts with an azido group.
  • The term “biomolecule,” as used herein, refers to proteins, peptides, amino acids, glycoproteins, nucleic acids, nucleotides, nucleosides, oligonucleotides, sugars, oligosaccharides, lipids, hormones, proteoglycans, carbohydrates, polypeptides, polynucleotides, polysaccharides, which having characteristics typical of molecules found in living organisms and may be naturally occurring or may be artificial (not found in nature and not identical to a molecule found in nature).
  • The term “buffer,” as used herein, refers to a system that acts to minimize the change in acidity or basicity of the solution against addition or depletion of chemical substances.
  • The term “carrier molecule,” as used herein, refers to a biological or a non-biological component that is covalently bonded to compound of the present invention. Such components include, but are not limited to, an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a polysaccharide, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid, a hapten, a psoralen, a drug, a hormone, a lipid, a lipid assembly, a synthetic polymer, a polymeric microparticle, a biological cell, a virus and combinations thereof.
  • The term, “chemical handle” as used herein refers to a specific functional group, such as an azide, alkyne, activated alkyne, phosphite, phosphine, and the like. The chemical handle is distinct from the reactive group, defined below, in that the chemical handle are moieties that are rarely found in naturally-occurring biomolecules and are chemically inert towards biomolecules (e.g., native cellular components), but when reacted with an azide- or alkyne-reactive group the reaction can take place efficiently under biologically relevant conditions (e.g., cell culture conditions, such as in the absence of excess heat or harsh reactants).
  • The term “click chemistry,” as used herein, refers to the Huisgen cycloaddition or the 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition between an azide and a terminal alkyne to form a 1,2,4-triazole. Such chemical reactions can use, but are not limited to, simple heteroatomic organic reactants and are reliable, selective, stereospecific, and exothermic.
  • The term “cycloaddition” as used herein refers to a chemical reaction in which two or more π (pi)-electron systems (e.g., unsaturated molecules or unsaturated parts of the same molecule) combine to form a cyclic product in which there is a net reduction of the bond multiplicity. In a cycloaddition, the π (pi) electrons are used to form new π (pi) bonds. The product of a cycloaddition is called an “adduct” or “cycloadduct”. Different types of cycloadditions are known in the art including, but not limited to, [3+2]cycloadditions and Diels-Alder reactions. [3+2]cycloadditions, which are also called 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions, occur between a 1,3-dipole and a dipolarophile and are typically used for the construction of five-membered heterocyclic rings. The term “[3+2]cycloaddition” also encompasses “copperless” [3+2]cycloadditions between azides and cyclooctynes and difluorocyclooctynes described by Bertozzi et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2004, 126:15046-15047.
  • The term “detectable response” as used herein refers to an occurrence of, or a change in, a signal that is directly or indirectly detectable either by observation or by instrumentation. Typically, the detectable response is an occurrence of a signal wherein the fluorophore is inherently fluorescent and does not produce a change in signal upon binding to a metal ion or biological compound. Alternatively, the detectable response is an optical response resulting in a change in the wavelength distribution patterns or intensity of absorbance or fluorescence or a change in light scatter, fluorescence lifetime, fluorescence polarization, or a combination of the above parameters. Other detectable responses include, for example, chemiluminescence, phosphorescence, radiation from radioisotopes, magnetic attraction, and electron density.
  • The term “detectably distinct” as used herein refers to a signal that is distinguishable or separable by a physical property either by observation or by instrumentation. For example, a fluorophore is readily distinguishable either by spectral characteristics or by fluorescence intensity, lifetime, polarization or photo-bleaching rate from another fluorophore in the sample, as well as from additional materials that are optionally present.
  • The term “directly detectable” as used herein refers to the presence of a material or the signal generated from the material is immediately detectable by observation, instrumentation, or film without requiring chemical modifications or additional substances.
  • The term “fluorophore” as used herein refers to a composition that is inherently fluorescent or demonstrates a change in fluorescence upon binding to a biological compound or metal ion, i.e., fluorogenic. Fluorophores may contain substitutents that alter the solubility, spectral properties or physical properties of the fluorophore. Numerous fluorophores are known to those skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to coumarin, cyanine, benzofuran, a quinoline, a quinazolinone, an indole, a benzazole, a borapolyazaindacene and xanthenes including fluoroscein, rhodamine and rhodol as well as other fluorophores described in RICHARD P. HAUGLAND, MOLECULAR PROBES HANDBOOK OF FLUORESCENT PROBES AND RESEARCH CHEMICALS (10th edition, CD-ROM, September 2005), which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • The term “glycoprotein,” as used herein, refers to a protein that has been glycosolated and those that have been enzymatically modified, in vivo or in vitro, to comprise a sugar group.
  • The term “kit,” as used herein, refers to a packaged set of related components, typically one or more compounds or compositions.
  • The term “label,” as used herein, refers to a chemical moiety or protein that is directly or indirectly detectable (e.g. due to its spectral properties, conformation or activity) when attached to a target or compound and used in the present methods, including reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules. The label can be directly detectable (fluorophore) or indirectly detectable (hapten or enzyme). Such labels include, but are not limited to, radiolabels that can be measured with radiation-counting devices; pigments, dyes or other chromogens that can be visually observed or measured with a spectrophotometer; spin labels that can be measured with a spin label analyzer; and fluorescent labels (fluorophores), where the output signal is generated by the excitation of a suitable molecular adduct and that can be visualized by excitation with light that is absorbed by the dye or can be measured with standard fluorometers or imaging systems, for example. The label can be a chemiluminescent substance, where the output signal is generated by chemical modification of the signal compound; a metal-containing substance; or an enzyme, where there occurs an enzyme-dependent secondary generation of signal, such as the formation of a colored product from a colorless substrate. The term label can also refer to a “tag” or hapten that can bind selectively to a conjugated molecule such that the conjugated molecule, when added subsequently along with a substrate, is used to generate a detectable signal. For example, one can use biotin as a tag and then use an avidin or streptavidin conjugate of horseradish peroxidate (HRP) to bind to the tag, and then use a calorimetric substrate (e.g., tetramethylbenzidine (TMB)) or a fluorogenic substrate such as Amplex Red reagent (Molecular Probes, Inc.) to detect the presence of HRP. Numerous labels are know by those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to, particles, fluorophores, haptens, enzymes and their calorimetric, fluorogenic and chemiluminescent substrates and other labels that are described in RICHARD P. HAUGLAND, MOLECULAR PROBES HANDBOOK OF FLUORESCENT PROBES AND RESEARCH PRODUCTS (9th edition, CD-ROM, September 2002), supra.
  • The term “linker” or “L”, as used herein, refers to a single covalent bond or a series of stable covalent bonds incorporating 1-30 nonhydrogen atoms selected from the group consisting of C, N, O, S and P. Exemplary linking members include a moiety that includes —C(O)NH—, —C(O)O—, —NH—, —S—, —O—, and the like. A “cleavable linker” is a linker that has one or more cleavable groups that may be broken by the result of a reaction or condition. The term “cleavable group” refers to a moiety that allows for release of a portion, e.g., a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support, of a conjugate from the remainder of the conjugate by cleaving a bond linking the released moiety to the remainder of the conjugate. Such cleavage is either chemical in nature, or enzymatically mediated. Exemplary enzymatically cleavable groups include natural amino acids or peptide sequences that end with a natural amino acid. In addition to enzymatically cleavable groups, it is within the scope of the present invention to include one or more sites that are cleaved by the action of an agent other than an enzyme. Exemplary non-enzymatic cleavage agents include, but are not limited to, acids, bases, light (e.g., nitrobenzyl derivatives, phenacyl groups, benzoin esters), and heat. Many cleaveable groups are known in the art. See, for example, Jung et al., Biochem. Biophys. Acta, 761: 152-162 (1983); Joshi et al., J. Biol. Chem., 265: 14518-14525 (1990); Zarling et al., J. Immunol., 124: 913-920 (1980); Bouizar et al, Eur. J. Biochem., 155: 141-147 (1986); Park et al., J. Biol. Chem., 261: 205-210 (1986); Browning et al., J. Immunol., 143: 1859-1867 (1989). Moreover a broad range of cleavable, bifunctional (both homo- and hetero-bifunctional) spacer arms are commercially available. An exemplary cleavable group, an ester, is cleavable group that may be cleaved by a reagent, e.g. sodium hydroxide, resulting in a carboxylate-containing fragment and a hydroxyl-containing product.
  • The term “post translational moiety” as used herein refers to any moiety that is naturally appended to a protein post translationally by a recombinant or naturally occurring enzyme. Examples include, but are not limited to, acetate, phosphate, various lipids and carbohydrates. As used herein “azido or alkyne modified post translational moiety” means any post translational moiety that comprises an azido or alkyne group, which are groups rarely round in naturally occurring biological systems.
  • The terms “protein” and “polypeptide” are used herein in a generic sense to include polymers of amino acid residues of any length. The term “peptide” is used herein to refer to polypeptides having less than 100 amino acid residues, typically less than 10 amino acid residues. The terms apply to amino acid polymers in which one or more amino acid residues are an artificial chemical analogue of a corresponding naturally occurring amino acid, as well as to naturally occurring amino acid polymers.
  • The term “purified” as used herein refers to a preparation of a glycoprotein that is essentially free from contaminating proteins that normally would be present in association with the glycoprotein, e.g., in a cellular mixture or milieu in which the protein or complex is found endogenously such as serum proteins or cellular lysate.
  • The term “reactive group” as used herein refers to a group that is capable of reacting with another chemical group to form a covalent bond, i.e. is covalently reactive under suitable reaction conditions, and generally represents a point of attachment for another substance. As used herein, reactive groups refer to chemical moieties generally found in biological systems and that react under normal biological conditions, these are herein distinguished from the chemical handle, defined above, the azido and activated alkyne moieties of the present invention. As referred to herein the reactive group is a moiety, such as carboxylic acid or succinimidyl ester, on the compounds of the present invention that is capable of chemically reacting with a functional group on a different compound to form a covalent linkage. Reactive groups generally include nucleophiles, electrophiles and photoactivatable groups.
  • The term “reporter molecule” refers to any moiety capable of being attached to a modified post translationally modified protein of the present invention, and detected either directly or indirectly. Reporter molecules include, without limitation, a chromophore, a fluorophore, a fluorescent protein, a phosphorescent dye, a tandem dye, a particle, a hapten, an enzyme and a radioisotope. Preferred reporter molecules include fluorophores, fluorescent proteins, haptens, and enzymes.
  • The term “sample” as used herein refers to any material that may contain an analyte for detection or quantification or a modified post translationally modified protein of the present invention. The analyte may include a reactive group, e.g., a group through which a compound of the invention can be conjugated to the analyte. The sample may also include diluents, buffers, detergents, and contaminating species, debris and the like that are found mixed with the target. Illustrative examples include urine, sera, blood plasma, total blood, saliva, tear fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, secretory fluids from nipples and the like. Also included are solid, gel or sol substances such as mucus, body tissues, cells and the like suspended or dissolved in liquid materials such as buffers, extractants, solvents and the like. Typically, the sample is a live cell, a biological fluid that comprises endogenous host cell proteins, nucleic acid polymers, nucleotides, oligonucleotides, peptides and buffer solutions. The sample may be in an aqueous solution, a viable cell culture or immobilized on a solid or semi solid surface such as a polyacrylamide gel, membrane blot or on a microarray.
  • The term “solid support,” as used herein, refers to a material that is substantially insoluble in a selected solvent system, or which can be readily separated (e.g., by precipitation) from a selected solvent system in which it is soluble. Solid supports useful in practicing the present invention can include groups that are activated or capable of activation to allow selected one or more compounds described herein to be bound to the solid support.
  • The term “Staudinger ligation” as used herein refers to a chemical reaction developed by Saxon and Bertozzi (E. Saxon and C. Bertozzi, Science, 2000, 287: 2007-2010) that is a modification of the classical Staudinger reaction. The classical Staudinger reaction is a chemical reaction in which the combination of an azide with a phosphine or phosphite produces an aza-ylide intermediate, which upon hydrolysis yields a phosphine oxide and an amine. A Staudinger reaction is a mild method of reducing an azide to an amine; and triphenylphosphine is commonly used as the reducing agent. In a Staudinger ligation, an electrophilic trap (usually a methyl ester) is appropriately placed on the aryl group of a triarylphosphine (usually ortho to the phosphorus atom) and reacted with the azide, to yield an aza-ylide intermediate, which rearranges in aqueous media to produce a compound with amide group and a phosphine oxide function. The Staudinger ligation is so named because it ligates (attaches/covalently links) the two starting molecules together, whereas in the classical Staudinger reaction, the two products are not covalently linked after hydrolysis.
  • The terms “structural integrity of the [biomolecule] is not reduced” or “preservation of the structural integrity of the [biomolecule]”, as used herein, means that either: 1) when analyzed by gel electrophoresis and detection (such as staining), a band or spot arising from the labeled biomolecule is not reduced in intensity by more than 20%, and preferably not reduced by more than 10%, with respect to the corresponding band or spot arising from the same amount of the electrophoresed unlabeled biomolecule, arising from the labeled biomolecule analyzed; or 2) when analyzed by gel electrophoresis, a band or spot arising from the labeled biomolecule is not observed to be significantly less sharp than the corresponding band or spot arising from the same amount of the electrophoresed unlabeled biomolecule, where “significantly less sharp” (synonymous with “significantly more diffuse”) means the detectable band or spot takes up at least 5% more, preferably 10% more, more preferably 20% more area on the gel than the corresponding unlabeled biomolecule. Other reproducible tests for structural integrity of labeled biomolecules include, without limitation detection of released amino acids or peptides, or mass spectrometry.
  • In general, for ease of understanding the present invention, the metabolic and enzymatic labeling of biomolecules with azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine, and the chemical labeling of such moieties with azide reactive moieties, alkyne reactive moieties or phosphine reactive moieties will first be described in detail. This will be followed by some embodiments in which such labeled biomolecules can be detected, isolated and/or analyzed. Exemplified methods are then disclosed.
  • Modification of Biomolecules
  • The tagging/labeling of biomolecules, including glycoproteins, phosphoproteins, isoprenylated proteins, can utilize various post-translation modifications to incorporate a bioorthoganol moiety into a biomolecule followed by chemical attachment of a label (reporter molecule, solid support, and carrier molecule). An alternative approach is to incorporate a bioorthoganol moiety into the biomolecule using cellular biosynthetic pathways, or metabolic modifications. These bioorthogonol moieties are non-native, non-perturbing chemical handles possessing unique chemical functionality that can be modified through highly selective reactions. Examples of such moieties include, but are not limited to hyrazide and aminooxy derivatives, azides that can be selectively modified with phosphines (Staudinger ligation), azides that can be selectively modified with activated alkynes, and azides that can be selectively modified with terminal alkynes (“click” chemistry).
  • Post-translational modification is alteration of a primary structure of the protein after the protein has been translated. After translation, the post-translational modification of amino acids extends the range of functions of the protein by attaching to it other biochemical functional groups such as acetate, phosphate, various lipids and carbohydrates. In addition, the range of functions of proteins can be extended by post-translational modifications that change the chemical nature of an amino acid or by making structural changes such as disulfide bridges formation. Other post-translational modifications involve enzymes that remove amino acids from the amino end (N-terminus) of the protein, or cut the protein chain. Post-translational modifications act on individual residues either by cleavage at specific points, deletions, additions or by converting or modifying side chains.
  • The various post-translational modifications that can be used with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cleavage, N-terminal extensions, protein degradation, acylation of the N-terminus, biotinylation (acylation of lysine residues with a biotin), amidation of the C-terminal, glycosylation, iodination, covalent attachment of prosthetic groups, acetylation (the addition of an acetyl group, usually at the N-terminus of the protein), alkylation (the addition of an alkyl group (e.g. methyl, ethyl, propyl) usually at lysine or arginine residues), methylation, adenylation, ADP-ribosylation, covalent cross links within, or between, polypeptide chains, sulfonation, prenylation, Vitamin C dependent modifications (proline and lysine hydroxylations and carboxy terminal amidation), Vitamin K dependent modification wherein Vitamin K is a cofactor in the carboxylation of glutamic acid residues resulting in the formation of a γ-carboxyglutamate (a gla residue), glutamylation (covalent linkage of glutamic acid residues), glycylation (covalent linkage glycine residues), glycosylation (addition of a glycosyl group to either asparagine, hydroxylysine, serine, or threonine, resulting in a glycoprotein), isoprenylation (addition of an isoprenoid group such as farnesol and geranylgeraniol), lipoylation (attachment of a lipoate functionality), phosphopantetheinylation (addition of a 4′-phosphopantetheinyl moiety from coenzyme A, as in fatty acid, polyketide, non-ribosomal peptide and leucine biosynthesis), phosphorylation (addition of a phosphate group, usually to serine, tyrosine, threonine or histidine), and sulfation (addition of a sulfate group, usually to a tyrosine residue). The post-translational modifications that change the chemical nature of amino acids include, but are not limited to, citrullination (the conversion of arginine to citrulline by deimination), and deamidation (the conversion of glutamine to glutamic acid or asparagine to aspartic acid). The post-translational modifications that involve structural changes include, but are not limited to, formation of disulfide bridges (covalent linkage of two cysteine amino acids) and proteolytic cleavage (cleavage of a protein at a peptide bond). Certain post-translational modifications involve the addition of other proteins or peptides, such as ISGylation (covalent linkage to the ISG15 protein (Interferon-Stimulated Gene)), SUMOylation (covalent linkage to the SUMO protein (Small Ubiquitin-related MOdifier)) and ubiquitination (covalent linkage to the protein ubiquitin). In certain embodiments, selenoproteins are used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • Glycoproteins are biomolecules composed of proteins covalently linked to carbohydrates. Certain post-translational modifications append a sugar moiety (carbohydrate or oligosaccharide) onto a protein, thereby forming a glycoprotein. The common monosaccharides found in glycoproteins include, but are not limited to, glucose, galactose, mannose, fucose, xylose, N-acetylgalactosamine (GalNAc), N-acetylglucosamine (GlcNAc) and N-acetylneuraminic acid (NANA, also known as sialic acid). In addition the sugar moiety can be a glycosyl group. In glycoproteins the carbohydrates can be linked to the protein component by either N-glycosylation or O-glycosylation. N-glycosylation commonly occurs through asparagine forming an N-glycosidic linkage via an amide group. O-glycosylation commonly occurs at hydroxylysine, hydroxyproline, serine, or threonine, forming an O-glycosidic linkage.
  • The metabolic labeling of glycoproteins with azido sugars has been described, however these currently known methods lack sufficient methodology for detecting and isolating such azido modified glycoproteins. Provided herein are methods and compositions for the detection, isolation and/or analysis of glycosylated proteins facilitated by the incorporation and use of unnatural azido sugars into glycoproteins rather than natural sugars. In particular, presented are a novel methods for A) labeling azido modified biomolecules in solution followed by separation using methods known in the art for separating biomolecules based on size, weight and/or charge, B) labeling immobilized azido modified biomolecules and C) novel methods for enzymatically labeling a biomolecule with an azide group. These azido modified biomolecules can form conjugates with reporter molecules, carrier molecules or solid supports, provided an azide reactive group is present, using either methods known in the art or the current methods provided herein.
  • Also provided herein are methods and compositions for the detection, isolation and/or analysis of glycosylated proteins facilitated by the incorporation and use of unnatural alkyne containing sugars into glycoproteins rather than natural sugars. In particular, presented are a novel methods for A) labeling alkyne modified biomolecules in solution followed by separation using methods known in the art for separating biomolecules based on size, weight and/or charge, B) labeling immobilized alkyne modified biomolecules and C) novel methods for enzymatically labeling a biomolecule with an alkyne group. These alkyne modified biomolecules can form conjugates with reporter molecules, carrier molecules or solid supports, that have azide groups, using either methods known in the art or the current methods provided herein.
  • The methods described herein can be used for metabolic and enzymatic selective labeling of different subclasses of glycoproteins, including cell surface N- and O-linked glycoproteins and intracellular O-GlcNAc-modified proteins. Such labeling enables highly-sensitive detection of labeled glycoproteins using chromatographic and electrophoretic techniques including, but not limited to, gel electrophoresis and western blot analysis. (Dube D. H., Bertozzi C. R. (2003). Curr Opin Chem. Biol. October; 7 (5):616-25; Boeggeman E. E., Ramakrishnan B., Qasba P. K. (2003). Protein Expr Purif August; 30 (2):219-29; Khidekel N., Arndt S., Lamarre-Vincent N., Lippert A., Poulin-Kirstien K. G., Ramakrishnan B., Qasba P. K., Hsieh-Wilson L. C. (2003). J Am Chem Soc December 31; 125 (52):16162-3). In certain embodiments, glycoproteins are “labeled” with azide modified sugar moieties, while in other embodiments glycoproteins are “labeled” with alkyne modified sugar moieties. This can be accomplished either metabolically, wherein cells are fed either unnatural azide containing sugars or alkyne containing sugars, or it is accomplished in vitro by enzymatic methods. In a specific embodiment of such enzymatic methods, the galactose-1-phosphate uridyl transferase (GalT) enzyme is used to incorporate a UDP-GalNAz moiety to a protein.
  • Phosphoproteins are biomolecules composed of proteins having a phosphate group covalently linked to one or more serine, threonine, or tyrosine residues. Phosphate groups are added to proteins post translationally by kinases and removed by phoshphorylases; changes in the phosphorylation state of a protein can have a significant effect on its structure and function.
  • Phosphoproteins and phosphopeptides can also be modified by the addition of an azide or alkyne group. For example, a one or more phosphate groups on a phosphoprotein can be converted to an azido or alkyne, by using base treatment to remove the phosphate group of phosphoserine, converting it to dehydroamino-2-butyric acid, or to remove the phosphate group of threonine to convert it to dehydroalanine. The dephosphorylated protein can then be reacted with a thiol or amine-containing compound that also comprises an azide or terminal alkyne to form an azido or alkyne labeled (phospho)protein. A phosphoprotein so modified is referred to herein as a modified phosphoproteins, although all phosphate groups of the modified phosphoprotein may have been removed.
  • The invention thus includes a method of modifying a phosphoprotein to include an alkyne or azido group, in which the method includes: contacting a phosphoprotein that includes at least one phosphoserine residue or at least one phosphothreonine residue with a base solution that removes phosphates from threonine and serine residues of the phosphorylated protein to form a protein comprising at least one dehydroalanine or at least one dehydroamino-2-butyric acid; contacting the dehydroalanine or dehydroamino-2-butyric acid with a compound that includes a thio or amine group and has an azide or terminal alkyne to form an azido or alkyne modified protein; and contacting the azido or terminal alkyne-modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule, or solid support that comprises an azido moiety, where the phosphoprotein is labeled with a terminal alkyne, or a reporter molecule, carrier molecule, or solid support that comprises an alkyne, where the phosphoprotein is modified to have an azido group. The modified phosphoproteins comprising azido or alkyne groups can be used in the labeling methods provided herein.
  • Metabolic Modification
  • The modified proteins used in the methods and compostions described herein can be formed by in vivo metabolic modification. Such in vivo metabolic modification of proteins can be accomplished using the methods described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,936,701. In general, cells are fed non-natural sugars having a desired functional group including, but not limited to, azide moieties and alkyne moieties and phosphine moieties. These non-natural sugars are then attached to the protein forming a glycoprotein conjugate which is then expressed by the cell. The modified proteins are either naturally secreted and isolated, or they can be present, for example, in a cell lystate, extracellular milieu, cell fraction, or isolated from a complex protein mixture. The resulting modified protein is then used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • In certain embodiments, such non-natural sugars contain a moiety that facilitates entry into the cell including, but not limited to, a tetraacetyl moiety. Thus, non-natural sugar substrates, used in the metabolic labeling of proteins used in the methods and compositions described herein, include small groups that the cellular machinery would be more likely to incorporate, and not recognize as being foreign. The cellular metabolic machinery incorporates the substrates into N- or O-linked glycans attached to the proteins.
  • One aspect of the methods provided herein involves metabolically labelling proteins with non-natural sugar substrates that have azido groups or alkyne groups that may be used for “click” chemistry as described herein. Another aspect of the methods provided herein involves metabolically labelling proteins with non-natural sugar substrates that have azido groups or phosphine groups that may be used in a Staudinger ligation as described herein. Such non-natural sugars can be synthesized using methods known in the art. In certain embodiments, the non-natural sugars used to metabolically label proteins are non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but are not limited to, GlcNAz, GalNAz and ManNAz, or tetraacetylated non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but not limited to, GlcNAz, ManNAz, and GalNAz. In certain embodiments, the non-natural sugars used to metabolically label glycoproteins or specific subsets of cellular glycoproteins in cultured cells are non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but are not limited to, GlcNAz, GalNAz and ManNAz, or tetraacetylated non-natural azido-containing sugars including, but not limited to, GlcNAz, ManNAz, and GalNAz. Certain embodiments of metabolic labeling with non-natural azido-containing sugars is shown in FIG. 1, and described in Example 1, wherein cells are fed non-natural azido-containing sugars to obtain modified proteins, including modified glycoproteins, used in the methods and compositions described herein. FIG. 2 shows gel images of modified proteins obtained from Jurkat cells which were fed Ac4ManNAz or Ac4GalNAz for 3 days (A) or Ac4GlcNAz overnight (B). The modified proteins were obtained from harvested cells and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe using “click” chemistry (C). The gels were then stained with a protein stain that has different excitation/emission properties than the alkyne probe, thereby demonstrating the selectivity of “click” chemistry for glycoprotein labeling.
  • Proteins metabolically labeled with non-natural sugars, followed by labeling using “click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation, can be detected using 2-D gel electrophoresis. FIG. 3 shows a 2-D gel separation of proteins obtained from soluble Jurkat cell treated with Ac4GlcNAz and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe using click chemistry. The control cell culture was not fed Ac4GlcNAz and therefore does not show the presence of the fluorescent alkyne probe. However, staining with a protein stain shows the presence of protein in both gels.
  • The unnatural sugars described herein can be incorporated into various glycoproteins and subclasses of glycoproteins. In certain embodiments, the glycoproteins are antibodies from antibody-producing cells such as, by way of example only, hybridoma cells, and any other cell that produces antibodies or recombinant antibodies. Once the in vivo labeled antibodies are released and isolated from the cells, the labeled antibodies may be directly labeled using an azide reactive reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule, as described herein. The reporter molecules can include, but are not limited to labels, while the solid supports can include, but are not limited to, solid support resins, microtiter plates and microarray slides. The carrier molecules can include, but are not limited to, affinity tags, nucleotides, oligonucleotides and polymers.
  • Enzymatic Modification
  • The modified proteins used in the methods and compositions described herein can be modified in vitro using enzymatic post-translational modification. In certain embodiments the post-translational modifications used in the methods and compostions described herein include, but are not limited to, glycosylation, isoprenylation, lipoylation and phosphorylation. In certain embodiments, such post-translational modifications are used to modify proteins with azide moieties, alkyne moieties, or phosphine moieties. Such phosphine moieties include, but are not limited to, triaryl phosphines. Certain embodiments utilize β-1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT), or a mutant thereof, to modify glycosylated proteins with azide moieties, alkyne moieties, or phosphine moieties. β-1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT) is an enzyme that can catalyze the transfer of galactose from uridine diphosphate-GalNAz (UDP-GalNAz) to terminal GlcNAc groups. Thus, glycoproteins are enzymatically labeled in vitro with azide modified sugar moieties, alkyne modified sugar moieties, or phosphine modifier sugar moieties. In another embodiment, GalT has been mutated, such as with a single Y289L mutation, to enlarge the binding pocket and to enhance the catalytic activity toward substrates. Other mutations to GalT are contemplated such that the mutation provide enlargement of the binding pocket and enhancement of the catalytic activity toward substrates. As shown in FIGS. 6A-B, a mutant of β-GalT enzyme (β-GalT1) can be used to enzymatically label an O-GlcNAc containing protein with azide (UDP-GalNAz). In addition FIG. 6A-B show that UDP-GalNAz is also a suitable substrate for the mutant of β-1,4-galactosyltransferase (GalT1) resulting in the ability to enzymatically attach an non-natural azido-containing sugar to a glycoprotein.
  • The methods and compositions described herein for enzymatically labeling glycoproteins with azido-containing sugars, alkyne-containing sugars or phosphine-containing sugars provide for the rapid, selective and sensitive detection of post-translationally modified proteins, including, but not limited to, those with post-translational glycosylations. Such detection methods utilize labeling using the selective reactivity of “click” chemistry, or Staudinger ligation, as described herein. Such labeling methods can be used to detect post-translational modifications on proteins in which such modifications were undetectable using other techniques. In certain embodiments, such labeling methods can be used to detect O-GlcNAc post-translational modifications on proteins in which such modifications are undetectable using other techniques.
  • In certain embodiments, enzymatic post-translational modification methods are used to selectively transfer azido, alkyne of phosphine functionality onto proteins using azido-containing substrates, alkyne-containing substrates or phosphine-containing substrates. Once transferred the modified protein can then be conjugated to a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier, molecule using a “click” chemistry, Staudinger ligation, or activated alkyne based reactions, thereby enabling detection, isolation and/or analysis of the modified protein. Thus, in certain embodiments, the in vitro enzymatic labeling allows for sensitive detection of modified proteins from cells or tissues.
  • In certain embodiments, such methods are used to exploit the ability of an engineered mutant of β-1,4-galactosyltransferase to selectively transfer azido functionality onto O-GlcNAc glycosylated proteins using non-natural azido-containing sugars, alkyne functionality onto O-GlcNAc glycosylated proteins using non-natural alkyne-containing sugars, or phosphine functionality onto O-GlcNAc glycosylated proteins using non-natural phosphine-containing sugars. Once transferred the azido modified glycoprotein, alkyne modified glycoprotein or phosphine modified glycoprotein can then be conjugated to a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule using a “click” chemistry, Staudinger ligation or activated alkyne based reactions, thereby enabling detection, isolation and/or analysis of the modified protein. Thus, in certain embodiments, the in vitro labeling with the modified β-GalT1 enzyme allows for sensitive detection of O-GlcNAc-modified proteins from cells or tissues and enables the characterization of inverse relationships between cellular O-GlcNAc modification and phosphorylation on the same proteins.
  • The methods and compositions described herein can be used to enzymatically label antibodies in vitro with azido-containing sugars, alkyne-containing sugars or phosphine-containing sugars can be used to label antibodies. Once the in vitro labeled antibodies are obtained, the labeled antibodies may be directly labeled using either an azide reactive, alkyne reactive or phosphine reaction reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule, as described herein. In certain embodiments, as shown in FIG. 11, antibodies can be enzymatically labeled with UDPGalNAz using GalT via reaction of the terminal OGlcNAc molecules present on antibody carbohydrates. “Click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation can then be used to conjugate a dye or a hapten, such as biotin, (or other reporter molecules, solid supports or carrier molecules) to the attached azide moiety. In certain embodiments, if no OGlcNAc sugars are present on an antibody, then use of the Endo-H (endo-β-N-acetylglucosaminidase H) enzyme will be used to generate a truncated chain which terminates with one N-acetylglucosamine residue (FIG. 11B). FIG. 17 shows the enzymatic labeling of Goat antibody with UDP-GalNAz followed by conjugation with an alkyne-TAMRA dye using “click: chemistry. The selectivity and specificity of such conjugations is shown from the controls and general protein staining with a SYPRO® Ruby protein stain.
  • The invention also includes methods for enzymatically labeling proteins via attachment of an azido or alkyne modified phosphate to the protein. Kinases that phosphorylate serine, threonine, and also tyrosine residues are known in the art and can be used for the attachment of azido or alkyne groups to a protein. Included herein is a method for forming a phosphoprotein comprising a terminal alkyne modified phosphate that includes contacting a protein with a terminal alkyne modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the terminal alkyne modified phosphate to the protein to form a terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein. In some embodiments, the protein has at least one serine, threonine, or tyrosine residue. The invention also includes methods for forming a phosphoprotein conjugate, in which the phosphoprotein conjugate is attached to a reporter molecule, solid support, or carrier molecule, in which the method includes contacting a protein with a terminal alkyne modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the terminal alkyne modified phosphate to the protein to form a terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein; and contacting the terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises an azido moiety to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
  • Also included herein is a method for forming a phosphoprotein comprising a terminal azido modified phosphate that includes contacting a protein with an azido modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the azido modified phosphate to the protein to form an azido modified phosphoprotein. In some embodiments, the protein has at least one serine, threonine, or tyrosine residue. The invention also includes methods for forming a phosphoprotein conjugate, in which the phosphoprotein conjugate is attached to a reporter molecule, solid support, or carrier molecule, in which the method includes contacting a protein with an azido modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the azido modified phosphate to the protein to form an azido modified phosphoprotein; and contacting the azido modified phosphoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises a terminal alkyne moiety to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
  • The methods described herein can also be used to label proteins which have been modified with lipids by post-translational lipoylation including, but not limited to, palmitoylation and myristolation. In such post-translational modifications azide-containing lipids, alkyne-containing lipids or phosphine-containing lipids are used to transfer azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties to proteins, whereupon such moieties are used to label the modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule and/or solid substrate using the methods described herein. An example of such labeling of proteins is given in Example 32 and Example 33.
  • The methods described herein can be used to label proteins which have been modified with isoprenoid groups by post-translational isoprenylation including, but not limited to, farnesylation and geranylgeranylation. In such post-translational modifications azide-containing isoprenoids, alkyne-containing isoprenoids or phosphine-containing isoprenoids are used to transfer azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties to proteins, whereupon such moieties are used to label the modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule and/or solid substrate using the methods described herein. An example of such labeling of proteins is given in Example 31.
  • Chemical Modification of Biomolecules Containing Azide, Alkyne or Phosphine Moieties
  • Biomolecules that can be chemically modified using the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, proteins, peptides, amino acids, glycoproteins, nucleic acids, nucleotides, nucleosides, oligonucleotides, sugars, oligosaccharides, lipids, hormones, proteoglycans, carbohydrates, polypeptides, polynucleotides and polysaccharides. Such biomolecules can contain azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties that are incorporated into biomolecules using post-translational modifications via cellular biosynthetic pathways (metabolic labeling) or enzymatic labeling as described herein. Alternatively, azide moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties can be incorporated into biomolecules using chemical synthetic procedures as described herein. These azide moieties, alkyne moieties and phosphine moieties are non-native, non-perturbing bioorthogonol chemical moieties that possess unique chemical functionality that can be modified through highly selective reactions. Such reactions used in the methods described herein, wherein the chemical modification of biomolecules that contain azide moieties or alkyne moieties utilize Copper(I)-catalyzed Azide-Alkyne Cycloaddition, also referred to herein as “click” chemistry, the chemical modification of biomolecules that contain azide moieties or phosphine moieties utilize Staudinger ligation, and the chemical modification of biomolecules that contain activated-alkyne moieties or activated-alkyne reactive moieties.
  • In certain embodiments, the biomolecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can be labeled chemically, enzymatically (for example, by enzymatic in vitro incorporation into the biomolecule of a moiety that includes an azido group or terminal alkyne), or by supplying cells with alkyne or azido-containing molecular precursors (e.g., amino acids or sugars) that can be incorporated into biomolecules in vivo. Such methods are described herein.
  • “Click” Chemistry
  • Azides and terminal or internal alkynes can undergo a 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition (Huisgen cycloaddition) reaction to give a 1,2,3-triazole. However, this reaction requires long reaction times and elevated temperatures. Alternatively, azides and terminal alkynes can undergo Copper(I)-catalyzed Azide-Alkyne Cycloaddition (CuAAC) at room temperature. Such copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions, also known as “click” chemistry, is a variant of the Huisgen 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition wherein organic azides and terminal alkynes react to give 1,4-regioisomers of 1,2,3-triazoles. Examples of “click” chemistry reactions are described by Sharpless et al. (U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 20050222427, published Oct. 6, 2005, PCT/US03/17311; Lewis W G, et al., Angewandte Chemie-Int'l Ed. 41 (6): 1053; method reviewed in Kolb, H. C., et al., Angew. Chem. Inst. Ed. 2001, 40:2004-2021), which developed reagents that react with each other in high yield and with few side reactions in a heteroatom linkage (as opposed to carbon-carbon bonds) in order to create libraries of chemical compounds. As described herein, “click” chemistry is used in the methods for labeling biomolecules.
  • The copper used as a catalyst for the “click” chemistry reaction used in the methods described herein to conjugate a label to a biomolecule is in the Cu (I) reduction state. The sources of copper(I) used in such copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions can be any cuprous salt including, but not limited to, cuprous halides such as cuprous bromide or cuprous iodide. However, this regioselective cycloaddition can also be conducted in the presence of a metal catalyst and a reducing agent. In certain embodiments, copper can be provided in the Cu (II) reduction state (for example, as a salt, such as but not limited to Cu(NO3)2 Cu(OAc)2 or CuSO4), in the presence of a reducing agent wherein Cu(I) is formed in situ by the reduction of Cu(II). Such reducing agents include, but are not limited to, ascorbate, Tris(2-Carboxyethyl) Phosphine (TCEP), 2,4,6-trichlorophenol (TCP), NADH, NADPH, thiosulfate, metallic copper, quinone, hydroquinone, vitamin K1, glutathione, cysteine, 2-mercaptoethanol, dithiothreitol, Fe2+, Co2+, or an applied electric potential. In other embodiments, the reducing agents include metals selected from Al, Be, Co, Cr, Fe, Mg, Mn, Ni, Zn, Au, Ag, Hg, Cd, Zr, Ru, Fe, Co, Pt, Pd, Ni, Rh, and W.
  • The copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions for labeling biomolecules can be performed in water and a variety of solvents, including mixtures of water and a variety of (partially) miscible organic solvents including alcohols, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dimethyl formamide (DMF), tert-butanol (tBuOH) and acetone.
  • Without limitation to any particular mechanism, copper in the Cu (I) state is a preferred catalyst for the copper(I)-catalyzed azide-alkyne cycloadditions, or “click” chemistry reactions, used in the methods described herein. Certain metal ions are unstable in aqueous solvents, by way of example Cu(I), therefore stabilizing ligands/chelators can be used to improve the reaction. In certain embodiments at least one copper chelator is used in the methods described herein, wherein such chelators binds copper in the Cu (I) state. In certain embodiments at least one copper chelator is used in the methods described herein, wherein such chelators binds copper in the Cu (II) state. In certain embodiments, the copper (I) chelator is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator. Non-limiting examples of such phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelators include, but are not limited to, bathophenanthroline disulfonic acid (4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonic acid) and bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate). Other chelators used in such methods include, but are not limited to, N-(2-acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid (PDA), S-carboxymethyl-L-cysteine (SCMC), trientine, tetra-ethylenepolyamine (TEPA), N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(2-pyridylmethyl)ethylenediamine (TPEN), EDTA, neocuproine, N-(2-acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid (PDA), S-carboxymethyl-L-cysteine (SCMC), tris-(benzyl-triazolylmethyl)amine (TBTA), or a derivative thereof. Most metal chelators, a wide variety of which are known in the chemical, biochemical, and medical arts, are known to chelate several metals, and thus metal chelators in general can be tested for their function in 1,3 cycloaddition reactions catalyzed by copper. In certain embodiments, histidine is used as a chelator, while in other embodiments glutathione is used as a chelator and a reducing agent.
  • The concentration of the reducing agents used in the “click” chemistry reaction described herein can be in the micromolar to millimolar range. In certain embodiments the concentration of the reducing agent is from about 100 micromolar to about 100 millimolar. In other embodiments the concentration of the reducing agent is from about 10 micromolar to about 10 millimolar. In other embodiments the concentration of the reducing agent is from about 1 micromolar to about 1 millimolar.
  • In certain embodiments, the methods describe herein for labeling biomolecules using “click” chemistry, at least one copper chelator is added after copper(II) used in the reaction has been contacted with a reducing agent. In other embodiments, at least one copper chelator can be added immediately after contacting copper(II) with a reducing agent. In other embodiments, the copper chelator(s) is added between about five seconds and about twenty-four hours after copper(II) and a reducing agent have been combined in a reaction mixture. In other embodiments, at least one copper chelator can be added any time to a reaction mixture that includes copper(II) and a reducing agent, such as, by way of example only, immediately after contacting copper(II) and a reducing agent, or within about five minutes of contacting copper(II) and a reducing agent in the reaction mixture. In some embodiments, at least one copper chelator can be added between about five seconds and about one hour, between about one minute and about thirty minutes, between about five minutes and about one hour, between about thirty minutes and about two hours, between about one hour and about twenty-four hours, between about one hour and about five hours, between about two hours and about eight hours, after copper(II) and a reducing agent have been combined for use in a reaction mixture.
  • In other embodiments, one or more copper chelators can be added more than once to such “click” chemistry reactions. In embodiments in which more than one copper chelators is added to a reaction, two or more of the copper chelators can bind copper in the Cu (I) state or, one or more of the copper chelators can bind copper in the Cu (I) state and one or more additional chelators can bind copper in the Cu (II) state. In certain embodiments, one or more copper chelators can be added after the initial addition of a copper chelator to the “click” chemistry reaction. In certain embodiments, the one or more copper chelators added after the initial addition of a copper chelator to the reaction can be the same or different from a copper chelator added at an earlier time to the reaction.
  • The concentration of a copper chelator used in the “click” chemistry reaction described herein can be determined and optimized using methods well known in the art, including those disclosed herein using “click” chemistry to label biomolecules followed by detecting such labeled biomolecules to determine the efficiency of the labeling reaction and the integrity of the labeled biomolecule(s) (see FIG. 5). In certain embodiments, the chelator concentrations used in the methods described herein is in the micromolar to millimolar range, by way of example only, from 1 micromolar to 100 millimolar. In certain embodiments the chelator concentration is from about 10 micromolar to about 10 millimolar. In other embodiments the chelator concentration is from about 50 micromolar to about 10 millimolar. In other embodiments the chelator, can be provided in a solution that includes a water miscible solvent such as, alcohols, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), dimethyl formamide (DMF), tert-butanol (tBuOH) and acetone. In other embodiments the chelator, can be provided in a solution that includes a solvent such as, for example, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) or dimethylformamide (DMF).
  • In certain embodiments of the methods for labeling biomolecule utilizing “click” chemistry described herein, the biomolecule can possess an azide moiety, whereupon the label possesses an alkyne moiety, whereas in other embodiments the biomolecule can possess an alkyne moiety, and the label possesses an azide moiety.
  • Staudinger Ligation
  • The Staudinger reaction, which involves reaction between trivalent phosphorous compounds and organic azides (Staudinger et al. Helv. Chim. Acta 1919, 2, 635), has been used for a multitude of applications. (Gololobov et al. Tetrahedron 1980, 37, 437); (Gololobov et al. Tetrahedron 1992, 48, 1353). There are almost no restrictions on the nature of the two reactants. The Staudinger ligation is a modification of the Staudinger reaction in which an electrophilic trap (usually a methyl ester) is placed on a triaryl phosphine. In the Staudinger ligation, the aza-ylide intermediate rearranges, in aqueous media, to produce an amide linkage and the phosphine oxide, ligating the two molecules together, whereas in the Staudinger reaction the two products are not covalently linked after hydrolysis. Such ligations have been described in U.S. Patent Application No. 20060276658. In certain embodiments, the phosphine can have a neighboring acyl group such as an ester, thioester or N-acyl imidazole (i.e. a phosphinoester, phosphinothioester, phosphinoimidazole) to trap the aza-ylide intermediate and form a stable amide bond upon hydrolysis. In certain embodiments, the phosphine can be a di- or triarylphosphine to stabilize the phosphine. The phosphines used in the Staudinger liagation methods described herein to conjugate a label to a biomolecule include, but are not limited to, cyclic or acyclic, halogenated, bisphosphorus, or even polymeric. Similarly, the azides can be alkyl, aryl, acyl or phosphoryl. In certain embodiments, such ligations are carried out under oxygen-free anhydrous conditions. The proteins described herein can be modified using the modified sugars described herein, including but not limited to UDP-GalNAz, using a Staudinger reaction (see, for example, Saxon, E.; Luchansky, S. J.; Hang, H. C.; Yu, C.; Lee, S. C.; Bertozzi, C. R.; J. Am. Chem. Soc.; 2002; 124 (50); 14893-14902.).
  • In certain embodiments of the methods for labeling biomolecule utilizing Staudinger ligation described herein, the biomolecule can possess an azide moiety, whereupon the label possesses a phosphine moiety, whereas in other embodiments the biomolecule can possess a phosphine moiety, and the label possesses an azide moiety.
  • Activated-Alkyne Chemistry
  • Azides and alkynes can undergo catalyst free [3+2]cycloaddition by a using the reaction of activated alkynes with azides. Such catalyst free [3+2]cycloaddition can be used in methods described herein to conjugate a label to a biomolecule. Alkynes can be activated by ring strain such as, by way of example only, eight membered ring structures, appending electron-withdrawing groups to such alkyne rings, or alkynes can be activated by the addition of a Lewis acid such as, by way of example only, Au(I) or Au(III).
  • In certain embodiments of the methods for labeling biomolecule utilizing activated alkynes described herein, the biomolecule can possess an azide moiety, whereupon the label possesses an activated alkyne moiety, whereas in other embodiments the biomolecule can possess an activated alkyne moiety, and the label possesses an azide moiety.
  • Chemical Modification of Post Translationally Modified Biomolecules
  • After biomolecules, including but not limited to proteins, have been modified either metabolically or enzymatically with azido moieties, alkyne moieties or phosphine moieties, they can be reacted under appropriate conditions to form conjugates with reporter molecules, solid supports or carrier molecules. In certain embodiments, such proteins used for such conjugations may be present as a cell lysate, as isolated proteins, and/or as purified proteins, separated by gel electrophoresis or on a solid or semi-solid matrix. In certain embodiments, the biomolecules are glycoproteins that have been modified, either metabolically or enzymatically, with azide-containing sugars, alkyne-containing sugars or phosphine-containing sugars.
  • In the methods and compositions described herein the azide moiety, alkyne moiety or phosphine moiety is used as a reactive functional group on the modified biomolecule wherein an azide reactive moiety on a reporter molecule, a solid support or a carrier molecule, or an alkyne reactive moiety on a reporter molecule, a solid support or a carrier molecule, or a phosphine reactive moiety on a reporter molecule, a solid support or a carrier molecule is reacted with a modified biomolecule to form a covalent conjugate comprising the biomolecule and at least one reporter molecule, at least one solid support and/or at least one carrier molecule. In certain embodiments such biomolecules are proteins, while in other embodiments such proteins are glycoproteins.
  • In certain embodiments of the methods and compositions described herein, a glycoprotein containing an azide moiety can be selectively labeled with a reporter molecule, a solid support and/or a carrier molecule that contain azide reactive groups including, but not limited to, a terminal alkyne, an activated alkyne, or a phosphine. In other embodiments, a glycoprotein containing an alkyne moiety can be selectively labeled with a reporter molecule, a solid support and/or a carrier molecule that contain alkyne reactive groups including, but not limited to, an azide moiety. In other embodiments, a glycoprotein containing an activated alkyne moiety can be selectively labeled with a reporter molecule, a solid support and/or a carrier molecule that contain alkyne reactive groups including, but not limited to, an azide moiety.
  • In certain embodiments, two azide-reactive groups are use to label biomolecules: the first is an alkyne moiety used in a “click” chemistry reaction, and the second is a phosphine, such as a triarylphosphine, used in a Staudinger ligation. In one embodiment, “click” chemistry is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing an azide moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an alkyne moiety. In another embodiment, “click” chemistry is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing an alkyne moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support and/or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an azide moiety. In another embodiment, a Staudinger ligation is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing an azide moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support and/or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an triaryl phosphine moiety. In another embodiment, a Staudinger ligation is utilized to form a conjugate with a glycoprotein containing a triaryl phosphine moiety and a reporter molecule, solid support and/or carrier molecule, wherein the reporter molecule, solid support and carrier molecule contain an azide moiety. The methods described herein are not intended to be limited to these two azide-reactive groups, or chemical reactions, but it is envisioned that any chemical reaction utilizing an azide-reactive group attached to a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule can be used with the azide modified glycoproteins described herein.
  • Protein can be modified using nucleophilic substitution reactions with amines, carboxylates or sulfhydryl groups which are found more commonly on the surface of proteins. However, the methods described herein utilize cycloaddition reactions, rather than nucleophilic substitution reactions, for selective modifications of proteins. Thus proteins described herein can be modified, with the modified sugars described herein, including but not limited to UDP-GalNAz, with extremely high selectivity. Such reactions can be carried out at room temperature in aqueous conditions with excellent regioselectivity by the addition of catalytic amounts of Cu(I) salts to the reaction mixture. See, e.g., Tomoe, et al., (2002) Org. Chem. 67:3057-3064; and, Rostovtsev, et al., (2002) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 41:2596-2599. The resulting five-membered ring resulting from “click” chemistry cycloaddition is not generally reversible in reducing environments and is stable against hydrolysis for extended periods in aqueous environments. Thus, glycoproteins attached to a labeling agent, a detection agent, a reporter molecule, a solid support or a carrier molecule via such five-membered ring are stable in rescuing environments.
  • The reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein, can contain at least one alkyne moiety or at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with an azide moiety. The reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein, can contain at least one azide moiety capable of reacting with an alkyne moiety or a phosphine moiety. The reporter molecules, solid supports and carrier molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein, can contain at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with an azide moiety. In certain embodiments, the phosphine moieties of the reporter molecules solid supports and carrier molecules described herein are triaryl phosphine moieties.
  • In certain embodiments, the reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can include, but are not limited to labels, while the solid supports can include, but are not limited to, solid support resins, microtiter plates and microarray slides. The carrier molecules can include, but are not limited to, affinity tags, nucleotides, oligonucleotides and polymers.
  • Reporter Molecules
  • The reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions provided herein include any directly or indirectly detectable reporter molecule known by one skilled in the art that can be covalently attached to a modified biomolecule, including a protein such as a glycoprotein. Such modified glycoproteins can be azide modified glycoproteins, alkyne modified glycoproteins or phosphine modified glycoproteins. In certain embodiments, the reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions provided herein include any directly or indirectly detectable reporter molecule known by one skilled in the art that can be covalently attached to an azide modified glycoprotein, an alkyne modified glycoprotein or a phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • Reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein can contain, but are not limited to, a chromophore, a fluorophore, a fluorescent protein, a phosphorescent dye, a tandem dye, a particle, a hapten, an enzyme and a radioisotope. In certain embodiments, such reporter molecules include fluorophores, fluorescent proteins, haptens, and enzymes.
  • A fluorophore used in a reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein, can contain one or more aromatic or heteroaromatic rings, that are optionally substituted one or more times by a variety of substituents, including without limitation, halogen, nitro, cyano, alkyl, perfluoroalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, arylalkyl, acyl, aryl or heteroaryl ring system, benzo, or other substituents typically present on fluorophores known in the art.
  • A fluorophore used in a reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein, is any chemical moiety that exhibits an absorption maximum at wavelengths greater than 280 nm, and retains its spectral properties when covalently attached to a labeling reagent such as, by way of example only, an azide, and alkyne or a phosphine. Fluorophores used as in reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein include, without limitation; a pyrene (including any of the corresponding derivative compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,132,432), an anthracene, a naphthalene, an acridine, a stilbene, an indole or benzindole, an oxazole or benzoxazole, a thiazole or benzothiazole, a 4-amino-7-nitrobenz-2-oxa-1,3-diazole (NBD), a cyanine (including any corresponding compounds in U.S. Ser. Nos. 09/968,401 and 09/969,853), a carbocyanine (including any corresponding compounds in U.S. Ser. Nos. 09/557,275; 09/969,853 and 09/968,401; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,981,977; 5,268,486; 5,569,587; 5,569,766; 5,486,616; 5,627,027; 5,808,044; 5,877,310; 6,002,003; 6,004,536; 6,008,373; 6,043,025; 6,127,134; 6,130,094; 6,133,445; and publications WO 02/26891, WO 97/40104, WO 99/51702, WO 01/21624; EP 1 065 250 A1), a carbostyryl, a porphyrin, a salicylate, an anthranilate, an azulene, a perylene, a pyridine, a quinoline, a borapolyazaindacene (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,774,339; 5,187,288; 5,248,782; 5,274,113; and 5,433,896), a xanthene (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,162,931; 6,130,101; 6,229,055; 6,339,392; 5,451,343 and U.S. Ser. No. 09/922,333), an oxazine (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,714,763) or a benzoxazine, a carbazine (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,810,636), a phenalenone, a coumarin (including an corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,696,157; 5,459,276; 5,501,980 and 5,830,912), a benzofuran (including an corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,603,209 and 4,849,362) and benzphenalenone (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,812,409) and derivatives thereof. As used herein, oxazines include resorufins (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in 5,242,805), aminooxazinones, diaminooxazines, and their benzo-substituted analogs.
  • Xanthene type fluorophores used in reporter molecule in the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, a fluorescein, a rhodol (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,227,487 and 5,442,045), or a rhodamine (including any corresponding compounds in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,798,276; 5,846,737; U.S. Ser. No. 09/129,015). As used herein, fluorescein includes benzo- or dibenzofluoresceins, seminaphthofluoresceins, or naphthofluoresceins. Similarly, as used herein rhodol includes seminaphthorhodafluors (including any corresponding compounds disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,945,171). In certain embodiments, the fluorophore is a xanthene that is bound via a linkage that is a single covalent bond at the 9-position of the xanthene. In other embodiments, the xanthenes include derivatives of 3H-xanthen-6-ol-3-one attached at the 9-position, derivatives of 6-amino-3H-xanthen-3-one attached at the 9-position, or derivatives of 6-amino-3H-xanthen-3-imine attached at the 9-position.
  • In certain embodiments, the fluorophores used in reporter molecules in the methods and compositions described herein include xanthene (rhodol, rhodamine, fluorescein and derivatives thereof) coumarin, cyanine, pyrene, oxazine and borapolyazaindacene. In other embodiments, such fluorphores are sulfonated xanthenes, fluorinated xanthenes, sulfonated coumarins, fluorinated coumarins and sulfonated cyanines.
  • In other embodiments, the fluorophores used in reporter molecules in the methods and compositions described herein, wherein such fluorophores have been modified with azide moieties or alkyne moieties. When used in “click” chemistry reaction such fluorphores form triazole products which do not requires UV excitation and overcome any quenching effect due to conjugation of azido or alkyne groups to the fluorescent π-system.
  • The choice of the fluorophore attached to the labeling reagent will determine the absorption and fluorescence emission properties of the labeling reagent, modified glycoprotein and immuno-labeled complex. Physical properties of a fluorophore label that can be used for detection of modified glycoproteins and an immuno-labeled complex include, but are not limited to, spectral characteristics (absorption, emission and stokes shift), fluorescence intensity, lifetime, polarization and photo-bleaching rate, or combination thereof. All of these physical properties can be used to distinguish one fluorophore from another, and thereby allow for multiplexed analysis. In certain embodiments, the fluorophore has an absorption maximum at wavelengths greater than 480 nm. In other embodiments, the fluorophore absorbs at or near 488 nm to 514 nm (particularly suitable for excitation by the output of the argon-ion laser excitation source) or near 546 nm (particularly suitable for excitation by a mercury arc lamp).
  • Many of fluorophores can also function as chromophores and thus the described fluorophores are also chromophores used in reporter molecules in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • In addition to fluorophores, enzymes also find use as labels for the detection reagents/reporter molecules used in the methods and compositions described herein. Enzymes are desirable labels because amplification of the detectable signal can be obtained resulting in increased assay sensitivity. The enzyme itself does not produce a detectable response but functions to break down a substrate when it is contacted by an appropriate substrate such that the converted substrate produces a fluorescent, calorimetric or luminescent signal. Enzymes amplify the detectable signal because one enzyme on a labeling reagent can result in multiple substrates being converted to a detectable signal. This is advantageous where there is a low quantity of target present in the sample or a fluorophore does not exist that will give comparable or stronger signal than the enzyme. However, fluorophores are most preferred because they do not require additional assay steps and thus reduce the overall time required to complete an assay. The enzyme substrate is selected to yield the preferred measurable product, e.g. calorimetric, fluorescent or chemiluminescence. Such substrates are extensively used in the art, many of which are described in the MOLECULAR PROBES HANDBOOK, supra.
  • In certain embodiments, calorimetric or fluorogenic substrate and enzyme combination use oxidoreductases such as, by way of example only, horseradish peroxidase and a substrate such as, by way of example only, 3,3′-diaminobenzidine (DAB) or 3-amino-9-ethylcarbazole (AEC), which yield a distinguishing color (brown and red, respectively). Other calorimetric oxidoreductase substrates used with the enzymatic reporter molecules described herein include, but are not limited to: 2,2-azino-bis(3-ethylbenzothiazoline-6-sulfonic acid) (ABTS), o-phenylenediamine (OPD), 3,3′,5,5′-tetramethylbenzidine (TMB), o-dianisidine, 5-aminosalicylic acid, 4-chloro-1-naphthol. Fluorogenic substrates used with the enzymatic reporter molecules described herein include, but are not limited to, homovanillic acid or 4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenylacetic acid, reduced phenoxazines and reduced benzothiazines, including Amplex® Red reagent and its variants (U.S. Pat. No. 4,384,042), Amplex UltraRed and its variants in (WO 05042504) and reduced dihydroxanthenes, including dihydrofluoresceins (U.S. Pat. No. 6,162,931) and dihydrorhodamines including dihydrorhodamine 123. Peroxidase substrates can be used with the enzymatic reporter molecules described herein. Such peroxide substrates include, but are not limited to, tyramides (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,196,306; 5,583,001 and 5,731,158) which represent a unique class of peroxidase substrates in that they can be intrinsically detectable before action of the enzyme but are “fixed in place” by the action of a peroxidase in the process described as tyramide signal amplification (TSA). These substrates are extensively utilized to label targets in samples that are cells, tissues or arrays for their subsequent detection by microscopy, flow cytometry, optical scanning and fluorometry.
  • In other embodiments the colorimetric (and in some cases fluorogenic) substrates and enzymes combination used in reporter molecules described herein include a phosphatase enzyme such as, by way of example only, an acid phosphatase, an alkaline phosphatase or a recombinant version of such a phosphatase. A colorimetric substrate used in combination with such phosphatases include, but are not limited to, 5-bromo-6-chloro-3-indolyl phosphate (BCIP), 6-chloro-3-indolyl phosphate, 5-bromo-6-chloro-3-indolyl phosphate, p-nitrophenyl phosphate, or o-nitrophenyl phosphate or with a fluorogenic substrate such as 4-methylumbelliferyl phosphate, 6,8-difluoro-7-hydroxy-4-methylcoumarinyl phosphate (DiFMUP, U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,912), fluorescein diphosphate, 3-O-methylfluorescein phosphate, resorufin phosphate, 9H-(1,3-dichloro-9,9-dimethylacridin-2-one-7-yl) phosphate (DDAO phosphate), or ELF 97, ELF 39 or related phosphates (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,316,906 and 5,443,986).
  • Other enzymes used in reporter molecules described herein include glycosidases, including, but not limited to, beta-galactosidase, beta-glucuronidase and beta-glucosidase. The colorimetric substrates used with such enzymes include, but are not limited to, 5-bromo-4-chloro-3-indolyl beta-D-galactopyranoside (X-gal) and similar indolyl galactosides, glucosides, and glucuronides, o-nitrophenyl beta-D-galactopyranoside (ONPG) and p-nitrophenyl beta-D-galactopyranoside. Preferred fluorogenic substrates include resorufin beta-D-galactopyranoside, fluorescein digalactoside (FDG), fluorescein diglucuronide and their structural variants (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,208,148; 5,242,805; 5,362,628; 5,576,424 and 5,773,236), 4-methylumbelliferyl beta-D-galactopyranoside, carboxyumbelliferyl beta-D-galactopyranoside and fluorinated coumarin beta-D-galactopyranosides (U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,912).
  • Additional enzymes used in reporter molecules described herein include, but are not limited to, hydrolases such as cholinesterases and peptidases, oxidases such as glucose oxidase and cytochrome oxidases, and reductases for which suitable substrates are known.
  • Enzymes and their appropriate substrates that produce chemiluminescence can also be used in reporter molecules described herein. Such enzymes include, but are not limited to, natural and recombinant forms of luciferases and aequorins. In addition, the chemiluminescence-producing substrates for phosphatases, glycosidases and oxidases such as those containing stable dioxetanes, luminol, isoluminol and acridinium esters an also be used in reporter molecules described herein.
  • In addition to enzymes, haptens can be used in label/reporter molecules described herein. In certain embodiments, such haptens include hormones, naturally occurring and synthetic drugs, pollutants, allergens, affector molecules, growth factors, chemokines, cytokines, lymphokines, amino acids, peptides, chemical intermediates, nucleotides, biotin and the like. Biotin is useful because it can function in an enzyme system to further amplify the detectable signal, and it can function as a tag to be used in affinity chromatography for isolation purposes. For detection purposes, an enzyme conjugate that has affinity for biotin is used, such as, by way of example only, avidin-Horse Radish Peroxidase (HRP). Subsequently a peroxidase substrate as described herein can be added to produce a detectable signal.
  • Fluorescent proteins can also be used in label/reporter molecules described herein for use in the methods, compositions and labeling reagents described herein. Non-limiting examples of such fluorescent proteins include green fluorescent protein (GFP) and the phycobiliproteins and the derivatives thereof. The fluorescent proteins, especially phycobiliprotein, are particularly useful for creating tandem dye labeled labeling reagents. These tandem dyes comprise a fluorescent protein and a fluorophore for the purposes of obtaining a larger stokes shift wherein the emission spectra is farther shifted from the wavelength of the fluorescent protein's absorption spectra. This is particularly advantageous for detecting a low quantity of a target in a sample wherein the emitted fluorescent light is maximally optimized, in other words little to none of the emitted light is reabsorbed by the fluorescent protein. The fluorescent protein and fluorophore function as an energy transfer pair wherein the fluorescent protein emits at the wavelength that the fluorophore absorbs and the fluorophore then emits at a wavelength farther from the fluorescent proteins emission wavelength than could have been obtained with only the fluorescent protein. A particularly useful combination is the phycobiliproteins disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,520,110; 4,859,582; 5,055,556 and the sulforhodamine fluorophores disclosed in 5,798,276, or the sulfonated cyanine fluorophores disclosed in U.S. Ser. Nos. 09/968/401 and 09/969/853; or the sulfonated xanthene derivatives disclosed in 6,130,101 and those combinations disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,542,104. Alternatively, the fluorophore functions as the energy donor and the fluorescent protein is the energy acceptor.
  • Carrier Molecules Azide Reactive, Alkyne Reactive and Phosphine Reactive
  • In the methods and compositions described herein the modified biomolecules can be conjugated to a carrier molecule. In certain embodiments provided herein proteins, such as glycoproteins, are covalently conjugated to a carrier molecule. This includes, but is not limited to, any azide modified glycoprotein disclosed herein and any carrier molecule disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, the glycoproteins contain at least one alkyne moiety or at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a carrier molecule containing an azide moiety. In other embodiments, the glycoproteins contain at least one azide moiety capable of reacting with a carrier molecule containing an alkyne moiety or a phosphine moiety. In other embodiments, the glycoproteins contain at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a carrier molecule containing an azide moiety. In certain embodiments, the phosphine moieties of the glycoproteins and carrier molecules are triaryl phosphine moieties.
  • A variety of carrier molecules can be used in the methods and compositions described herein, including, but not limited to, antigens, steroids, vitamins, drugs, haptens, metabolites, toxins, environmental pollutants, amino acids, peptides, proteins, nucleic acids, nucleic acid polymers, carbohydrates, lipids, and polymers. In certain embodiments, the carrier molecule contain an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a polysaccharide, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid, a hapten, a psoralen, a drug, a hormone, a lipid, a lipid assembly, a synthetic polymer, a polymeric microparticle, a biological cell, a virus or combinations thereof.
  • In other embodiments, the carrier molecule is selected from a hapten, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid polymer, a protein, a peptide or a polysaccharide. In still other embodiments, the carrier molecule is an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a polysaccharide, a nucleoside, a nucleotide, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid, a hapten, a psoralen, a drug, a hormone, a lipid, a lipid assembly, a tyramine, a synthetic polymer, a polymeric microparticle, a biological cell, cellular components, an ion chelating moiety, an enzymatic substrate or a virus. In further embodiments, the carrier molecule is an antibody or fragment thereof, an antigen, an avidin or streptavidin, a biotin, a dextran, an IgG binding protein, a fluorescent protein, agarose, and a non-biological microparticle.
  • In certain embodiments wherein the carrier molecule is an enzymatic substrate, the enzymatic substrate is selected from an amino acid, a peptide, a sugar, an alcohol, alkanoic acid, 4-guanidinobenzoic acid, a nucleic acid, a lipid, sulfate, phosphate, —CH2OCO-alkyl and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, such enzyme substrates can be cleaved by enzymes selected from peptidases, phosphatases, glycosidases, dealkylases, esterases, guanidinobenzotases, sulfatases, lipases, peroxidases, histone deacetylases, exonucleases, reductases, endoglycoceramidases and endonucleases.
  • In other embodiments, the carrier molecule is an amino acid (including those that are protected or are substituted by phosphates, carbohydrates, or C1 to C22 carboxylic acids), or a polymer of amino acids such as a peptide or protein. In a related embodiment, the carrier molecule contains at least five amino acids, more preferably 5 to 36 amino acids. Such peptides include, but are not limited to, neuropeptides, cytokines, toxins, protease substrates, and protein kinase substrates. Other peptides may function as organelle localization peptides, that is, peptides that serve to target the conjugated compound for localization within a particular cellular substructure by cellular transport mechanisms, including, but not limited to, nuclear localization signal sequences. In certain embodiments, the protein carrier molecules include enzymes, antibodies, lectins, glycoproteins, histones, albumins, lipoproteins, avidin, streptavidin, protein A, protein G, phycobiliproteins and other fluorescent proteins, hormones, toxins and growth factors. In other embodiments, the protein carrier molecule is an antibody, an antibody fragment, avidin, streptavidin, a toxin, a lectin, or a growth factor. In further embodiments, the carrier molecules contain haptens including, but not limited to, biotin, digoxigenin and fluorophores.
  • The carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also contain a nucleic acid base, nucleoside, nucleotide or a nucleic acid polymer, optionally containing an additional linker or spacer for attachment of a fluorophore or other ligand, such as an alkynyl linkage (U.S. Pat. No. 5,047,519), an aminoallyl linkage (U.S. Pat. No. 4,711,955) or other linkage. In other embodiments, the nucleotide carrier molecule is a nucleoside or a deoxynucleoside or a dideoxynucleoside, while in other embodiments, the carrier molecule contains a peptide nucleic acid (PNA) sequence or a locked nucleic acid (LNA) sequence. In certain embodiments, the nucleic acid polymer carrier molecules are single- or multi-stranded, natural or synthetic DNA or RNA oligonucleotides, or DNA/RNA hybrids, or incorporating an unusual linker such as morpholine derivatized phosphates (AntiVirals, Inc., Corvallis Oreg.), or peptide nucleic acids such as N-(2-aminoethyl)glycine units, where the nucleic acid contains fewer than 50 nucleotides, more typically fewer than 25 nucleotides.
  • The carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also contain a carbohydrate or polyol, including a polysaccharide, such as dextran, FICOLL, heparin, glycogen, amylopectin, mannan, inulin, starch, agarose and cellulose, or a polymer such as a poly(ethylene glycol). In certain embodiments, the polysaccharide carrier molecule includes dextran, agarose or FICOLL.
  • The carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also include a lipid including, but not limited to, glycolipids, phospholipids, and sphingolipids. In certain embodiments, such lipids contain 6-25 carbons. In other embodiments, the carrier molecules include a lipid vesicle, such as a liposome, or is a lipoprotein (see below). Some lipophilic substituents are useful for facilitating transport of the conjugated dye into cells or cellular organelles. In certain embodiments, the carrier molecule that possess a lipophilic substituent can be used to target lipid assemblies such as biological membranes or liposomes by non-covalent incorporation of the dye compound within the membrane, e.g., for use as probes for membrane structure or for incorporation in liposomes, lipoproteins, films, plastics, lipophilic microspheres or similar materials.
  • The carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also be a cell, cellular systems, cellular fragment, or subcellular particles, including virus particles, bacterial particles, virus components, biological cells (such as animal cells, plant cells, bacteria, or yeast), or cellular components. Non-limiting examples of such cellular components that are useful as carrier molecules in the methods and composition described herein include lysosomes, endosomes, cytoplasm, nuclei, histones, mitochondria, Golgi apparatus, endoplasmic reticulum and vacuoles.
  • The carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also non-covalently associates with organic or inorganic materials.
  • The carrier molecules used in the methods and composition described herein can also include a specific binding pair member wherein the glycoproteins described herein can be conjugated to a specific binding pair member and used in the formation of a bound pair. In certain embodiments, the presence of a labeled specific binding pair member indicates the location of the complementary member of that specific binding pair; each specific binding pair member having an area on the surface or in a cavity which specifically binds to, and is complementary with, a particular spatial and polar organization of the other. In certain embodiments, the dye compounds (fluorophores or chromophores) described herein function as a reporter molecule for the specific binding pair. Exemplary binding pairs are set forth in Table 2.
    TABLE 2
    Representative Specific Binding Pairs
    antigen antibody
    biotin avidin (or streptavidin or anti-biotin)
    IgG* protein A or protein G
    drug drug receptor
    folate folate binding protein
    toxin toxin receptor
    carbohydrate lectin or carbohydrate receptor
    peptide peptide receptor
    protein protein receptor
    enzyme substrate enzyme
    DNA (RNA) cDNA (cRNA)†
    hormone hormone receptor
    ion chelator

    *IgG is an immunoglobulin

    cDNA and cRNA are the complementary strands used for hybridization
  • In a particular aspect the carrier molecule, used in the methods and compositions described herein, is an antibody fragment, such as, but not limited to, anti-Fc, an anti-Fc isotype, anti-J chain, anti-kappa light chain, anti-lambda light chain, or a single-chain fragment variable protein; or a non-antibody peptide or protein, such as, for example but not limited to, soluble Fc receptor, protein G, protein A, protein L, lectins, or a fragment thereof. In one aspect the carrier molecule is a Fab fragment specific to the Fc portion of the target-binding antibody or to an isotype of the Fc portion of the target-binding antibody (U.S. Ser. No. 10/118,204). The monovalent Fab fragments are typically produced from either murine monoclonal antibodies or polyclonal antibodies generated in a variety of animals, for example but not limited to, rabbit or goat. These fragments can be generated from any isotype such as murine IgM, IgG1, IgG2a, IgG2b or IgG3.
  • In alternative embodiments, a non-antibody protein or peptide such as protein G, or other suitable proteins, can be used alone or coupled with albumin. Preferred albumins include human and bovine serum albumins or ovalbumin. Protein A, G and L are defined to include those proteins known to one skilled in the art or derivatives thereof that comprise at least one binding domain for IgG, i.e. proteins that have affinity for IgG. These proteins can be modified but do not need to be and are conjugated to a reactive moiety in the same manner as the other carrier molecules described.
  • In another aspect, the carrier molecules, used in the methods and compositions described herein, can be whole intact antibodies. Antibody is a term of the art denoting the soluble substance or molecule secreted or produced by an animal in response to an antigen, and which has the particular property of combining specifically with the antigen that induced its formation. Antibodies themselves also serve are antigens or immunogens because they are glycoproteins and therefore are used to generate anti-species antibodies. Antibodies, also known as immunoglobulins, are classified into five distinct classes—IgG, IgA, IgM, IgD, and IgE. The basic IgG immunoglobulin structure consists of two identical light polypeptide chains and two identical heavy polypeptide chains (linked together by disulfide bonds).
  • When IgG is treated with the enzyme papain a monovalent antigen-binding fragment can be isolated, referred herein to as a Fab fragment. When IgG is treated with pepsin (another proteolytic enzyme), a larger fragment is produced, F(ab′)2. This fragment can be split in half by treating with a mild reducing buffer that results in the monovalent Fab′ fragment. The Fab′ fragment is slightly larger than the Fab and contains one or more free sulfhydryls from the hinge region (which are not found in the smaller Fab fragment). The term “antibody fragment” is used herein to define the Fab′, F(ab′)2 and Fab portions of the antibody. It is well known in the art to treat antibody molecules with pepsin and papain in order to produce antibody fragments (Gorevic et al., Methods of Enzyol., 116:3 (1985)).
  • The monovalent Fab fragments used as carrier molecules in the methods and compositions described herein are produced from either murine monoclonal antibodies or polyclonal antibodies generated in a variety of animals that have been immunized with a foreign antibody or fragment thereof (U.S. Pat. No. 4,196,265 discloses a method of producing monoclonal antibodies). Typically, secondary antibodies are derived from a polyclonal antibody that has been produced in a rabbit or goat but any animal known to one skilled in the art to produce polyclonal antibodies can be used to generate anti-species antibodies. The term “primary antibody” describes an antibody that binds directly to the antigen as opposed to a “secondary antibody” that binds to a region of the primary antibody. Monoclonal antibodies are equal, and in some cases, preferred over polyclonal antibodies provided that the ligand-binding antibody is compatible with the monoclonal antibodies that are typically produced from murine hybridoma cell lines using methods well known to one skilled in the art.
  • In one aspect the antibodies used as carrier molecules in the methods and compositions described herein are generated against only the Fc region of a foreign antibody. Essentially, the animal is immunized with only the Fc region fragment of a foreign antibody, such as murine. The polyclonal antibodies are collected from subsequent bleeds, digested with an enzyme, pepsin or papain, to produce monovalent fragments. The fragments are then affinity purified on a column comprising whole immunoglobulin protein that the animal was immunized against or just the Fc fragments.
  • Solid Supports Azide Reactive, Alkyne Reactive or Phosphine Reactive
  • In an aspect of the methods and composition described herein, the modified biomolecules can be covalently conjugated to a solid support. In certain embodiments provided herein proteins, such as glycoproteins, are covalently conjugated to a solid support. This includes, but is not limited to, any azide modified glycoprotein disclosed herein and any solid support disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, the glycoproteins contain at least one alkyne moiety or at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a solid support containing an azide moiety. In other embodiments, the glycoproteins contain at least one azide moiety capable of reacting with a solid support containing an alkyne moiety or a phosphine moiety. In other embodiments, the glycoproteins contain at least one phosphine moiety capable of reacting with a solid support containing an azide moiety. In certain embodiments, the phosphine moieties of the glycoproteins and solid supports are triaryl phosphine moieties.
  • A variety of solid supports can be used in the methods and compositions described herein. Such solid supports are not limited to a specific type of support, and therefore a large number of supports are available and are known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Such solid supports include, but are not limited to, solid and semi-solid matrixes, such as aerogels and hydrogels, resins, beads, biochips (including thin film coated biochips), microfluidic chip, a silicon chip, multi-well plates (also referred to as microtitre plates or microplates), membranes, conducting and nonconducting metals, glass (including microscope slides) and magnetic supports. Other non-limiting examples of solid supports used in the methods and compositions described herein include silica gels, polymeric membranes, particles, derivatized plastic films, derivatized glass, derivatized silica, glass beads, cotton, plastic beads, alumina gels, polysaccharides such as Sepharose, poly(acrylate), polystyrene, poly(acrylamide), polyol, agarose, agar, cellulose, dextran, starch, FICOLL, heparin, glycogen, amylopectin, mannan, inulin, nitrocellulose, diazocellulose, polyvinylchloride, polypropylene, polyethylene (including poly(ethylene glycol)), nylon, latex bead, magnetic bead, paramagnetic bead, superparamagnetic bead, starch and the like. In certain embodiments, the solid supports used in the methods and compositions described herein are substantially insoluble in liquid phases.
  • In certain embodiments, the solid support may include a solid support reactive functional group, including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the azide-containing glycoproteins described herein. In other embodiments, the solid support may include a solid support reactive functional group, including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the alkyne-containing glycoproteins described herein. In still other embodiments, the solid support may include a solid support reactive functional group, including, but not limited to, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide, sulfoxide, wherein such functional groups are used to covalently attach the phosphine-containing glycoproteins described herein. In other embodiments, the solid supports include azide, alkyne or phosphine functional groups to covalently attach such modified glycoproteins.
  • A suitable solid phase support used in the methods and compositions described herein, can be selected on the basis of desired end use and suitability for various synthetic protocols. By way of example only, where amide bond formation is desirable to attach the modified glycoproteins described herein to the solid support, resins generally useful in peptide synthesis may be employed, such as polystyrene (e.g., PAM-resin obtained from Bachem Inc., Peninsula Laboratories, etc.), POLYHIPE™ resin (obtained from Aminotech, Canada), polyamide resin (obtained from Peninsula Laboratories), polystyrene resin grafted with polyethylene glycol (TentaGel™, Rapp Polymere, Tubingen, Germany), polydimethyl-acrylamide resin (available from Milligen/Biosearch, California), or PEGA beads (obtained from Polymer Laboratories). In certain embodiments, the modified glycoproteins described herein are deposited onto a solid support in an array format. In certain embodiments, such deposition is accomplished by direct surface contact between the support surface and a delivery mechanism, such as a pin or a capillary, or by ink jet technologies which utilize piezoelectric and other forms of propulsion to transfer liquids from miniature nozzles to solid surfaces. In the case of contact printing, robotic control systems and multiplexed printheads allow automated microarray fabrication. For contactless deposition by piezoelectric propulsion technologies, robotic systems also allow for automatic microarray fabrication using either continuous and drop-on-demand devices.
  • Compositions
  • In one aspect, the modified biomolecules, reporter molecules and carrier molecules provided herein can be used to form a first composition that includes a modified biomolecule, a first reporter molecule, and a carrier molecule. In another embodiment, a second biomolecule that includes a first composition in combination with a second conjugate, wherein the second conjugate comprises a carrier molecule or solid support that is covalently bonded to a second reporter molecule. The first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra. In other embodiments, the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap. In other embodiments, the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser. In such compositions, the carrier molecule (or solid support) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule. The discussion herein pertaining to the identity of various carrier molecules is generally applicable to this embodiment as well as other embodiments.
  • In certain embodiments, modified proteins, such as glycoproteins, reporter molecules and carrier molecules provided herein can be used to form a first composition that includes a modified glycoprotein, a first reporter molecule, and a carrier molecule. In another embodiment, a second glycoprotein that includes a first composition in combination with a second conjugate, wherein the second conjugate comprises a carrier molecule or solid support that is covalently bonded to a second reporter molecule. The first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra. In other embodiments, the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap. In other embodiments, the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser. In such compositions, the carrier molecule (or solid support) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule. The discussion herein pertaining to the identity of various carrier molecules is generally applicable to this embodiment as well as other embodiments.
  • In another aspect, the modified biomolecules, reporter molecules and solid supports provided herein can be used to form a first composition that comprises a modified biomolecule, a first reporter molecule, and a solid support. In another embodiment, a second composition that includes a first composition in combination with a second conjugate. The second conjugate comprises a solid support or carrier molecule (described herein) that is covalently bonded to a second reporter molecule. The first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra. In other embodiments, the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap. In other embodiments, the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser. In such composition, the solid support (or carrier molecule) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule. The discussion herein pertaining to the identity of various solid supports is generally applicable to this embodiment of the invention as well as other embodiments.
  • In another aspect, the modified proteins, such as glycoproteins, reporter molecules and solid supports provided herein can be used to form a first composition that comprises a modified glycoprotein, a first reporter molecule, and a solid support. In another embodiment, a second composition that includes a first composition in combination with a second conjugate. The second conjugate comprises a solid support or carrier molecule (described herein) that is covalently bonded to a second reporter molecule. The first and second reporter molecules have different structures and preferably have different emission spectra. In other embodiments, the first and second reporter molecules are selected so that their fluorescence emissions essentially do not overlap. In other embodiments, the reporter molecules have different excitation spectra, while in other embodiments the reporter molecules have similar excitation wavelengths and are excited by the same laser. In such composition, the solid support (or carrier molecule) of the conjugates in the second composition may be the same or a different molecule. The discussion herein pertaining to the identity of various solid supports is generally applicable to this embodiment of the invention as well as other embodiments.
  • Methods for Labeling Modified Biomolecules in Solution
  • Methods for forming modified biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugates are described herein. In certain embodiments the biomolecules are glycoproteins that have been azido modified metabolically, enzymatically or chemically using the methods described herein. In one aspect the modified biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugates are formed in solution and then separated using methods known in the art. In certain embodiments, the biomolecule labeled with the reporter molecule is a modified glycoprotein. In other embodiments, the biomolecule labeled with the reporter molecule is an azido modified glycoprotein, alkyne modified glycoprotein, or phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • Described herein are novel methods for forming conjugates in solution with azido modified biomolecules and a reporter molecule comprising a terminal alkyne under “click” chemistry conditions. In other embodiments, “click” chemistry is used to form conjugates with alkyne modified biomolecules and a reporter molecule comprising an azide. In other embodiments, Staudinger ligation is used to form conjugates with azide modified biomolecules and a reporter molecule comprising a phosphine, while other embodiments use Staudinger ligation to form conjugates with phosphine modified biomolecules and a reporter molecule comprising an azide. Still other embodiments use activated alkyne modified biomolecules to form conjugates with reporter molecules comprising azides, or azide modified biomolecules forming conjugates with activated alkyne containing reporter molecules.
  • It was unexpectedly found that by adding a copper chelator to the “click” chemistry conjugation reaction the labeling efficiency and resolution after gel electrophoresis improved as compared to those reactions without the addition of a copper chelator. In certain embodiments, the methods of labeling biomolecules using “click” chemistry, involve a biomolecule that includes an azido group and a label that includes a terminal alkyne that are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper (I) chelator, thereby producing a labeled biomolecule. In certain embodiments, the biomolecules labeled in such methods can be polysaccharides, nucleic acids, proteins, or peptides. In certain embodiments, the biomolecules used in the labeling methods described herein are glycoproteins
  • In certain embodiments, the biomolecules used in the labeling methods described herein are proteins, such as but not limited to glycoproteins. The labeling methods used to label proteins, including glycoproteins, include “click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation. In certain embodiments, the labeling of glycoproteins occurs by “click” chemistry in which a glycoprotein that includes an azido group and a label that comprises a terminal alkyne react in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein. In certain embodiments, the labeling of glycoproteins occurs by “click” chemistry in which a glycoprotein that includes an alkyne group and a label that comprises an azide react in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein.
  • In other aspects provided herein, the methods of labeling biomolecules using “click” chemistry, wherein a biomolecule that includes an azido group and a label that comprises a terminal alkyne are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper (I) chelator to produce a labeled biomolecule, results in the preservation of the structural integrity of the labeled biomolecule. In other embodiments, the biomolecules labeled in such cycloaddition reactions can be polysaccharides, nucleic acids, proteins, or peptides. In certain embodiments, the biomolecules used in such methods are proteins, such as but not limited to glycoproteins. In such methods a glycoprotein that includes an azido group and a label that comprises a terminal alkyne are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper (I) chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein, and results in the preservation of the structural integrity of the labeled glycoprotein, wherein the structural integrity of the glycoprotein after labeling is not reduced. As described herein, the glycoproteins can be derivatized, for example, by in vivo incorporation of azido sugars or by in vitro enzymatic addition of azido sugars. In other embodiments, methods of labeling glycoproteins wherein the structural integrity of the glycoprotein after labeling is not reduced includes “click” chemistry in which a glycoprotein that includes a terminal alkyne and a label that comprises an azido group are reacted in a mixture that includes copper (II), a reducing agent, and at least one copper chelator to produce a labeled glycoprotein.
  • The methods for labeling biomolecules that comprise an azido group using “click” chemistry described herein can also be used for biomolecules that comprise a terminal alkyne, wherein the label to be reacted with the biomolecule comprises an azido group. The methods for labeling and detecting biomolecules that comprise an azido group using “click” chemistry described herein can also be used for biomolecules that comprise a terminal alkyne, wherein the label to be reacted with the biomolecule comprises an azido group. In one embodiment, is a method using the “click” chemistry reaction described herein to form biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugates in which the reaction mixture includes a reporter molecule with an azide moiety, an alkyne modified biomolecule, copper (II) ions, at least one reducing agent and a copper chelator. In certain embodiments, such alkyne modified biomolecule are alkyne modified glycoproteins and such reporter molecule with an azide moiety are any reporter molecule described herein. In other embodiments, such alkyne modified biomolecule are alkyne modified glycoproteins and such reporter molecule with an azide moiety are any fluorophore based reporter molecule described herein.
  • Other methods provided herein, are methods for labeling and detecting separated proteins, including but not limited to glycoproteins, using the “click” chemistry cycloaddition reaction described herein. The method includes: combining in a reaction mixture a biomolecule that comprises an azido group, a label that includes a terminal alkyne group, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper chelator; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule, separating the biomolecule using one or more biochemical or biophysical separation techniques, and detecting the biomolecule. In other embodiments, the method includes: combining in a reaction mixture a biomolecule that comprises an alkyne group, a label that includes an azide group, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper chelator; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule, separating the biomolecule using one or more biochemical or biophysical separation techniques, and detecting the biomolecule.
  • In another embodiment is a method for detecting modified biomolecules, wherein the method includes the steps of:
      • a) forming an azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture that includes a reporter molecule having a terminal alkyne moiety, an azido modified biomoelcule, copper(II) ions, at least one reducing agent and a copper chelator;
      • b) incubating the azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture for a sufficient amount of time to form a biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • c) separating the biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate by size and/or weight of the biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate to form a separated biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • d) illuminating the separated biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate, and
      • e) observing the illuminated biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate wherein the biomolecules is detected.
  • In another embodiment is a method for detecting modified glycoproteins, wherein the method includes the steps of:
      • a) forming an azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture that includes a reporter molecule having a terminal alkyne moiety, an azido modified glycoprotein, copper(II) ions, at least one reducing agent and a copper chelator;
      • b) incubating the azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture for a sufficient amount of time to form a glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • c) separating the glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate by size and/or weight of the glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate to form a separated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • d) illuminating the separated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate, and
      • e) observing the illuminated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate wherein the glycoprotein is detected.
  • In another embodiment is a method for detecting modified biomolecules, wherein the method includes the steps of:
      • a) forming an azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture that includes a reporter molecule having an azide moiety, an alkyne modified biomoelcule, copper(II) ions, at least one reducing agent and a copper chelator;
      • b) incubating the azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture for a sufficient amount of time to form a biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • c) separating the biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate by size and/or weight of the biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate to form a separated biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • d) illuminating the separated biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate, and
      • e) observing the illuminated biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate wherein the biomolecule is detected.
  • In another embodiment is a method for detecting modified glycoproteins, wherein the method includes the steps of:
      • a) forming an azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture that includes a reporter molecule having an azide moiety, an alkyne modified glycoprotein, copper(II) ions, at least one reducing agent and a copper chelator;
      • b) incubating the azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture for a sufficient amount of time to form a glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • c) separating the glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate by size and/or weight of the glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate to form a separated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate;
      • d) illuminating the separated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate, and
      • e) observing the illuminated glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate wherein the glycoprotein is detected.
  • In addition such “click” chemistry reaction mixtures can include, without limitation, one or more buffers, polymers, salts, detergents, or solubilizing agents. The reaction can be performed under anaerobic conditions, such as under nitrogen or argon gas, and can be performed for any feasible length of time, such as, for example, from ten minutes to six hours, from about twenty minutes to about three hours, or from about thirty minutes to about two hours. The reaction can be performed at a wide range of temperatures, for example ranging from about 4 degrees Celsius to about 50 degrees Celsius, and is preferably performed at temperatures between about 10 degrees and about 40 degrees, and typically between about 15 degrees and about 30 degrees.
  • Separation and Detection
  • Another aspect provided herein are methods directed toward detecting modified biomolecules after the modified biomolecules have been labeled, using “click” chemistry reactions, Saudinger ligation or activated alkyne reactions, and separated using, for example, chromatographic methods or electrophoresis methods such as, but not limited to, gel electrophoresis. The modified biomolecules that can be labeled, separated and detected using the methods described herein include, but are not limited to, polysaccharides, nucleic acids, proteins, or peptides and glycoproteins. In certain embodiments such biomolecules have been modified using the methods described herein. The separation methods used to separate such modified biomolecules includes, but are not limited to, thin layer or column chromatography (including, for example, size exclusion, ion exchange, or affinity chromatography) or isoelectric focusing, gel electrophoresis, capillary electrophoresis, capillary gel electrophoresis, and slab gel electrophoresis. Gel electrophoresis can be denaturing or nondenaturing gel electrophoresis, and can include denaturing gel electrophoresis followed by nondenaturing gel electrophoresis (e.g., “2D” gels). In certain embodiments, the modified biomolecules are used to form conjugates with a reporter molecule, a carrier molecule and/or a solid support prior to separation using the methods described herein. In other embodiments, the modified biomolecules are used to form conjugates with a reporter molecule, a carrier molecule and/or a solid support after separation using the methods described herein.
  • In other embodiments, the separation methods used in such separation and detection methods can be any separation methods used for biomolecules, such as, for example, chromatography, capture to solid supports, and electrophoresis. In certain embodiments, gel electrophoresis is used to separate biomolecules, such as but not limited to proteins. Gel electrophoresis is well known in the art, and in the context of the present invention can be denaturing or nondenaturing gel electrophoresis and can be 1D or 2D gel electrophoresis. FIG. 3 shows detection, via 2-D gel electrophoresis, of proteins modified with Ac4GlcNAz and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe using click chemistry.
  • In certain embodiments of such separation and detection methods, gel electrophoresis is used to separate proteins, including glycoproteins, and the separated proteins are detected in the gel by the attached labels. By way of example only, glycoproteins that have incorporated azido sugars can be labeled in a solution reaction with a terminal alkyne-containing fluorophore, and the proteins can be optionally further purified from the reaction mixture and electrophoresed on a 1D or 2D gel. The proteins can be visualized in the gel using light of the appropriate wavelength to stimulate the fluorophore label.
  • Gel electrophoresis can use any feasible buffer system described herein including, but not limited to, Tris-acetate, Tris-borate, Tris-glycine, BisTris and Bistris-Tricine. In certain embodiments, the electrophoresis gel used in the methods described herein comprise acrylamide, including by way for example only, acrylamide at a concentration from about 2.5% to about 30%, or from about 5% to about 20%. In certain embodiments, such polyacrylamide electrophoresis gel comprise 1% to 10% crosslinker, including but not limited to, bisacrylamide. In certain embodiments, the electrophoresis gel used in the methods described herein comprises agarose, including by way for example only, agarose at concentration from about 0.1% to about 5%, or from about 0.5% to about 4%, or from about 1% to about 3%. In certain embodiments, the electrophoresis gel used in the methods described herein comprises acrylamide and agarose, including by way for example only, electrophoresis gels comprising from about 2.5% to about 30% acrylamide and from about 0.1% to about 5% agarose, or from about 5% to about 20% acrylamide and from about 0.2% to about 2.5% agarose. In certain embodiments, such polyacrylamide/agarose electrophoresis gel comprise 1% to 10% crosslinker, including but not limited to, bisacrylamide. In certain embodiments, the gels used to separate biomolecules can be gradient gels.
  • The methods described herein can be used to detect modified biomolecules for “in-gel” detection using slab gel electrophoresis or capillary gel electrophoresis. In certain embodiments such modified biomolecules are glycoproteins. In one aspect, the method includes combining an azido modified biomolecule, a label that includes a terminal alkyne, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper (I) chelator in a reaction mixture; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule; separating the biomolecule using one or more biochemical separation techniques; and detecting the biomolecule. The label used in such methods can be any label described herein. The copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein. In certain embodiments, the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator. In other embodiments, the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate. In other embodiments, the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II).
  • Without limitation to any specific mechanism, it is known that copper can promote the cleavage of biomolecules such as proteins and nucleic acids. The addition of a copper chelator in such methods reduces the detrimental effects of copper used in the “click” chemistry reactions, and thereby preserves the structural integrity of the biomolecules. Thus, the methods described herein preserve the structural integrity of labeled and detected biomolecules, and thereby provide improved methods of separating and detecting biomolecules labeled using “click” chemistry. In addition, the methods of detecting separated biomolecules using click chemistry, in which the structural integrity of the separated molecules is preserved, improves the detection of such biomolecules.
  • In another embodiment of “in-gel” detection, the method includes combining an alkyne modified biomolecule that comprises a terminal alkyne, a label that includes an azido group, copper (II), a reducing agent, and a copper (I) chelator in a reaction mixture; incubating the reaction mixture under conditions that promote chemical conjugation of the label to the biomolecule; separating the labeled biomolecule using one or more biochemical separation techniques; and detecting the biomolecule. In these methods, the structural integrity of labeled and detected biomolecules is preserved. The label used in such methods can be any label described herein. The copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein. In certain embodiments, the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator. In other embodiments, the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate. In other embodiments, the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II).
  • In-gel fluorescence detection allows for quantitative differential analysis of protein glycosylation between different biological samples and is amenable to multiplexing with other protein gel stains. In certain embodiments of the methods described herein, utilizing fluorescent- and/or UV-excitable alkyne containing probes, or fluorescent- and/or UV-excitable azide containing probes, allow for the multiplexed detection of glycoproteins, phosphoproteins, and total proteins in the same 1-D or 2-D gels. FIG. 4 shows “in gel” detection of 40 and 50 kD azide-labeled model proteins, which were first labeled with a fluorescent alkyne tag and then separated on the gel.
  • In certain embodiments, the labels used in such separation and detection methods are any fluorophores described herein which has been derivatized to contain an alkyne, an azide or a phosphine. In certain embodiments, such fluorphores include, but are not limited to, fluorescein, rhodamine, TAMRA, an Alexa dye, a SYPRO dye, or a BODIPY dye.
  • The method described herein can be used for multiplexed detection of biomolecules, such as proteins by labeling the proteins with labels of different specificities. For example, a total proteins stain, such as SYPRO Ruby can be used to stain a gel that includes proteins labeled using a fluorophore with distinct spectral emission using the methods of the present invention. Proteins having other characteristics, such as oxidized proteins or phosphorylated proteins, can be detected in the same gel by use of phosphoprotein specific labels used to stain the gel. FIG. 9 shows multiplexed Western blot detection of O-GlcNAc and Cofilin.
  • In another aspect, proteins, such as glycoproteins) can be labeled with an azido tag, electrophoresed on gels, and the resulting gels can be incubated with an alkyne tag, such as a fluorescent alkyne tag in the presence of copper (I). Copper (I) can be added in its natural form (e.g. CuBr) or can be produced in situ from copper (II) compounds with the addition of a reducing agent. The reducing agent used in such methods can be any reducing agent described herein, including but not limited to, ascorbate or TCEP. Addition of a chelator that stabilizes copper (I) can enhance the chemical ligation. The fluorescent label used in such methods can be any fluorophore described herein. The copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein. In certain embodiments, the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator. In other embodiments, the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate. In other embodiments, the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II). After the ligation step, the gel is washed and the tagged proteins are visualized using standard fluorescence scanning devices.
  • In other embodiments, proteins, such as glycoproteins, can be labeled with an alkyne tag, electrophoresed on gels, and the resulting gels can be incubated with an azide tag, such as a fluorescent azide tag in the presence of copper (I). Copper (I) can be added in its natural form (e.g. CuBr) or can be produced in situ from copper (II) compounds with the addition of a reducing agent. The reducing agent used in such methods can be any reducing agent described herein, including but not limited to, ascorbate or TCEP. Addition of a chelator that stabilizes copper (I) can enhance the chemical ligation. The fluorescent label used in such methods can be any fluorophore described herein. The copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be any chelator described herein. In certain embodiments, the copper (I) chelator use in such methods is a 1,10 phenanthroline-containing copper (I) chelator. In other embodiments, the copper(I) chelator is bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS; 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate. In other embodiments, the copper (I) chelator used in such methods can be used to chelate copper(II). After the ligation step, the gel is washed and the tagged proteins are visualized using standard fluorescence scanning devices.
  • In further embodiments, proteins, such as glycoproteins, can be labeled with an azide tag, electrophoresed on gels, and the resulting gels can be incubated with a phosphine tag, such as a fluorescent phosphine containing tag, using Staudinger ligation. After the ligation step, the gel is washed and the tagged proteins are visualized using standard fluorescence scanning devices. In such methods the use of copper, which contributes to the degradation of biomolecules such as proteins, can be avoided.
  • In another aspect, detection of proteins labeled using the methods described herein can be by Western blot, in which biomolecules derivatized to include an azido group are labeled with a detectable label prior to gel electrophoresis and transferred to a blotting membrane. Azido-containing biomolecules can be labeled, for example, with alkyl-biotin, and after electrophoretic separation and transfer to a blotting membrane, can be detected using streptavidin linked to an enzyme that converts a chromogenic substrate. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that any feasible label that is directly detectable or indirectly detectable and can be derivatized to include a terminal alkyne or an azido group can be attached to a biomolecule that includes an azido group or a terminal alkyne and used to detect separated biomolecules, including separated biomolecules transferred to a membrane.
  • In other embodiments Western blotting analyses reveal glycoprotein subclass detection sensitivities in the low femtomole range and allow for multiplexing with protein-specific antibodies. In certain embodiments, biotin-alkyne probes, or biotin-azide probes, allow for multiplexed Western blot detection of glycoproteins and targeted proteins of interest using monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies. The results achieved with the combined glycoprotein detection strategy described herein, provide selectivity and sensitivity that is currently unachievable with commonly used lectin-based and antibody-based glycoprotein detection technologies.
  • The methods described herein utilizing copper catalyzed cycloaddition chemistry can result in highly sensitive detection of proteins modified with azides or alkynes, as shown by 1-D and 2-D fluorescent gel sensitivities on gel electrophoresis and Western blots (see FIGS. 8-10). In certain embodiments the detection sensitivity is in the low picomole range, while in other embodiments the detection sensitivity is in the mid-to-low femtomole range (see FIG. 6B), and the labeling efficiency
  • In certain embodiments, a label attached to a biomolecule, such as a protein, using a “click” chemistry reaction with a copper (I) chelator as disclosed herein, can also be used for the separation of biomolecules. By way of example only, affinity chromatography or bead capture techniques can be used to separate biomolecules labeled with biotin or other affinity tags using the methods described herein. The captured molecules can be detected using the affinity tags or by other means, and/or further analyzed for structure or function.
  • Another aspect of “in gel” detection is the total detection of proteins in electrophoresis gels or Western blot membranes using a “universal click” chemistry in which phenylboronic acid-containing molecules are tethered via a linker to an azide moiety or an alkyne moiety. The phenylboronic acid associates with the cis-diol moieties on glycoproteins which is stable, except under acidic conditions. Such labels can be used to modify glycoproteins after electrophoretic separation with either azide or alkyne moieties which can then be used to add a label via “click” chemistry, Staudinger ligation or activated alkyne chemistry. The gel is then visualized to detect the labeled glycoproteins. In certain embodiments, glycoproteins of interest can be isolated by excising bands of interest after such labeling and treating the gel pieces under acidic conditions to reverse the association of the phenylboronic acid with the cis-diol moieties on glycoproteins, thereby releasing the glycoproteins. The released glycoproteins can then be identified using mass spectrometry.
  • Methods for Labeling Immobilized Modified Biomolecules
  • Another aspect provides a method for labeling modified biomolecules that have been immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports used in such methods have been described herein, and can be solid or semi-solid matrix. Such solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass, slides, arrays, silica particles, polymeric particles, microtiter plates and polymeric gels. In this aspect the biomolecules are modified using the methods described herein. In certain aspects it is advantageous to first immobilize the modified biomolecules and then to subsequently form a biomolecule conjugate comprising the biomolecule and a reporter molecule, carrier molecule and the solid support, wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprise a reactive group used to form the conjugate. In certain embodiments such reactive groups are alkynes for reacting with azides. In certain embodiments such reactive groups are activated alkynes for reacting with azides. In certain embodiments such reactive groups are phosphines for reacting with azides. In certain embodiments such reactive groups are azides for reacting with alkynes. In certain embodiments, the conjugate is formed under “click” chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises an alkyne or an azide. In another aspect the conjugate is formed under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine or an azide. In another aspect the conjugate is formed using activated alkynes wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises an activated alkyne or an azide.
  • In this aspect the biomolecules are metabolically, enzymatically or chemically modified with an azide containing moiety, an alkyne containing moiety or a phosphine containing moiety using the methods described herein. In certain embodiments the modified biomolecule is an azido modified biomolecule, an alkyne modified biomolecule or a phosphine modified biomolecule. In certain embodiments, the azido modified biomolecule is an azido modified glycoprotein. In certain embodiments, the alkyne modified biomolecule is an alkyne modified glycoprotein. In certain embodiments, the phosphine modified biomolecule is a phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • In certain embodiments, it is advantageous to first immobilize the azido modified biomolecules and then to subsequently form the biomolecule conjugate comprising a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprise an azide reactive group prior to forming the conjugate. In certain embodiments, the conjugate is formed under “click” chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a terminal alkyne. In another aspect the conjugate is formed under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine. In certain embodiments, azido modified glycoproteins are first immobilized onto a solid support, and then subsequently used to form a modified glycoprotein conjugate comprising a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprise an azide reactive group prior to forming the conjugate. In certain embodiments, the conjugate is formed under “click” chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a terminal alkyne. In another aspect the conjugate is formed under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine.
  • In another aspect, the modified biomolecule is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than functional groups used in “click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation, whereupon the attached modified biomolecule is used to form a conjugate under “click” chemistry conditions or Staudinger ligation with reporter molecules, carrier molecule or another solid support that have functional groups used in “click” chemistry or Staudinger ligation. By way of example only, the modified biomolecule can be immobilized to a solid support using hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, thiol, aldehyde, halogen, nitro, cyano, amido, urea, carbonate, carbamate, isocyanate, sulfone, sulfonate, sulfonamide or sulfoxide functional groups.
  • In this aspect the biomolecules are modified with an azide containing moiety, an alkyne containing moiety or a phosphine containing moiety using the methods described herein. In certain embodiments the modified biomolecule is an azido modified biomolecule, an alkyne modified biomolecule or a phosphine modified biomolecule. In certain embodiments, the azido modified biomolecule is an azido modified glycoprotein. In certain embodiments, the alkyne modified biomolecule is an alkyne modified glycoprotein. In certain embodiments, the phosphine modified biomolecule is a phosphine modified glycoprotein.
  • In certain embodiments, the azido modified biomolecule is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified biomolecule is used to form a conjugate under click chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or another solid support comprises a terminal alkyne. In another embodiment the azido modified biomolecule is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified biomolecule is used to form a conjugate under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or other solid support comprises a triaryle phosphine. In certain embodiments, an azido modified glycoprotein is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified glycoprotein is used to form a conjugate under click chemistry conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or another solid support comprises a terminal alkyne. In another embodiment the azido modified glycoprotein is attached to a solid support using functional groups other than azide reactive functional groups, whereupon the attached azido modified glycoprotein is used to form a conjugate under Staudinger ligation conditions wherein the reporter molecule, carrier molecule or another solid support comprises a triaryl phosphine.
  • In another aspect is provided a method for detecting immobilized azido modified biomolecules, wherein the method includes the following:
      • a) immobilizing the azido modified biomolecules on a solid or semi-solid matrix to form an immobilized azido modified biomolecule;
      • b) contacting the immobilized azido modified biomolecule with a reporter molecule that contains an alkyne reactive group to form a contacted azido modified biomolecule;
      • c) incubating the contacted azido modified biomolecule for a sufficient amount of time to form a reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate;
      • d) illuminating the reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate, and
      • e) observing the illuminated reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate whereby the immobilized azido modified biomolecule is detected.
        In certain embodiments the azido modified biomolecule is an azido modified protein, while in other embodiments the azido modified biomolecule is an azido modified glycoprotein.
  • In another aspect is provided a method for detecting immobilized alkyne modified biomolecules, wherein the method includes the following:
      • a) immobilizing the alkyne modified biomolecules on a solid or semi-solid matrix to form an immobilized alkyne modified biomolecule;
      • b) contacting the immobilized alkyne modified biomolecule with a reporter molecule that contains an azide reactive group to form a contacted alkyne modified biomolecule;
      • c) incubating the contacted alkyne modified biomolecule for a sufficient amount of time to form a reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate;
      • d) illuminating the reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate, and
      • e) observing the illuminated reporter molecule-biomolecule conjugate whereby the immobilized alkyne modified biomolecule is detected.
        In certain embodiments the alkyne modified biomolecule is an alkyne modified protein, while in other embodiments the alkyne modified biomolecule is an alkyne modified glycoprotein.
        Samples and Sample Preparation
  • The end user will determine the choice of the sample and the way in which the sample is prepared. Samples that can be used with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, any biological derived material or aqueous solution that contains a biomolecule. In certain embodiments, a samples also includes material in which a biomolecule has been added. The sample that can be used with the methods and compositions described herein can be a biological fluid including, but not limited to, whole blood, plasma, serum, nasal secretions, sputum, saliva, urine, sweat, transdermal exudates, cerebrospinal fluid, or the like. In other embodiments, the sample are biological fluids that include tissue and cell culture medium wherein biomolecule of interest has been secreted into the medium. Cells used in such cultures include, but are not limited to, prokaryotic cells and eukaryotic cells that include primary cultures and immortalized cell lines. Such eukaryotic cells include, without limitation, ovary cells, epithelial cells, circulating immune cells, β cells, hepatocytes, and neurons. In certain embodiments, the sample may be whole organs, tissue or cells from an animal, including but not limited to, muscle, eye, skin, gonads, lymph nodes, heart, brain, lung, liver, kidney, spleen, thymus, pancreas, solid tumors, macrophages, mammary glands, mesothelium, and the like.
  • Various buffers can be used in the methods described herein, including inorganic and organic buffers. In certain embodiments the organic buffer is a zwitterionic buffer. By way of example only, buffers that can be used in the methods described herein include phosphate buffered saline (PBS), phosphate, succinate, citrate, borate, maleate, cacodylate, N-(2-Acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), 2-(N-morpholino)-ethanesulfonic acid (MES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES), piperazine-N,N′-2-ethanesulfonic acid (PIPES), 2-(N-morpholino)-2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (MOPSO), N,N-bis-(hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES), 3-(N-morpholino)-propanesulfonic acid (MOPS), N-tris-(hydroxymethyl)-2-ethanesulfonic acid (TES), N-2-hydroxyethyl-piperazine-N-2-ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), 3-(N-tris-(hydroxymethyl)methylamino)-2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (TAPSO), 3-(N,N-Bis[2-hydroxyethyl]amino)-2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (DIPSO), N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)piperazine-N′-(2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid) (HEPPSO), 4-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazinepropanesulfonic acid (EPPS), N-[Tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl]glycine (Tricine), N,N-Bis(2-hydroxyethyl)glycine (Bicine), (2-Hydroxy-1,1-bis(hydroxymethyl)ethyl)amino]-1-propanesulfonic acid (TAPS), N-(1,1-Dimethyl-2-hydroxyethyl)-3-amino-2-hydroxypropanesulfonic acid (AMPSO), tris(hydroxy methyl)amino-methane (Tris), TRIS-Acetate-EDTA (TAE), glycine, bis[2-hydroxyethyl]iminotris[hydroxymethyl]methane (BisTris), or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, wherein such buffers are used in gel electrophoresis separations the buffer can also include ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA).
  • The concentration of such buffers used in the methods described herein is from about 0.1 mM to 1 M. In certain embodiments the concentration is between 10 mM to about 1 M. In certain embodiments the concentration is between about 20 mM and about 500 mM, and in other embodiments the concentration is between about 50 mM and about 300 mM. In certain embodiments, the buffer concentration is from about 0.1 mM to about 50 mM, while in other embodiments the buffer concentration if from about 0.5 mM to about 20 mM.
  • The pH will vary depending upon the particular assay system, generally within a readily determinable range wherein one or more of the sulfonic acid moieties is deprotonated.
  • In certain embodiments, buffers used in the methods described herein have a pH between 5 and 9 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8.5 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 7 at ambient temperature. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 5 and 9 at 25° C. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8.5 at 25° C. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 8 at 25° C. In certain embodiments the buffer has a pH between 6 and 7 at 25° C.
  • In certain embodiments, the sample used in the methods described herein have a non-ionic detergent to the sample. Non-limiting examples of such non-ionic detergents added to the samples used in the methods described herein are polyoxyalkylene diols, ethers of fatty alcohols including alcohol ethoxylates (Neodol from Shell Chemical Company and Tergitol from Union Carbide Corporation), alkyl phenol ethoxylates (Igepal surfactants from General Aniline and Film Corporation), ethylene oxide/propylene oxide block copolymers (PLURONIC™ Series from BASF Wyandotte Corporation), polyoxyethylene ester of a fatty acids (Stearox CD from Monsanto Company), alkyl phenol surfactants (Triton series, including Triton X-100 from Rohm and Haas Company), polyoxyethylene mercaptan analogs of alcohol ethoxylates (Nonic 218 and Stearox SK from Monsanto Company), polyoxyethylene adducts of alkyl amines (Ethoduomeen and Ethomeen surfactants from Armak Company), polyoxyethylene alkyl amides, sorbitan esters (such as sorbitan monolaurate) and alcohol phenol ethoxylate (Surfonic from Jefferson Chemical Company, Inc.). Non-limiting examples of sorbitan esters include polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate (TWEEN20), polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monopalmitate (TWEEN40), polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate (TWEEN60) and polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate (TWEEN 80). In certain embodiments, the concentration of such non-ionic detergents added to a sample is from 0.01 to 0.5%. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.4 vol. %. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.3 vol. %. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.2 vol. %. In other embodiments the concentration is from about 0.01 to 0.1 vol. %.
  • Illumination
  • The compounds and compositions described herein may, at any time before, after or during an assay, be illuminated with a wavelength of light that results in a detectable optical response, and observed with a means for detecting the optical response. In certain embodiments, such illumination can be by a violet or visible wavelength emission lamp, an arc lamp, a laser, or even sunlight or ordinary room light, wherein the wavelength of such sources overlap the absorption spectrum of a fluorophore or chromaphore of the compounds or compositions described herein. In certain embodiments, such illumination can be by a violet or visible wavelength emission lamp, an arc lamp, a laser, or even sunlight or ordinary room light, wherein the fluorescent compounds, including those bound to the complementary specific binding pair member, display intense visible absorption as well as fluorescence emission.
  • In certain embodiments, the sources used for illuminating the fluorophore or chromaphore of the compounds or compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, hand-held ultraviolet lamps, mercury arc lamps, xenon lamps, argon lasers, laser diodes, blue laser diodes, and YAG lasers. These illumination sources are optionally integrated into laser scanners, flow cytometer, fluorescence microplate readers, standard or mini fluorometers, or chromatographic detectors. These fluorescence emission of such fluorophores is optionally detected by visual inspection, or by use of any of the following devices: CCD cameras, video cameras, photographic film, laser scanning devices, fluorometers, photodiodes, photodiode arrays, quantum counters, epifluorescence microscopes, scanning microscopes, flow cytometers, fluorescence microplate readers, or by means for amplifying the signal such as photomultiplier tubes. Where the sample is examined using a flow cytometer, a fluorescence microscope or a fluorometer, the instrument is optionally used to distinguish and discriminate between the fluorescent compounds of the invention and a second fluorophore with detectably different optical properties, typically by distinguishing the fluorescence response of the fluorescent compounds of the invention from that of the second fluorophore. Where a sample is examined using a flow cytometer, examination of the sample optionally includes isolation of particles within the sample based on the fluorescence response by using a sorting device.
  • In certain embodiments, fluorescence is optionally quenched using either physical or chemical quenching agents.
  • Kits of the Invention
  • In another aspect, the present invention provides kits that include UDP-GalNAz, a GalT enzyme; an azide reactive reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support.
  • In one aspect, the invention includes a kit for labeling a biomolecule that includes at least one label that comprises a terminal alkyne, a solution comprising copper, and a solution that comprises a copper (I) chelator. The kit can further comprise a solution that comprises a reducing agent, one or more buffers, or one or more detergents.
  • In one embodiment, an alkyne label provided in a kit is a fluorophore, such as, but not limited to, a xanthene, coumarin, borapolyazaindacene, pyrene and cyanine. In one embodiment, a kit provides two or more different terminal alkyne-containing labels one or more of which is a fluorophore, In other embodiments, an alkyne label provided in a kit is a tag, such as but not limited to a peptide or a hapten, such as biotin.
  • In preferred embodiments, a copper (I) chelator provided in the kit is a 1,10 phenanthroline, preferably bathocuproine disulfonic acid. In some embodiments, copper is provided in the form of a copper sulfate or copper acetate solution. In some embodiments, a reducing agent is provided in the form of ascorbate.
  • In another aspect, the invention includes a kit for labeling a biomolecule that includes at least one label that comprises an azido group, a solution comprising copper, an a solution that comprises a copper (I) chelator. The kit can further comprise a solution that comprises a reducing agent, one or more buffers, or one or more detergents.
  • In one embodiment of this aspect, an azido-containing label provided in a kit is a fluorophore, such as, but not limited to, a xanthene, coumarin, borapolyazaindacene, pyrene and cyanine. In other embodiments, an azido label provided in a kit is a tag, such as but not limited to a peptide or a hapten, such as biotin.
  • In one embodiment, a kit provides two or more different azido-containing labels one or more of which is a fluorophore, In preferred embodiments, a copper (I) chelator provided in the kit is a 1,10 phenanthroline, preferably bathocuproine disulfonic acid. In some embodiments, copper is provided in the form of a copper sulfate or copper acetate solution. In some embodiments, a reducing agent is provided in the form of ascorbate.
  • In other embodiments, a kit can further include one or more reagents and solutions for chromogenic detection on Western blots.
  • A detailed description of the invention having been provided above, the following examples are given for the purpose of illustrating the invention and shall not be construed as being a limitation on the scope of the invention or claims.
  • EXAMPLES Example 1 Synthesis of UDPGalNAz
  • The synthesis of UDPGalNAz is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00001
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00002
  • Azidoacetic acid. To a solution of iodoacetic acid (8.0 g, 43.0 mmol) and H2O (100 mL) was added sodium azide (5.62 g, 86.0 mmol). The solution was stirred at RT and protected from light. After 4 days, the solution was diluted with 1 N HCl (30 mL) and the pH was check to ensure that it was in the range of 2-3. The solution was extracted with EtOAc (2×100 mL), then the combined organics were washed with saturated NaHSO3 (1×50 mL), brine (1×50 mL) and dried over MgSO4. The solution was decanted, concentrated and the crude azidoacetic acid (3.34 g, 53%) was used directly in the next step without further purification.
  • N-Azidoacetylgalactosamine (mix of anomers). To a solution of azidoacetic acid (3.34 g, 33.06 mmol) in methanol (170 mL) was added D-galactosamine hydrochloride (5.09 g, 23.62 mmol) followed by triethylamine (7.90 mL, 56.68 mmol). This solution was stirred at RT for 5 min and then cooled to 0° C. 1-Hydroxybenzotriazole (3.19 g, 23.62 mmol) was added followed by N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (9.05 g, 47.24 mmol). The ice was allowed to melt on its own and the clear, pale orange reaction solution was stirred overnight at RT, and protected from light. The honey-colored solution was concentrated to yield a yellow resin. The crude yellow material (mixture of 2 anomers, assumed 100% conversion) was used directly in the next reaction without further purification.
  • ,3,4,6-Tetra-O-acetyl-N-azidoacetylgalactosamine (Ac4GalNAz, mix of anomers). To a solution of N-azidoacetylgalactosamine (mix of anomers, 23.62 mmol) in pyridine (140 mL) was added acetic anhydride (70 mL). The cloudy, orange/brown colored solution was stirred at RT overnight and protected from light. The solution was concentrated to yield a brown, viscous oil. The crude oil was purified via silica gel loaded with 33-50% EtOAc/hexanes, affording 4.35 g (60%, mixture of 2 anomers) of the product.
  • 3,4,6-Tri-O-acetyl-N-azidoacetylgalactosamine (mix of anomers). To a solution of 1,3,4,6-tetra-O-acetyl-N-azidoacetylgalactosamine (mix of anomers, 1.60 g, 3.75 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added benzylamine (0.49 mL, 4.5 mmol). The solution was heated in an oil bath at 50° C. and protected from light. After 15 hr, the initial clear, canary yellow solution turned brown in color. The solution was removed from the oil bath and concentrated. The crude was purified via silica column chromatography (50-100% EtOAc/hexanes) to afford the product (1.18 g, 82%, brown oil, mixture of 2 anomers).
  • Diallyl (3,4,6-tetra-O-acetyl-2-azidoacetiamido-2-dexocy-α-D-galactopyranosyl phosphate. To a solution of 3,4,6-tri-O-acetyl-N-azidoacetylgalactosamine (mix of anomers, 0.34 g, 0.88 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (9.0 mL) was added 1H-tetrazole (0.31 g, 4.41 mmol). The reaction was stirred at RT for 10 min and protected from light. Diallyldiisopropylphosphoramidite (0.70 mL, 2.64 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction was stirred at RT for 3 h. The solution was subsequently cooled to −40° C. in an acetonitrile/dry ice bath and 3-chloroperbenzoic acid (0.76 g, 4.41 mmol) and stirred at −40° C. for 10 min. The solution was then allowed to warm to RT slowly over 1 h (transferred from a −40° C. bath to 0° C. bath packed with ice). After 1 hr, ice was still present so removed ice bath and let stir at RT for 20 min. The reaction solution was diluted with CH2Cl2 (45 mL), washed sequentially with 10% aqueous Na2SO3 (2×45 mL), saturated NaHCO3 (2×45 mL), and H2O (2×45 mL). The organic layer was then dried over Na2SO4, decanted and concentrated. The crude material was purified via silica gel column chromatography (60-100% EtOAc/hexanes) to afford the product, (0.18 g, 39%).
  • UDPGalNAz. To a solution of diallyl (3,4,6-tetra-O-acetyl-2-azidoacetiamido-2-dexocy-α-D-galactopyranosyl phosphate (0.10 g, 0.18 mmol) and THF:MeOH (1:1, 2.1 mL:2.1 mL) under argon was added p-toluenesulfonic acid, sodium salt (0.14 g, 0.72 mmol) followed by tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (30 mg, 0.026 mmol). The solution was protected from light and stirred at RT for 3 h. After 4 days, the reaction solution was concentrated in vacuo and co-evaporated with toluene (3×20 mL). The crude material was suspended in CH3CN (0.86 mL) and triethylamine (0.27 mL) was added. The solution was cooled to O° C. and freshly prepared UMP-N-methylimidazole (0.22 mmol) in CH3CN (1.7 mL) was added dropwise. The resulting yellow solution was stirred at 0° C. for 3 h. The reaction solution was concentrated, then resuspended in a solution of MeOH:H2O:triethylamine (5:2:1, 10 mL) and stirred at RT for 20 h. The solution was concentrated in vacuo to yield a crude yellow syrup. This material was dissolved in H2O (15 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3×50 mL) to remove organic byproducts. The organic layer was discarded and the aqueous layer was concentrated and co-evaporated with toluene. The resulting viscous, pale orange, clear oil was obtained. The crude material was dissolved in 100 mM NH4HCO3 degassed buffer (2.0 mL). Because the solution was cloudy in appearance and not clear, it was filtered through a Acrodisc PF 0.8/0.2 mM Supor, sterile, single use, non-pyrogenic filter from Gelman Sciences, prod #4187. The clear, pale orange solution obtained was loaded onto a BioGel P2, extra fine column (1.5 cm×80 cm) and flashed at a flow rate of 0.13 mL/min. The column was run overnight with 100 mM NH4HCO3 buffer; 2.6 mL per fraction were collected. The fractions containing product were collected (TLC 5:3:1, EtOH, NH4OH, H2O, Rf=0.70, UV active). After combining the product-containing fractions, the solution was concentrated and the resulting white solid was dissolved in a minimal amount of water and passed through a Dowex (BioRad AG 50W-X8-200 resin, purchased in the sodium form). All of the eluent was collected and concentrated after the UV active material ceased eluting from the column. A pale, tan foam was obtained. This material was dissolved in minimal water and lyophilized to afford the product (0.10 g, 83%) as a tan, crystalline material.
  • Example 2 Synthesis of UMP-N-methylimidazolide
  • The synthesis of UMP-N-methylimidazolide is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00003
  • Uridine 5′-monophosphate triethylammonium salt (5′-UMP triethylammonium salt). Uridine 5′-monophosphate disodium salt (1.0 g) was dissolved in H2O (2 ml) and passed through Dowex resin triethylammonium salt (2.7 cm×7.0 cm column size) with H2O as eluent. All of the eluent was concentrated and after the UV active material ceased eluting from the column. The solution was concentrated and co-evaporated with toluene to until a white, crystalline solid was obtained (0.78 g, 80%).
  • Uridine monophosphate-N-methylimidazole (UMP-N-methylimidazole). To a suspension of uridine 5′-monophosphate triethylammonium salt (0.097 g, 0.22 mmol) in CH3CN (0.70 mL) was added N,N-dimethylaniline (0.11 mL, 0.864 mmol), and triethylamine (0.03 mL, 0.22 mmol). The suspension was cooled to 0° C. In a separate flask, trifluoroacetic anhydride (0.15 mL, 1.08 mmol) was added to CH3CN (0.21 mL) and cooled to 0° C. This solution was added dropwise via microsyringe, to the suspension of uridine 5′-monophosphate triethylammonium salt at 0° C.; a yellow, clear solution was obtained. After 5 min, the solution was removed from the ice bath and stirred at RT for 30 min. The solution was concentrated in vacuo and placed under dry argon. The mixed phosphoryl anhydride solution was then cooled to 0° C. In a separate flask methylimidazole (0.051 mL, 0.65 mmol) was added to a solution of CH3CN (0.2 mL) and triethylamine (0.15 mL, 1.08 mmol). The resulting clear and colorless solution was cooled to 0° C. and subsequently added dropwise to the mixed phosphoryl anhydride solution at 0° C. The solution was then stirred at 0° C. for 5-10 min. The yellow color darkened and after 20 min and the TLC (10:10:1, CHCl3:MeOH:1 mM NH4OAc pH 7), showed complete conversion to product (Rf=0.28, UV active). CH3CN (1.7 mL) was added to the solution at 0° C., and this crude material was used directly in the next step; 100% conversion is assumed.
  • Example 3 Synthesis of Dapoxyl® alkyne
  • The synthesis of Dapoxyl® alkyne is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00004
  • To a solution of Dapoxyl® carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (50 mg, 0.12 mmol) in DMF (0.4 mL) at RT was added propargylamine (42 μL, 0.61 mmol). The initial clear orange solution turned yellow and cloudy. After ˜15 min at RT the reaction was complete, and the solution was concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified via HPLC to afford the product (36 mg, 84%). TLC (10% EtOAc, CHCl3) Rf=0.30; ESI m/z 346 (M+, C21H19N3O2 requires 346).
  • Example 4 Synthesis of 5-Carboxytetramethyl rhodamine alkyne (5-TAMRA-alkyne)
  • The synthesis of 5-Carboxytetramethyl rhodamine alkyne (5-TAMRA-alkyne) is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00005
  • To a solution of 5-carboxytetramethyl rhodamine, succinimidyl ester (5-TAMRA-SE, 0.10 g, 0.19 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) was added propargylamine (25 μL, 0.38 mmol) and H2O (0.5 mL). After stirring the solution for 30 min at RT, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. Purification via HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 25-40% CH3CN in 25 mM TEAA, pH 4.7, flow rate of 15 mL/min) gave 68 mg of product (82%, a purple solid) tR=23-33 min. TLC(CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) Rf=0.67.
  • Example 5 Synthesis of Biotin alkyne
  • The synthesis of Biotin alkyne is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00006
  • To a solution of EZ-link NHS-PEO4-biotin (25 mg, 0.004 mmol, Pierce) in DMF (0.1 mL) was added propargylamine (0.1 mL). After stirring the solution for 90 min at RT, some starting material was still seen. Additional propargylamine (0.2 mL) was added and the solution was stirred for another 60 min. The solution was concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified via HPLC to afford 14.4 mg (64%) of the product as a yellow solid. TLC (CHCl3: MeOH, 7:1) Rf=0.23; ESI m/z 529 (M+, C24H40N4O7S requires 529).
  • Example 6 Synthesis of Compound 1
  • The synthesis of Compound 1 is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00007
  • To a solution of Alexa Fluor® 488 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester, dilithium salt (mixed isomers, 50 mg, 0.079 mmol) in DMF (2.0 mL) was added propargylamine (54 □L, 0.79 mmol). The solution was stirred overnight at RT. The initial deep red solution turned pale yellow in color and became clear. The solution was concentrated in vacuo and purified via silica gel thin layer chromatography (prep plate, 20% H2O, CH3CN) to afford the product (20 mg, 44%) as an orange solid. TLC (3:1, CH3CN:H2O)Rf=0.70; ESI neg m/z 570 (M+, C24H16N3O10S2− requires 570).
  • Example 7 Synthesis of Compound 2
  • The synthesis of Compound 2 is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00008
  • To a solution of Alexa Fluor® 532 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (50 mg, 0.070 mmol) in DMF (2.2 mL) was added propargylamine (100 □L, 1.46 mmol). The solution was stirred overnight at RT. H2O (1.0 mL) was added to the solution and the solution was stirred an additional hour. The solution was concentrated in vacuo and the crude material was purified via HPLC to afford the product (30 mg, 65%). TLC (8:2, CH3CN:H2O)Rf=0.58; ESI m/z 664 (M+, C33H33N3O8S2 requires 664).
  • Example 8 Synthesis of Compound 3
  • The synthesis of Compound 3 is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00009
  • To a solution of Alexa Fluor® 633 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester, bis(triethylammonium salt) (50 mg, 0.041 mmol) in DMF (2.0 mL) was added propargylamine (28 μL, 0.40 mmol). The solution was stirred overnight at RT. H2O (1.0 mL) was added to the solution and the solution was stirred an additional hour. The solution was concentrated in vacuo and the product (39 mg, 99%). TLC (8:2, CH3CN:H2O)Rf=0.66; ESI m/z 963 (M+, C40H34F2N3O11S6 requires 963).
  • Example 9 Synthesis of triarylphosphine-TAMRA dye for Staudinger ligation
  • The synthesis of triarylphosphine-TAMRA dye is shown in the reaction scheme below.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00010
  • To a solution of acid 1 (Science 2000, 287, 2007-2010) (80 mg, 0.26 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) was added N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDCl, 75 mg, 0.39 mmol) and N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS, 5 mg). The solution was stirred at RT. After 2.5 h, amine 2 (50 μL, 0.26 mmol) was added and the solution was stirred overnight. The solution was partitioned between CHCl3 (15 mL) and H2O (5 mL). The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layer was reextracted with CHCl3 (15 mL). The combined organic layers were rinsed once with H2O (5 mL), followed by saturated aqueous NaCl (5 mL). The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, decanted and concentrated. The crude was purified via chromatography (silica, 2% MeOH, CHCl3) to afford the product (99 mg, 71%) as a clear, yellow oil.
  • To a solution of 3 (10 mg, 0.018 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.0 mL) was added trifluoracetic acid (TFA, 0.5 mL) and the solution was stirred at RT. After 30 min, the solution was concentrated and reevaporated from toluene (2×2 mL). The residue (4, 0.018 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (0.2 mL) and N-ethyldiisopropylamine (DIEA, 12 uL, 0.72 mmol), and 5-carboxytetramethyl rhodamine, succinimidyl ester (5-TAMRA-SE, 9 mg, 0.022 mmol) were added. The solution was stirred at RT for 2.5 h, concentrated and purified via silica gel (prep plate, 20% H2O in CH3CN) to afford the product (7.4 mg, 48%). TLC (20% H2O in CH3CN)Rf=0.23; ESI m/z 529 (M+, C24H40N4O7S requires 529).
  • Example 10 Synthesis of triarylphosphine-biotin for Staudinger ligation
  • The synthesis of triarylphosphine-biotin is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00011
  • To a solution of 3 (5.3 mg, 0.010 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.2 mL) was added trifluoracetic acid (TFA, 0.5 mL) and the solution was stirred at RT. After 2 h, the solution was concentrated and reevaporated from toluene (2×2 mL). The residue (4, 0.010 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (0.1 mL) and N-ethyldiisopropylamine (DIEA, 3 μL, 0.02 mmol), and EZ-link NHS-PEO4-biotin (7 mg, 0.012 mmol) were added. The solution was stirred at RT for 1 h, quenched with saturated NH4 +Cl and partitioned between CHCl3 (10 mL) and H2O (1 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted repeatedly with CHCl3 (10 mL per extraction) until no ultraviolet spot was observed by TLC. The combined organic layers were concentrated and purified via silica gel (prep plate, 7:1 CHCl3:MeOH) to afford the product (2.2 mg, 25%). TLC (7:1 CHCl3:MeOH, developed 3 times) Rf=0.50; ESI m/z 909 (M+H+, C46H63N5O10PS requires 909).
  • Example 11 Metabolic Labeling and “click” detection of glycoprotein subclasses
  • Jurkat cells were fed 40 μM Ac4ManNAz or Ac4GalNAz for 3 days (A) or 250 μM Ac4GlcNAz overnight (B). Harvested cells were sonicated in 50 mM Tris buffer, pH 8.0 with protease and phosphatase inhibitors, and the lysates were subjected to high-speed centrifugation (100 K×g). The membrane pellet proteins from ManNAz- and GalNAz-treated cells, and the soluble supernatant cells from the GlcNAc-treated cells, were precipitated with chloroform/methanol, dissolved in detergent, and labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe in the presence of 1 mM CuSO4, and 5 mM ascorbic acid (1). 10 μg of the labeled, precipitated proteins were run on 1-D NuPAGE® Novex® 4-12% gels (Invitrogen). Images were obtained on the Fuji FLA-3000 scanner (Fuji) using 532 nm excitation. Gels were then post stained with SYPRO® Ruby protein stain (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.) and imaged using excitation at 473 nm. Control lanes represent extracts from unfed cells but treated with the fluorescent probe. See FIG. 2.
  • Example 12 Separation of Ac4GlcNAz-treated soluble Jurkat cell proteins by 2-D gels
  • Jurkat cells were cultured overnight with 250 μM Ac4GlcNAz. Soluble lysate proteins were prepared as above using sonication and ultracentrifugation and labeled for 1 hour with a fluorescent alkyne probe. 40 μg of the labeled proteins were precipitated and resolubilized in 7M urea, 2M thiourea, 65 mM DTT, 2% CHAPS, 1% Zwittergent 3-10, 1% pH 3-10 carrier ampholytes and separated on pH 3-10 IEF strips in the first dimension and 4-12% Bis-Tris gels with MOPS buffer in the second dimension. See FIG. 3.
  • Example 13 In Gel detection of 40 and 50 kD azide-labeled model proteins
  • 25 pmols each of 40 and 50 kD model proteins with single N-terminal azides were spiked into 100 μg of Jurkat cell lysates (upper panels), or not (lower panels). Proteins were labeled with a fluorescent alkyne probe, serially diluted as shown, and run on NuPAGE® Novex® 4-12% gels. Images (left panels) were obtained on the FLA-3000 scanner using 532 nm excitation. Gels were then post stained with SYPRO® Ruby stain and imaged using excitation at 473 nm (right panels). Detection sensitivity of the labeled proteins is less than 10 femtomoles. See FIG. 4.
  • Example 14 Labeling Efficiency of 40 and 50 kd Azide-Labeled Model Proteins is Unchanged in Complex Protein Extracts
  • Either 100 ng (25 pmol) or 10 ng (2.5 pmol) each of azide-labeled 40 Kd & 50 Kd proteins were labeled with fluorescent alkyne probe as above in a background of either 100, 50, 25, or 0 μg of control Jurkat lysate (left panel). Note: 100 μg of control lysate was added after labeling to the ‘0 lysate’ to facilitate recovery of the labeled protein by precipitation. The gel was post stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain. See FIG. 5.
  • Example 15 Selective analysis of cell surface versus total glycoprotein subclasses by gel electrophoresis
  • HeLa cells were fed Ac4GalNAz or Ac4ManNAz sugars for 48 hours. For cell surface glycoprotein analysis, the surfaces of live cells were labeled with dye-alkyne, lysed, and the purified proteins were analyzed by gel electrophoresis (lanes 2 and 5, see legend). For total glycoprotein subclass analysis, cells were lysed, the purified proteins were labeled in solution, and ran on the gel (lanes 3 and 6). Control unfed cells are shown in gel lanes 1 and 4. 20 μg of protein was loaded per gel lane. The GalNAz incorporated proteins in lane 2 represent cell surface O-linked glycoproteins only, whereas total GalNAz metabolically labeled glycoproteins are shown in lane 3. These proteins represent both cell surface O-linked glycoproteins, intracellular GalNAz labeled proteins located in golgi apparatus and transport vesicles, and O-GlcNAc modified proteins (GalNAz was recently shown to flux into the O-GlcNAc biosynthetic pathway). Lane 5 represents ManNAz labeling of cell surface sialic acid-containing glycoproteins, whereas lane 6 represents labeling of both cell surface sialic acid-containing glycoproteins and intracellular sialic acid-containing glycoproteins located in golgi apparatus and transport vesicles.
  • Example 16 Metabolic labeling of glycoprotein subclasses in live animals and in gel fluorescence detection of labeled glycoproteins
  • Metabolic labeling of O-linked and sialic acid-containing glycoproteins was accomplished by administration of the unnatural tetraacetylated azide-modified sugar precursors, Ac4GalNAz or Ac4ManNAz, respectively (300 mg/kg in 70% DMSO), to activated Her2/Neu transgenic mice over a 7 day regimen. After 7 days the mice were sacrificed and various organ tissues were dissected, lysed, and protein extracts were reacted with 10 mM fluorescent TAMRA alkyne in Tris Buffer, pH 8.0, with 2 mM CuSO4, 20 mM ascorbate, 5 mM BCS, and 25% propylene glycol. Labeled glycoproteins were precipitated, dissolved in 1-D SDS-PAGE buffer, analyzed by gel electrophoresis, and detected by fluorescence laser scanning. After scanning the gels were post-stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain to view total proteins. The upper panels below show 1-D gels of labeled tissue proteins from heart muscle (H), liver (L), or kidney (K). Lower panels show same gels after post-staining with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain.
  • Example 17 Fluorescent “click” labeling of live and fixed cells: selective labeling of cell surface versus internal glycoproteins
  • Jurkat cells were fed 30 μM Ac4HexNAz sugars, ManNAz, GalNAz, or GlcNAz, for 3 days. In A, live Jurkat cells were labeled with 10 mM Alexa Fluor 488 alkyne probe for 30 minutes in the presence of Tris buffer, pH 8.0, 2 mM CuSO4, 20 mM ascorbate, and 5 mM BCS. The cells were then fixed with 4% formaldehyde/PBS for 15 min and analyzed by flow cytometry. In B, cells were fixed and permeablized, before labeling under the same conditions as in A, and analyzed by flow cytometry. Theses results demonstrate the ability to selectively stain cell surface glycoproteins only, or cell surface and intracellular glycoproteins. Significant GlcNAz staining is apparent only after cell permeabilization, as the modification is specific to the inside of the cell.
  • Example 18 Enzymatic Labeling and Detection of α-crystallin O-GlcNAc
  • α-crystallin O-GlcNAc was enzymatically labeled with azide (UDP-GalNAz) using a modified b-GalT1 enzyme. The protein was subsequently reacted with a fluorescent alkyne probe as described. The proteins were run on 1-D NuPAGE® Novex® 4-12% gels at the dilutions shown. Note: Only 2-10% of α-crystallin is O-GlcNAc-modified and therefore the detection sensitivity of the O-GlcNAc moiety is in the mid-to-low femtomole range (10-45 fmols). See FIG. 6.
  • Example 19 Comparison of GalT1 Enzyme Labeling with a-O-GlcNAc Monoclonal Antibody CTD 110.6
  • In A, α-crystallin was enzymatically labeled with the modified GalT1 enzyme and subsequently reacted with a biotin-alkyne probe. The proteins were run on 1-D NuPAGE® Novex® 4-12% MES gels, at the dilutions shown, and blotted onto PVDF membrane. The PVDF membrane was then incubated in streptavidin-HRP and proteins were detected using ECL Plus™ (GE Biosystems). Lane 2 (NE) represents the 8 pmoL no-enzyme added control. Note: In A, the detection sensitivity of O-GlcNAc by Western blot is in the low femtomole range (3-10 fmols). In B, untreated α-crystallin was run on 1-D gels and blotted as described above. The PVDF membrane was processed using the O-GlcNAc Western Blot Detection Kit (Pierce) according to manufacturer's instructions. The kit utilizes the CTD110.6 α-O-GlcNAc monoclonal antibody. Lane 2 contains 5 ng of the positive control (O-GlcNAc-modified BSA) provided in the kit. No α-crystallin is detected using the antibody detection system. See FIG. 7.
  • Example 20 Multiplex Detection of O-GlcNAc Proteins, Phosphoproteins and Total Proteins in the Same 2-D gel
  • Soluble extracts from GlcNAz-fed Jurkat cells were labeled with UV excitable alkyne dye for 2 hours. The chloroform/methanol precipitated proteins were run on 2-D gels as described previously. The gel was rinsed in water and imaged with UV transillumination and 600/bp emission on a Lumi-Imager™ (Roche). The gel was then stained with Pro-Q® Diamond phosphoprotein stain, imaged with 532 nm excitation/580 LP emission on a FLA-3000 laser imager, stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein stain, and imaged again with 473 nm excitation and 580 nm longpass emission according to the manufacturer's instructions. See FIG. 8.
  • Example 21 Multiplexed Western Blot Detection of O-GlcNAc and Cofilin
  • 25 μg of soluble Jurkat cell proteins from Example 12 were run on 2-D gels as described and blotted onto PVDF membrane. The PVDF membrane was incubated in α-cofilin polyclonal Ab and detected with GAR-HRP secondary Ab with ECL Plus™ detection (GE Biosystems). After imaging, the blot was incubated in streptavidin AP and O-GlcNAc proteins were detected using the WesternBreeze® chemiluminescent detection kit (Invitrogen). See FIG. 9.
  • Example 22 Differential Detection of O-GlcNAc Modified Proteins in Control and Inhibitor-Treated Cultured Cell Extracts
  • Jurkat cells cultured overnight with Ac4GlcNAz with and without PUGNAc treatment. PUGNAc is a commonly used inhibitor of O-GlcNAcase. Soluble Jurkat lysate preparations were labeled with fluorescent alkyne. Lane 1) cells treated with 50 μM PUGNAc and 4 mM glucosamine 3 hrs prior to harvest; Lane 2) no treatment; Lanes 3-5) cells cultured overnight with 250 μM Ac4GlcNAz; Lanes 6-8) cells cultured overnight with 250 μM Ac4GlcNAz then treated with 50 μM PUGNAc and additional 250 μM Ac4GlcNAz 3 hrs prior to harvest. Proteins treated with PUGNAc (lanes 6-8) show a marked increase in O-GlcNAc staining over the untreated controls (lanes 3-5). See FIG. 10.
  • Example 23 In-gel ligation of glycoproteins
  • Fluorescent alkyne compounds for use in in-gel ligation are shown in FIG. 12 (A-D). Additionally, 2 potential fluorogenic alkynes are shown in E and F. The TAMRA-alkyne compound, shown in the upper left-hand frame, was used in in-gel staining experiments whereby azido groups were incorporated into proteins in vitro using a reactive azido-succinimidyl ester, or in vivo, by feeding cells azido-modified sugars.
  • Example 24 Azide-Alkyne Reaction Conditions for In-Gel or Western Blot Detection
  • The proteins should be in 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0 with 1.0% SDS. Final volume is 200 uL.
    Component Volume Final
    Protein in 1% SDS, 50 mMTris pH8 50 uL 100-200 ug
    Tris-HCl, pH 8.0 (1 M) 7.5 uL 50 mM
    Propylene glycol 50 uL 25%
    CuSO4 (50 mM) 4 uL 1 mM
    DMSO, 0.5 M 4 uL 10 mM
    H20 62.5 uL to 200 uL
    Alkyne compound 2 uL 10 uM
    1 mM (eg TAMRA or biotin)
    Na Ascorbate (100 mM) 10 uL 5 mM

    Combine all components adding the ascorbate last. Vortex gently.
    Add 10 uL of 100 mM BCS (it will turn orange if CuI is present).
    Vortex gently.
    Layer with argon.
    Mix on rotator at room temperature for 1 hour.
  • After the reaction, chloroform/methanol precipitate the protein using the following protocol:
    200 uL Reaction
    600 uL MeOH,. vortex 20 secs, (freeze 30′if
    protein amt. is low)
    200 uL chloroform vortex 20 secs
    450 uL H2O vortex 20 secs
    Spin @ 18 Kxg for 5 min
    Remove upper phase and add 450 MeOH. Vortex 20 secs
    Spin @ 18 Kxg for 5 min
    Remove supernatant and discard
    Add 600 uL MeOH only, vortex,
    and briefly sonicate to disperse pellet
    Spin @ 18 Kxg for 5 min
  • Na Ascorbate (mw 198) dilution to 100 mM:
    Na Ascorbate, dry,  5 mg
    H2O 250 uL
  • Cell lysates were obtained from cultured Jurkat cells that were fed azido-modified sugars. FIG. 13, shows the results of electrophoresis of proteins labeled with the TAMRA-Alkyne compound using the protocol provided. Lanes 2, 3, and 4 on the left side of the gel represent cellular extracts that had incorporated azido-modified sugars, lane 1 is the control, non-azide sugar fed cells. On the right, control azide labeled proteins (ovalbumin and myoglobin) (+) or non-labeled controls (−) are shown at varying concentrations. The results show very efficient and selective in-gel detection of azido-modified proteins.
  • Example 25
  • 2.5 μg each of azido-ovalbumin and azido-myoglobin were spiked into 80 ug of unlabeled Jurkat lysate. The lysate was then labeled with TAMRA alkyne for 2 hrs. The reaction contained 50 mM TRIS pH8, 25% propylene glycol, 1 mM CuSO4, 5 mM sodium ascorbate, 20 uM TAMRA alkyne. The reactions were performed with and without a chelator (10 mM of either TPEN, EDTA, bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS) or neocuproine). The control reaction was performed without CuSO4. After labeling, the samples were precipitated, resolubilized in 7 mM urea/2 mM thiourea/65 mM DTT/2% CHAPS/ and approximately 30 μg of each sample was analyzed on 2-D gels (pH 4-7 IEF strips, 4-12% BIS-TRIS gels with MOPS buffer). The TAMRA signal was imaged at 532 nm excitation, 580 long pass emission on a Fuji FLA3000 then the gels were post-stained with SYPRO® Ruby total protein gel stain (FIG. 14 A). The results show that addition of chelator greatly improves the resolution of the protein separation. bathocuproine disulfonic acid (BCS), a Cu I chelator, gives the best results. See total protein stain, FIG. 14 B.
  • In a second experiment, the samples and click labeling conditions were the same, except that chelator treatments included the addition of either 5 mM TPEN, BCS, or Neocuproine at the beginning of the reaction. After labeling, the samples were precipitated, resolubilized in LDS buffer+5 mM TCEP and serial 2-fold dilutions were performed. Dilutions were loaded onto 4-12% BIS-TRIS gels with MOPS running buffer (250 ng each of ovalbumin and myglobin in lane 1). FIG. 15 A shows that the chelators reduce the background of the image for the TAMRA signal without compromising sensitivity. In FIG. 15 B, post-staining with Sypro® Ruby total protein gel stain shows that the band resolution is much better for the samples with chelator.
  • A further experiment testing the effect of chelators used the same click labeling conditions except that the chelator treatments included addition of either 7 mM, 5 mM, or 2 mM BCS; or 7 mM, 5 mM, or 2 mM neocuproine. The lanes marked with an asterisk in FIG. 16 indicate reactions in which the CuSO4 and BCS were added to the reaction and vortexed prior adding the sodium ascorbate. In all other reactions the CuSO4 and sodium ascorbate were added and vortexed prior to adding the BCS. The gels show that it is imperative to add the sodium ascorbate and CuSO4 to the reaction tube and mix prior to adding the chelator. If the chelator and CuSO4 are added and vortexed prior to adding the sodium acorbate, the azide-alkyne labeling does not proceed, suggesting that the chelator inhibits the reduction of Cu (II) to Cu (I).
  • Example 26 Enzymatic Labeling of Antibodies Using Click Chemistry
  • Goat IgG antibodies were reduced and alkylated, then deglycosylated in 2 separate aliquots using Endo Hf enzyme. Deglycosylated antibodies (2 separate preps) were then labeled with GalNAz using 33 ng/uL Gal T1 Y289L enzyme and 500 uM UDP GalNAz (0.5 ug/uL goat antibody) in a 150 uL reaction. Reactions were incubated at 4 degrees C. overnight. 4-500 ng of goat antibody (treated as listed on gel; either no-GalNAz control or azide labeled) was loaded into each lane of a 4-12% Bis Tris gel. Electrophoresis was performed at 200 v for ˜50 min. using MES buffer. Gels were stained with TAMRA-alkyne stain and imaged on the Fuji imager at 532 nm (excitation) and 580 nm emission. Gels were poststained with SYPRO Ruby using the overnight protocol. See FIG. 17
  • Example 27 Synthesis of Cy™5.5Azide
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00012
  • To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.034 mmol) in DMF (0.1 mL) and DIEA (6.0 μL, 0.034 mmol) was added Cy™5.5 succinimidyl ester (5 mg, 3.4 nmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 10 min, the reaction solution was concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified via HPLC.
  • Example 28 Synthesis of Cy™3Azide
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00013
  • To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.052 mmol) in DMF (0.1 mL) and DIEA (9.2 μL, 0.052 mmol) was added Cy™3 succinimidyl ester (5.0 mg, 5.2 nmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 10 min, the reaction solution was concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified via HPLC.
  • Example 29 Synthesis of Cy™5.5Alkyne
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00014
  • To a solution of Cy™5.5 succinimidyl ester (GE Amersham, 5.0 mg, 3.7 nmol) in DMF (0.1 mL) was added propargylamine (2.5 μL, 0.037 mmol) and H2O (0.2 mL). The solution was stirred at RT for 30 min then concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified via HPLC.
  • Example 30 Synthesis of Cy™3Alkyne
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00015
  • To a solution of Cy™3 succinimidyl ester (GE Amersham, 5.0 mg, 5.7 nmol) in DMF (0.1 mL) was added propargylamine (3.9 μL, 0.057 mmol) and H2O (0.2 mL). The solution was stirred at RT for 30 min then concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified via HPLC.
  • Example 31 Metabolic labeling with azido farnesyl alcohol and detection with Click-iT™ TAMRA detection reagent
  • COS7 and Jurkat cells were fed Lovastatin to suppress endogenous isoprenylation and azido-farnesyl alcohol (FN3-OH) for 36 or 72 hours. The dose was either 25 μM Lovastatin and 20 uM FN3-OH or 50 μM lovastatin and 50 μM FN3-OH. The media was replaced (including FN3-OH, but not lovastatin) for one set of samples cultured for 72 hours. Lysates were prepared by washing the cells 3 times with PBS and lysing with 1% SDS/100 mM TRIS pH 8+ protease inhibitors (1 mL of lysis buffer per 100 cm culture dish). The lysate was sonicated, heated at 70° C. for 10 minutes then 200 μL aliquots were precipitated and frozen. Precipitated pellets were resolubilized with 50 μL of 1% SDS/100 mM TRIS pH 8, labeled with the TAMRA Click-iT™ detection kit (C33370) and 20 μg was analyzed on a 4-12% BIS-TRIS gel using MOPS buffer. The gels were imaged on the BioRad FX imager using the 532 nm laser and 555 nm long pass emission filter. The gels were post-stained with SYPRO® Ruby protein gel stain and imaged using the 488 nm laser and 555 nm long pass emission filter.
  • Example 32 Metabolic labeling with azido fatty acid analogs and detection with “click” reagents
  • Azido-labeled fatty acid compounds, such as the palmitate compound shown below, or alkyne-labeled fatty acid compounds are added to cultured cells for a time period that allows the compound to enter the cells and become incorporated into fatty acid-modified macromolecules, including proteins. Compounds that facilitate entry of the analogs into the cells can also be used. After labeling, the cells are lysed and cellular azide- or alkyne-modified proteins are labeled using the appropriate click partner probe in the presence of copper(I), or copper(II) in the presence of a copper(II) reducing agent, a copper(I) chelating agent such as BCS, and an appropriate buffer to maintain optimal pH conditions.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00016
  • Example 33 Metabolic labeling with azido fatty acid analogs and detection with “click” reagents
  • Azido-labeled fatty acid compounds, such as the palmitate compound shown below, or alkyne-labeled fatty acid compounds are added to cellular extracts in vitro, or under in vitro translation conditions. The fatty acylated proteins are detected by labeling the azide- or alkyne-modified proteins using the appropriate click partner probe in the presence of copper(I), or copper(II) in the presence of a copper(II) reducing agent, a copper(I) chelating agent such as BCS, and an appropriate buffer to maintain optimal pH conditions.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00017
  • Example 34 Palmitic acid azide synthesis
  • The synthesis of palmitic acid azide is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00018
  • To a solution of 16-bromohexadecanoic acid (0.50 g, 1.49 mmol) in DMSO (10 mL) was added sodium azide (0.14 g, 2.24 mmol). The reaction was stirred at RT overnight. The solution was then cooled in an ice bath and quenched with water (10 mL). After stirring for 5 min, the ice bath was removed and the solution was allowed to warm to RT on its own. The resulting solution was then extracted with diethyl ether (2×60 mL) and the organic layers were combined, rinsed with saturated NaCl (3×10 mL), then dried over sodium sulfate. The solution was decanted, concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography (10-25% EtOAc/hexanes containing 1% acetic acid) to afford a clear, colorless oil (0.33 g, 75%). TLC (25% EtOAc/hexanes) Rf=0.54, faint UV, brown spot if treated with PPh3/toluene then stained with ninhydrin. IR (KBr pellet) 2126.9 cm−1.
  • Example 35 Succinimidyl ester azide synthesis
  • The synthesis of succinimidyl ester azide is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00019
  • 6-(Boc-Amino)-hexanyl-1-p-toluenesulfonate
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00020
  • To a solution of 6-(Boc-amino)-1-hexanol (3.0 g, 13.8 mmol) in CHCl3 (50 mL) was added TEA (3.8 mL, 27.6 mmol) and p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (3.9 g, 20.7 mmol). The solution was stirred at RT overnight, diluted with CHCl3 (200 mL), washed with H2O (4×50 mL), rinsed with brine (1×50 mL) and dried over Na2SO4. The solution was decanted, concentrated and purified via silica gel chromatography (6.0×41 cm, 20-70% EtOAc/hexanes) to afford the product as a white solid (3.5 g, 69%). TLC (35% EtOAC/hexanes) Rf=0.72, UV active.
  • 6-(Boc-Amino)-hexanyl-1-azide
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00021
  • To a solution of 6-(Boc-amino)-hexanyl-1-p-toluenesulfonate (3.2 g, 8.63 mmol) in DMF (21 mL) was added sodium azide (1.12 g, 17.3 mmol). The solution was refluxed at 95° C. overnight. After cooling to RT, the solution was diluted with Et2O (160 mL) and washed with H2O (100 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted a second time with Et2O (100 mL) and the combined organics were dried over Na2SO4. After decanting and concentrating, the crude material was purified via silica gel chromatography (6×26 cm, 25-30% EtOAc/hexanes) to afford the product as a clear, colorless oil (2.0 g, 97%). TLC, (35% EtOAC/hexanes) Rf=0.74, brown spot with ninhydrin stain.
  • 6-(Amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00022
  • To a solution of 6-(Boc-amino)-hexanyl-1-azide (0.2 g, 0.83 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.0 mL) was added TFA (1.0 mL). The solution was stirred at RT for 2 h, evaporated to dryness and re-evaporated twice from toluene. The product, 6-amino-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (0.83 mmol) was used directly without further purification/
  • (N-6-Azido-hexanyl)glutaramide
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00023
  • 6-Amino-hexanyl-1-azide (0.83 mmol) was dissolved in THF (1.0 mL) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.29 mL, 1.65 mmol) was added. The solution was stirred at RT for 10 min then glutaric anhydride (0.47 g, 4.13 mmol) was added. The pale yellow solution was stirred at RT overnight. The reaction solution was diluted with CHCl3 (30 mL) and H2O (10 mL), and acidified to a pH of 1 with 1% HCl; the organic layer was removed. The aqueous layer was extracted two more times with CHCl3 (2×30 mL). The combined organic layers were rinsed with brine (2×10 mL) and dried over Na2SO4. The solution was decanted, and concentrated. The crude was purified via silica gel chromatography (10% MeOH/CHCl3 containing 0.1% AcOH) to afford the product as a clear, colorless oil (0.16 g, 75%). The column was loaded with 10% MeOH/CHCl3. TLC (10% MeOH/CHCl3 with 0.1% AcOH)Rf=0.41, pink with p-anisaldehyde stain, no UV activity.
  • (N-6-Azido-hexanyl)glutaramide, succinimidyl ester
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00024
  • To a solution of the (N-6-azido-hexanyl) glutaramide (75 mg, 0.29 mmol) in THF (4.0 mL) was added pyridine (110 μL, 1.36 mmol) followed by succinimidyl trifluoroacetate (200 mg, 0.95 mmol). The clear, colorless solution was stirred at RT for 4 h. The reaction solution was diluted with CHCl3 (20 mL) and rinsed sequentially with 1% AcOH (2×5 mL), H2O (2×5 mL) and brine (1×5 mL). The crude solution was dried over Na2SO4, decanted, and concentrated to afford the product as a clear, colorless oil (0.10 g, 99%). TLC: (1:1, EtOAc/hexanes) Rf=0.64, orange with ninhydrin, UV active.
  • Example 36 Succinimidyl ester alkyne synthesis
  • The synthesis of succinimidyl ester alkyne is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00025
  • 10-Undecynoic acid succinimidyl ester
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00026
  • To a solution of 10-undecynoic acid (0.40 g, 2.2 mmol) in CH3CN (10 mL) was added O—(N-succinimidyl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate (0.99 g, 3.29 mmol). After stirring for 2 min at RT, the reaction was quenched with 1% AcOH and diluted with CHCl3 (150 mL). The organic solution was then extracted with 1% AcOH (10 mL), rinsed with H2O (2×40 mL), then dried over Na2SO4. The solution was then decanted and concentrated. A quantitative yield was assumed and the material was taken on directly to the next step. TLC (10% MeOH/CHCl3) Rf=0.90, UV active.
  • tert-Butyl alkyne
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00027
  • To a solution of 10-undecynoic acid succinimidyl ester (0.61 g, 2.19 mmol) in CH3CN (8 mL) was added amino-dPEG™2-tert-butyl ester (0.46 g, 1.97 mmol, Quanta BioDesign) in CH3CN (2 mL) at RT. After 2 hrs, the solution was diluted with CHCl3 (50 mL) and extracted with H2O (5 mL). The aqueous layer was reextracted with CHCl3 (2×50 mL). Combined organics were dried over Na2SO4, decanted and concentrated. The crude was purified via silica gel chromatography (2.5% MeOH/CHCl3) to afford the product as a clear, pale yellow oil (0.48 g, 55%). TLC (9:1 CH3CN:H2O)Rf=0.81.
  • Succinimidyl ester alkyne
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00028
  • To a solution of tert-butyl alkyne (0.48 g, 1.2 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2.0 mL) was added TFA (2.0 mL). The solution was stirred for 1 h, then concentrated and reevaporated from toluene (2×1 mL). The resulting brown residue was dissolved in CH3CN (5.0 mL) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.84 mL, 4.83 mmol) was added. The solution was stirred at RT for 2 min, and then O—(N-succinimidyl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate (0.47 g, 1.56 mmol) was added. After 15 min the reaction was quenched and acidified with 1% AcOH to a pH of 4-5. The solution was extracted with CHCl3 (3×50 mL). The combined organics were reextracted with H2O (1×10 mL), then dried over Na2SO4, decanted and concentrated to afford a tan solid (0.46 g, 87%). The crude material was pure enough for testing without further purification. TLC (8:2 CH3CN/H2O)Rf=0.79.
  • Example 37 Iodoacetamide azide synthesis
  • The synthesis of Iodoacetamide azide is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00029
  • 6-(iodoacetamide)-aminohexanyl-1-azide
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00030
  • To a solution of 6-amino-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (35 mg, 0.14 mmol) in DMF (0.1 mL) was added iodoacetic anhydride (0.10 g, 0.28 mmol) in the dark. After 2 hr, the reaction was stopped and the solution was partitioned between CHCl3 (10 mL) and H2O (10 mL). The organic layer was removed and the aqueous layer was reextracted with CHCl3 (1×10 mL). The combined organics were rinsed with saturated NaCl (1×5 mL), dried over Na2SO4, decanted and concentrated. Purification via silica gel chromatography (2% MeOH/CHCl3 containing 0.1% AcOH) provided the product (35 mg, 81%) as a yellow oil. TLC (10% MeOH/CHCl3) Rf=0.75.
  • Example 38 Iodoacetamide alkyne synthesis
  • The synthesis of Iodoacetamide alkyne is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00031
  • N-(iodoacetamide)-propargylamine. To a solution of propargylamine in DMF was added iodoacetic anhydride in the dark. After 2 hr, the reaction was stopped and the solution was partitioned between CHCl3 and H2O. The organic layer was removed and the aqueous layer was reextracted with CHCl3. The combined organics were rinsed with saturated NaCl, dried over Na2SO4, decanted and concentrated.
  • Example 39 Maleimide alkyne synthesis
  • The synthesis of Maleimide alkyne is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00032
  • Propargylamine maleimide. After the reaction of propargylamine and maleic anhydride in the presence of TEA, the intermediate acid was cyclized in the presence of acetic anhydride and sodium acetate at 70° C., to afford the desired propargylamine maleimide.
  • Example 40 Maleimide azide synthesis
  • The synthesis of Maleimide azide is shown in the following reaction scheme.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00033
  • N-(6-Azido-aminohexyl)maleimide. After the reaction of 6-amino-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt and maleic anhydride in the presence of TEA, the intermediate acid was cyclized in the presence of acetic anhydride and sodium acetate at 70° C., to afford the desired N-(6-azido-aminohexyl)maleimide.
  • Example 41 Addition of thioacetate-azide and amino-azide following Ba(OH)2 catalyzed β-elimination of RII phosphopeptide (NB B883-9-TN)
  • RII phosphopeptide (DLDVPIPGRFDRRVpSVAAE, 2192.08 Da) was azido-labeled by simultaneous β-elimination of the phosphate and addition of either thioacetate-azide or amino-azide to the resulting dehydroalanine residue. 2 nmol of peptide and 3 μmol of azide tag was incubated in 30 μL of 0.1M barium hydroxide for 2 hours at 35° C. After incubation, the barium was precipitated with 7 μL of 0.5M ammonium sulfate. After centrifugation, the supernatant was neutralized with 3 μL of glacial acetic acid, then desalted on a Vivapure RP microfilter. The peptide was eluted in 10 μL of 90% acetonitrile/0.1% TFA and analyzed by MALDI in positive reflectron mode (spot 0.5 μL of eluate and 0.5 μL of 6 mg/mL α-cyano-4-hydroxycinnamic acid). Under these conditions, all of the peptide is converted to addition product with thioacetate-azide as the addition reagent, whereas conversion is incomplete with amino-azide as the addition reagent. See FIGS. 18A and 18B.
    TABLE 3
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00034
  • Other catalysts that are not so basic but still effective in bringing about the elimination include tertiary amines and hindered secondary amines, such as but not limited to: phosphazene compounds, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, TEMED, triethanolamine 2,2,6,6-teramethylpiperidine, Proton Sponge DABCO, N-methylmorpholine 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 4-pyrrolidinylpyridine, an ion exchange resin such as Dowez 1 hydrixide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltriethylammonium hydroxide, or other phase transfer bases calcium hydroxide, barium hydroxide, or gallium hydroxide (which will also complex the phosphate group).
  • Example 42 Tagging phosphoproteins using nucleotide analogs
  • Phosphoproteins could be labeled in vivo or in vitro using alkyne or azide-tagged nucleotides whereby the azide or alkyne moiety is placed on the gamma phosphate. For example one of the nucleotides shown below is added to a reaction mixture containing a protein kinase and a kinase target molecule. After tagging the molecule is reacted with the appropriate alkyne or azide detection or affinity reagent for quantitation, visualization, or enrichment. In one example reaction, modified nucleotide substrates may be added directly to cultured cells for metabolic incorporation of the tagged gamma-phosphate molecule into cellular macromolecules including proteins. The process may involve treatment of the cells with pharmacological agents to detect alterations in phosphorylation dynamics. Entry of the compounds into live cultured cells could be enhanced by modifying the nucleotides with functional groups that would afford permeability, or by concomitant addition of cell permeablizing agents. In another example reaction, the kinase reaction could be performed in vitro using cellular extracts as the source of kinases and substrates. The modified nucleotides would be added to the reaction mixture and the reaction mixtures incubated with or without the addition of pharmacological agents of interest. The in vitro reaction may also entail adding an exogenous kinase or substrate source to the cellular extract along with the nucleotide analogs. In another application, the method could be used in vitro without cellular extracts, using purified kinases and kinase substrates. In all of the described examples the reaction mix may contain a buffer optimized for the particular kinases of interest, a kinase source, a metal ion source, glycerol, nucleotide ATP analog, and ATP. The “click” detection reaction with an alkyne probe would be performed in the presence of copper(I), or copper(II) in the presence of a copper(II) reducing agent, a copper(I) chelating agent, and an appropriate buffer to maintaining optimal pH conditions.
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00035
  • Example 43 Azido and Alkyne Reporter Molecules
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00036
  • 5-TAMRA azide. To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.19 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (33 μL, 0.19 mmol) was added 5-carboxytetramethylrhodamine, succinimidyl ester (5-TAMRA-SE, 50 mg, 0.094 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 10 min, the reaction solution was concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified via silica gel chromatography (prep plate, 9:1 CH3CN: H2O) to afford the product as a pink solid (45.6 mg, 87%). TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) Rf=0.61, pink fluorescent spot; ESI-pos m/z 555 M+, C31H35N6O4 (requires 555).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00037
  • PEG-biotin azide. To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.17 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (60 μL, 0.34 mmol) was added NHS-PEO4-biotin (Pierce, 50 mg, 0.08 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT overnight, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified via silica gel chromatography (7:1 CHCl3: MeOH) to afford the product as a cloudy, white residue (12.3 mg, 12%). TLC (7:1, CHCl3: MeOH, 8:2) Rf=0.54, faint UV active spot, stains pink with biotin dip; ESI-pos m/z 616 M+, C27H49N7O7S (requires 616).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00038
  • Rhodamine Green™ azide (mix of 5- and 6-isomers). To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.20 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (50 μL, 0.28 mmol) was added Rhodamine Green™ carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester, hydrochloride (mix of 5- and 6-isomers, 50 mg, 0.10 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 2 h the solution was concentrated in vacuo. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 5-50% CH3CN (over 60 min) in 25 mM TEAA, pH=4.7, flow rate of 20 mL/min) gave 21.1 mg of product (43%) tR=43-47 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O: AcOH, 8:1:1) Rf=0.74, fluorescent yellow spot; ESI-pos m/z 499 (M+H, C27H27N6O4 requires 499).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00039
  • Alexa Fluor® 488 azide (5 isomer). To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.44 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (0.11 mL, 0.88 mmol) was added Alexa Fluor® 4885-carboxylic acid, 2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl ester, bis(triethylammonium salt) (200 mg, 0.22 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 1 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 0-60% CH3CN (over 30 min) in 25 mM TEAA, pH=4.7, flow rate of 20 mL/min) gave 58.1 mg of product (30%) tR=23-27 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) Rf=0.58, fluorescent yellow spot; ESI-neg m/z 657 (M, C27H25N6O10S2 requires 657).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00040
  • Alexa Fuor® 546 azide. To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.093 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (32 μL, 0.19 mmol) was added Alexa Fluor® 546 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester, (50 mg, 0.05 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 2 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo.
  • HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 10-60% CH3CN (over 60 min) in 25 mM TEAA, pH=4.7, flow rate of 20 mL/min) gave 27.2 mg of product (54%) tR=48-52 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 9:1) Rf=0.24, fluorescent pink spot; ESI-neg m/z 1084 (M, C46H55Cl3N7O11S3 requires 1084).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00041
  • Alexa Fluor® 594 azide (5 isomer). To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.12 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (42 μL, 0.24 mmol) was added Alexa Fluor® 594 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester *5-isomer* (50 mg, 0.06 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 2 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 25-60% CH3CN (over 30 min) in 25 mM TEAA, pH=4.7, flow rate of 20 mL/min) gave 16.5 mg of product (32%) tR=23-25 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 9:1) Rf=0.36, fluorescent red spot; ESI-neg m/z 845 (M, C41H45N6O10S2 requires 845).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00042
  • Dapoxyl azide. To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide trifluoroacetic acid salt (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.25 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) and DIEA (43 μL, 0.25 mmol) was added Dapoxyl® carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (50 mg, 0.12 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 1 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. Purified by SPE (Supelco C18 DSC) to give 41.6 mg of product (78%); ESI-pos m/z 433 (M+, C24H28N6O2 requires 433).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00043
  • Oregon Green® 488-alkyne. To a solution of Oregon Green® 488 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (50 mg, 0.98 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) was added propargylamine (0.26 μL, 0.40 mmol) and H2O (0.1 mL). After stirring at RT for 15 min, the solution was concentrated. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent
  • 15-30% CH3Cn in 25 mM TEAA pH 4.7, flow rate of 15 mL/min) gave 44.5 mg of product (99%) tR=5-13 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) Rf=0.60, fluorescent yellow spot; ESI-neg m/z 448 (M−H+, C24H12F2NO6 requires 448).
  • Alkyne Biotin Compounds
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00044

    Alkynyl-PEG-biotin. To a solution of NHS-PEO4-biotin (Pierce, 25 mg, 0.004 mmol) in DMF (0.1 mL) at RT was added propargylamine (0.3 mL, 4.5 mmol). After stirring for 3 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo and re-evaporated twice from toluene. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 35-50% MeOH in 25 mM NH4Ac, pH 6.5, flow rate of 15 mL/min) gave 14.4 mg, (64%, a white solid) tR=26-30 min; TLC (CHCl3:MeOH, 7:1) Rf=0.20, UV active spot; ESI m/z 529 (M+H+, C24H40N4O7S requires 529).
    Alkyne Dyes:
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00045

    5-TAMRA-alkyne. To a solution of 5-carboxytetramethyl rhodamine, succinimidyl ester (5-TAMRA-SE, 0.10 g, 0.19 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) was added propargylamine (25 μL, 0.38 mmol) and H2O (0.5 mL). After stirring the solution for 30 min at RT, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 25-40% CH3CN in 25 mM TEAA, pH 4.7, flow rate of 15 mL/min) gave 68 mg of product (82%, a purple solid) tR=23-33 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) Rf=0.67, fluorescent orange spot; ESI m/z 469 (M+H+, C28H26N3O4 requires 469).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00046
  • Oregon Green® 488-alkyne. To a solution of Oregon Green® 488 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (50 mg, 0.98 mmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) was added propargylamine (0.26 μL, 0.40 mmol) and H2O (0.1 mL). After stirring at RT for 15 min, the solution was concentrated. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 15-30% CH3Cn in 25 mM TEAA pH 4.7, flow rate of 15 mL/min) gave 44.5 mg of product (99%) tR=5-13 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) Rf=0.60, fluorescent yellow spot; ESI-neg m/z 448 (M−H+, C24H12F2NO6 requires 448).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00047
  • Alexa Fluor® 532-alkyne. To a solution of Alexa Fluor® 532 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (51 mg, 0.07 mmol) in DMF (4.0 mL) was added propargylamine (0.1 mL) and H2O (1.0 mL). The solution was stirred at RT for 1 h then concentrated in vacuo to afford the crude product. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 25-40% CH3CN in 25 mM NH4Ac, pH 4.7, flow rate of 15 mL/min) gave 30 mg of product (65%, a red solid) tR=23-30 min; TLC (CH3CN:H2O, 1:1) Rf=0.58, fluorescent red spot; ESI m/z 664 (M+, C33H34N3O8S2 requires 664).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00048
  • Alexa Fluor® 488-alkyne. To a solution of Alexa Fluor® 488 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester, dilithium salt, mixed isomers, (51 mg, 0.08 mmol) in DMF (2.0 mL) was added propargylamine (54 μL, 0.80 mmol). The solution was stirred at RT for 4 h then concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified using column chromatography on silica gel (CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) to afford 20 mg (44%, an orange solid). TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 3:1) Rf=0.68; ESI-neg m/z 570 (M−2, C24H16N3O10S2 2− requires 570).
    Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00049
  • Alexa Fluor® 568-azide. To a solution of 6-(amino)-hexanyl-1-azide (see Scheme 1 for synthesis, 0.04 mmol) in DMF (0.2 mL) and DIEA (7 μL, 0.04 mmol) was added Alexa Fluor® 568 carboxylic acid, succinimidyl ester (mix of isomers, 25 mg, 0.02 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 2.5 h, H2O (0.2 mL) was added and the solution was concentrated in vacuo. HPLC (Phenomenex Prodigy ODS, internal diameter 21.2 mm, eluent 20-35% CH3CN in 25 mM NH4Ac, pH 4.7, flow rate of 15 mL/min) gave 15.3 mg of product (99%) tR=24-30 min; TLC (CH3CN: H2O, 8:2) Rf=0.63, fluorescent pink spot; ESI-neg m/z 817 (M−2, C39H41N6O10S2 requires 817).
  • Example 44 Triarylphosphine Dye
  • Figure US20070249014A1-20071025-C00050
  • 5-TAMRA-triarylphosphine. To a solution of N-Boc-triarylphosphine-amine (see Scheme 2 for synthesis, 10 mg, 0.018 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.0 mL) was added TFA (0.5 mL). The reaction solution was stirred at RT for 30 min, concentrated in vacuo, and re-evaporated twice from toluene. The crude amine (0.018 mmol, 99%) was used directly in the next reaction without further purification.
  • To a solution of triarylphosphine-amine (0.018 mmol) in DMF (0.2 mL) and DIEA (12 μL, 0.089 mmol) was added 5-carboxytetramethylrhodamine, succinimidyl ester (5-TAMRA-SE, 9 mg, 0.022 mmol). After stirring the solution at RT for 2.5 h, the solution was concentrated in vacuo. HPLC (Phenomenex Luna C18(2), internal diameter 10 mm, eluent 40-55% CH3CN in 25 mM NH4Ac, pH=7, flow rate of 5.0 mL/min) gave 4.1 mg of product (27%) tR=32-34 min; TLC (MeOH:CHCl3, 1:9) Rf=0.67, fluorescent pink spot; ESI m/z 848 (M+H+, C50H48N4O7P requires 848).
  • The reagents employed in the examples are commercially available or can be prepared using commercially available instrumentation, methods, or reagents known in the art. All references cited herein are incorporated by reference in their entireties. The foregoing examples illustrate various aspects of the invention and practice of the methods of the invention. The examples are not intended to provide an exhaustive description of the many different embodiments of the invention. Thus, although the forgoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, those of ordinary skill in the art will realize readily that many changes and modifications can be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.
  • U.S. Patent applications with attorney docket numbers IVGN 745.1 and IVGN 745.2, both filed on Feb. 12, 2007, claiming priority to U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 60/772,221 and 60/804,640 are hereby incorporated by reference.

Claims (40)

1. A method of forming glycoprotein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting the glycoprotein with UDP-GalNAz in the presence of a Gal T enzyme to form an azido modified glycoprotein;
b) contacting the azido modified glycoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises an azide reactive moiety to form glycoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
2. The method according to claim 1, wherein the azide reactive moiety is a terminal alkyne or a terminal triaryl phosphine.
3. The method according to claim 1, wherein the reporter molecule is a xanthene, cyanine, coumarin, borapolyazaindacene or pyrene dye.
4. The method according to claim 1, wherein the reporter molecule is an enzyme substrate or hapten.
5. The claim according to claim 1, wherein the azido modified glycoprotein is an antibody.
6. The method according to claim 1, wherein the carrier molecule is an amino acid, a peptide, a protein, a polysaccharide, a nucleotide, a nucleoside, an oligonucleotide, a nucleic acid, a hapten, a psoralen, a drug, a hormone, a lipid, a lipid assembly, a synthetic polymer, a polymeric microparticle, a biological cell or a virus.
7. The method according to claim 1, wherein the carrier molecule comprises an antibody or fragment thereof, an avidin or streptavidin, a biotin, a blood component protein, a dextran, an enzyme, an enzyme inhibitor, a hormone, an IgG binding protein, a fluorescent protein, a growth factor, a lectin, a lipopolysaccharide, a microorganism, a metal binding protein, a metal chelating moiety, a non-biological microparticle, a peptide toxin, a phosphotidylserine-binding protein, a structural protein, a small-molecule drug, or a tyramide.
8. The method according to claim 1, wherein the solid support is a microfluidic chip, a silicon chip, a microscope slide, a microplate well, silica gels, polymeric membranes, particles, derivatized plastic films, glass beads, cotton, plastic beads, alumina gels, polysaccharides, polyvinylchloride, polypropylene, polyethylene, nylon, latex bead, magnetic bead, paramagnetic bead, or superparamagnetic bead.
9. The method according to claim 1, wherein the solid support is Sepharose, poly(acrylate), polystyrene, poly(acrylamide), polyol, agarose, agar, cellulose, dextran, starch, FICOLL, heparin, glycogen, amylopectin, mannan, inulin, nitrocellulose, diazocellulose or starch.
10. A method of forming a glycoprotein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting a protein with an azido modified carbohydrate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the azido modified carbohydrate to the protein to form an azido modified glycoprotein;
b) contacting the azido modified glycoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises a terminal alkyne to form glycoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
11. A method of forming a glycoprotein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting a protein with a terminal alkyne modified carbohydrate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the terminal alkyne modified carbohydrate to the protein to form a terminal alkyne modified glycoprotein;
b) contacting the terminal alkyne modified glycoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises an azido moiety to form glycoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
12. A method for forming a phosphoprotein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting a protein with a terminal alkyne modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the terminal alkyne modified phosphate to the protein to form a terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein;
b) contacting the terminal alkyne modified phosphoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises an azido moiety to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
13. A method for forming a phosphoprotein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting a protein with an azido modified phosphate in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the azido modified phosphate to the protein to form a azido modified phosphoprotein;
b) contacting the azido modified phosphoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises a terminal alkyne to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
14. A method for forming a phosphoprotein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting a phosphoprotein with a base solution that removes phosphates from threonine and serine residues of the phosphorylated protein to form a protein comprising dehydroalanine or dehydroamino-2-butyric acid;
b) contacting the dehydroalanine or dehydroamino-2-butyric acid with a compound that comprises a thiol or amine group and an azide or terminal alkyne to form an azido or alkyne modified protein;
c) contacting the terminal alkyne or azido modified phosphoprotein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises an azido moiety to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
15. A method for forming a post translationally modified protein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting a protein with an azido modified post translational moiety in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the azido modified post translational moiety to the protein to form a azido modified protein;
b) contacting the azido modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises a terminal alkyne to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
16. A method for forming a post translationally modified protein conjugate, wherein the method comprises:
a) contacting a protein with a terminal alkyne modified post translational moiety in the presence of an enzyme that will transfer the terminal alkyne modified post translational moiety to the protein to form a terminal alkyne modified protein;
b) contacting the terminal alkyne modified protein with a reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support that comprises an azido moiety to form phosphoprotein reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support conjugate.
17. A method of detecting an azido modified biomoelcule, comprising:
a) forming an azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture comprising:
a reporter molecule that comprises a terminal alkyne moiety:
an azido modified biomoelcule;
copper ions;
at least one reducing agent; and
a copper chelator;
b) incubating the azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture for a sufficient amount of time to form a biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate;
c) separating the biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate by size and/or weight of the glycoprotein-reporter molecule conjugate to form a separated biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate;
d) illuminating the separated biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated biomoelcule-reporter molecule conjugate;
e) observing the illuminated biomolecule-reporter molecule conjugate wherein the glycoprotein is detected.
18. The method according to claim 17, wherein the biomolecule is carbohydrate, a nucleic acid, a protein, or a peptide.
19. The method according to claim 17, wherein the biomolecule is a glycoprotein.
20. The method according to claim 17, wherein the reporter molecule is xanthene, cyanine, coumarin, borapolyazaindacene or pyrene dye.
21. The method according to claim 17, wherein the reporter molecule is an enzyme substrate, fluorescent protein or hapten.
22. The method according to claim 17, wherein the copper chelator is a copper I chelator.
23. The method according to claim 17, wherein the copper chelator is N,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(2-pyridylmethyl)ethylenediamine (TPEN), EDTA, neocuproine, N-(2-acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid (PDA), S-carboxymethyl-L-cysteine (SCMC), 1,10 phenanthroline, or a derivative thereof, trientine, glutathione, histadine, polyhistadine or tetra-ethylenepolyamine (TEPA).
24. The method according to claim 17, wherein the copper chelator is 1,10 phenanthroline, bathophenanthroline disulfonic acid (4,7odiphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonic acid) or bathocuproine disulfonic acid (2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate).
25. The method according to claim 17, wherein the reducing agent is acorbate, Tris(2-Carboxyethyl) Phosphine (TCEP), TCP (2,4,6-trichlorophenol), NADH, NADPH, thiosulfate, 2-mercaptoethanol, dithiothreotol, glutathione, cysteine, metallic copper, quinone, hydroquinone, vitamin K1, Fe2+, Co2+, and an applied electric potential.
26. The method according to claim 17, wherein the reducing agent is ascorbate.
27. The method according to claim 17, wherein the separating step comprises chromatography or electrophoresis.
28. The method according to claim 27, wherein the chromatography comprises one or more of FPLC, HPLC, liquid chromatography (LC), size exclusion chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, or affinity chromatography.
29. The method according to claim 27, wherein electrophoresis comprises gel electrophoresis, 1 dimensional (1D) gel electrophoresis, 2 dimensional (2D) gel electrophoresis, native gel electrophoresis, denaturing gel electrophoresis, isoelectric focusing, or capillary electrophoresis.
30. The method according to claim 27, further comprising Western blotting.
31. The method according to claim 17, wherein the azido modified biomoelcule is modified by the metabolic incorporation of azido modified carbohydrates.
32. The method according to claim 17, wherein the azido modified biomolecule is modified by the enzymatic incorporation of azido modified carbohydrates.
33. An azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture comprising:
a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule that comprises a terminal alkyne moiety:
an azido modified biomoelcule;
copper ions;
at least one reducing agent; and
a copper chelator.
34. The reaction mixture according to claim 33, wherein the copper chelator is a copper(I) chelator.
35. The method according to claim 33, wherein the copper chelator is NNNN-tetrakis(2-pyridylmethyl)ethylenediamine (TPEN), EDTA, neocuproine, N-(2-acetamido)iminodiacetic acid (ADA), pyridine-2,6-dicarboxylic acid (PDA), S-carboxymethyl-L-cysteine (SCMC), 1,10 phenanthroline, or a derivative thereof, trientine, or tetra-ethylenepolyamine (TEPA).
36. The method according to claim 33, wherein the copper chelator is 1,10 phenanthroline, bathophenanthroline disulfonic acid (4,7odiphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonic acid) or bathocuproine disulfonic acid (2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline disulfonate).
37. An azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction mixture comprising:
a reporter molecule, solid support or carrier molecule that comprises an azido moiety:
a biomoelcule comprising a terminal alkyne;
copper ions;
at least one reducing agent; and
a copper chelator.
38. A method for detecting immobilized azido modified biomolecules, wherein the method comprises:
a. immobilizing the azido modified biomolecules on a solid or semi-solid matrix to form an immobilized azido modified biomoelcule;
b. contacting the immobilized azido modified biomoelcule with a reporter molecule that contains an azide reactive group to form a contacted azido modified biomoelcule;
c. incubating the contacted azido modified biomoelcule for a sufficient amount of time to form a reporter molecule-biomoelcule conjugate;
d. illuminating the reporter molecule-biomoelcule conjugate with an appropriate wavelength to form an illuminated reporter molecule-biomoelcule conjugate;
e. observing the illuminated reporter molecule-biomoelcule conjugate whereby the immobilized azido modified biomolecule is detected.
39. The method according to claim 30, wherein the solid or semi-solid support is a slide, an array, an agarose gel, a polyacrylamide gel, a hydrogel, a polymeric particle or glass.
40. A kit comprising:
UDP-GalNAz;
a GalT enzyme;
an azide reactive reporter molecule, carrier molecule or solid support.
US11/674,140 2006-02-10 2007-02-12 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins Abandoned US20070249014A1 (en)

Priority Applications (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/674,140 US20070249014A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-12 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US11/674,623 US8114636B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-13 Labeling and detection of nucleic acids
US12/729,903 US20100261181A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2010-03-23 Labeling and detection of nucleic acids
US13/399,850 US20120301894A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2012-02-17 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US14/330,727 US9645140B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-07-14 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US14/447,230 US20140336079A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-07-30 Labeling and detection of nucleic acids
US15/474,901 US20170362624A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2017-03-30 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US16/738,274 US20200216871A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2020-01-09 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US77222106P 2006-02-10 2006-02-10
US80464006P 2006-06-13 2006-06-13
US11/674,140 US20070249014A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-12 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/674,136 Continuation US8716033B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-12 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins

Related Child Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/674,623 Continuation-In-Part US8114636B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-13 Labeling and detection of nucleic acids
US13/399,850 Continuation US20120301894A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2012-02-17 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US14/330,727 Continuation US9645140B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-07-14 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20070249014A1 true US20070249014A1 (en) 2007-10-25

Family

ID=38440198

Family Applications (10)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/674,140 Abandoned US20070249014A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-12 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US11/674,136 Active 2032-02-04 US8716033B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-12 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US13/007,506 Active US8785212B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2011-01-14 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US13/399,850 Abandoned US20120301894A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2012-02-17 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US14/221,798 Abandoned US20140206848A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-03-21 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US14/299,284 Abandoned US20140377837A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-06-09 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US14/330,727 Active 2027-05-06 US9645140B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-07-14 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US15/385,340 Active 2027-07-26 US10676771B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2016-12-20 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US15/474,901 Abandoned US20170362624A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2017-03-30 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US16/738,274 Abandoned US20200216871A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2020-01-09 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins

Family Applications After (9)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/674,136 Active 2032-02-04 US8716033B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2007-02-12 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US13/007,506 Active US8785212B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2011-01-14 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US13/399,850 Abandoned US20120301894A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2012-02-17 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US14/221,798 Abandoned US20140206848A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-03-21 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US14/299,284 Abandoned US20140377837A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-06-09 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US14/330,727 Active 2027-05-06 US9645140B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-07-14 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US15/385,340 Active 2027-07-26 US10676771B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2016-12-20 Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US15/474,901 Abandoned US20170362624A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2017-03-30 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US16/738,274 Abandoned US20200216871A1 (en) 2006-02-10 2020-01-09 Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (10) US20070249014A1 (en)
EP (7) EP2623986B1 (en)
JP (4) JP2009528988A (en)
DK (3) DK3438131T3 (en)
WO (2) WO2007095506A1 (en)

Cited By (41)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070190597A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2007-08-16 Invitrogen Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US20090317869A1 (en) * 2008-05-02 2009-12-24 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US20100189660A1 (en) * 2009-02-14 2010-07-29 Genentech, Inc. Methods for the detection of fatty-acylated protein
EP2253635A1 (en) 2009-04-28 2010-11-24 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der Wissenschaften e.V. Novel hydrophilic and lipophilic rhodamines for labelling and imaging
WO2010149190A1 (en) * 2009-06-26 2010-12-29 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Novel fluorinated rhodamines as photostable fluorescent dyes for labelling and imaging techniques
US20110073172A1 (en) * 2009-09-25 2011-03-31 Chicago State University Copper Complex Dye Sensitized Solar Cell
US20110108411A1 (en) * 2009-11-11 2011-05-12 Popik Vladimir V Methods for labeling a substrate using a hetero-diels-alder reaction
US8034396B2 (en) 2008-04-01 2011-10-11 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Bioadhesive composition formed using click chemistry
US20110257047A1 (en) * 2009-11-11 2011-10-20 Popik Vladimir V Methods for Labeling a Substrate Using a Hetero-Diels-Alder Reaction
WO2012016044A1 (en) 2010-07-28 2012-02-02 Life Technologies Corporation Anti-viral azide containing compounds
WO2012016048A1 (en) 2010-07-28 2012-02-02 Life Technologies Corporation Anti- viral azide-containing compounds
WO2013056720A1 (en) 2011-10-18 2013-04-25 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Foerderung Der Wissenschaften E.V. Fluorescent dyes with phosphorylated hydroxymethyl groups and their use in light microscopy and imaging techniques
US8512728B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2013-08-20 Sofradim Production Method of forming a medical device on biological tissue
US8535477B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2013-09-17 Sofradim Production Medical devices incorporating functional adhesives
US8648144B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2014-02-11 Sofradim Production Crosslinked fibers and method of making same by extrusion
US8663689B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2014-03-04 Sofradim Production Functionalized adhesive medical gel
US8795331B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2014-08-05 Covidien Lp Medical devices incorporating functional adhesives
US8865857B2 (en) 2010-07-01 2014-10-21 Sofradim Production Medical device with predefined activated cellular integration
US8877170B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2014-11-04 Sofradim Production Medical device with inflammatory response-reducing coating
CN104220588A (en) * 2012-01-26 2014-12-17 生命科技公司 Methods for increasing infectivity of viruses
US8956603B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-02-17 Sofradim Production Amphiphilic compounds and self-assembling compositions made therefrom
US8968733B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-03-03 Sofradim Production Functionalized surgical adhesives
US8968818B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-03-03 Covidien Lp Medical devices having activated surfaces
US8969473B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-03-03 Sofradim Production Compounds and medical devices activated with solvophobic linkers
US9039979B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-05-26 Sofradim Production Apparatus and method of reacting polymers passing through metal ion chelated resin matrix to produce injectable medical devices
CN105142672A (en) * 2012-10-23 2015-12-09 西纳福克斯股份有限公司 Modified antibody, antibody-conjugate and process for the preparation thereof
US9247931B2 (en) 2010-06-29 2016-02-02 Covidien Lp Microwave-powered reactor and method for in situ forming implants
US9272074B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2016-03-01 Sofradim Production Surgical fasteners and methods for sealing wounds
US9273191B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-03-01 Sofradim Production Medical devices with an activated coating
US9375699B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-06-28 Sofradim Production Apparatus and method of reacting polymers by exposure to UV radiation to produce injectable medical devices
US9504702B2 (en) 2010-08-05 2016-11-29 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods of inhibition of protein fucosylation in vivo using fucose analogs
US9523159B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-12-20 Covidien Lp Crosslinked fibers and method of making same using UV radiation
US9555154B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2017-01-31 Covidien Lp Medical devices having activated surfaces
US9775928B2 (en) 2013-06-18 2017-10-03 Covidien Lp Adhesive barbed filament
WO2018044130A1 (en) * 2016-09-02 2018-03-08 한국과학기술원 Novel method for producing protein having a carbon-carbon bond-based site-specific modification
US20180066011A1 (en) * 2016-09-02 2018-03-08 Korea Advanced Institute Of Science And Technology Method for preparing site-specifically modified protein based on novel carbon-carbon bond formation
US9987297B2 (en) 2010-07-27 2018-06-05 Sofradim Production Polymeric fibers having tissue reactive members
US20180256732A1 (en) * 2013-05-02 2018-09-13 Glykos Finland Oy Glycoprotein-toxic payload conjugates
US10350228B2 (en) 2012-08-23 2019-07-16 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Treatment of sickle cell disease and inflammatory conditions
US10557851B2 (en) 2012-03-27 2020-02-11 Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. Signaling conjugates and methods of use
CN115951070A (en) * 2023-01-19 2023-04-11 北京青莲百奥生物科技有限公司 Method for detecting protein in sample

Families Citing this family (73)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2007106886A2 (en) * 2006-03-15 2007-09-20 Trustees Of Tufts College Fluorinated carbohydrates and their use in tumor visualization, tissue engineering, and cancer chemotherapy
JP5569768B2 (en) * 2008-12-02 2014-08-13 国立大学法人九州大学 Nucleoside triphosphate derivative, nucleic acid probe, multi-labeled nucleic acid probe, and method for detecting target nucleic acid
EP2376123A2 (en) * 2008-12-16 2011-10-19 Genzyme Corporation Oligosaccharide-protein conjugates
WO2010091142A1 (en) * 2009-02-04 2010-08-12 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Compositions and methods for labeling and imaging phospholipids
US10191060B2 (en) 2009-11-09 2019-01-29 University Of Washington Functionalized chromophoric polymer dots and bioconjugates thereof
US20110129834A1 (en) * 2009-11-24 2011-06-02 Life Technologies Corporation Selective amplification of polynucleotide sequences
EP2944605B1 (en) 2010-10-18 2018-12-05 University of Washington through its Center for Commercialization Chromophoric polymer dots
CN103732619A (en) * 2011-05-31 2014-04-16 普罗拜奥金股份有限公司 Methods for preparation of fucose-linked site specific conjugates of proteins with toxins, adjuvants, detection labels and pharmacokinetic half life extenders
US9797840B2 (en) 2011-11-28 2017-10-24 University Of Washington Through Its Center For Commercialization Highly fluorescent polymer nanoparticle
EP2793947B1 (en) * 2011-12-23 2021-02-03 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
EP2797635B1 (en) 2011-12-30 2020-05-20 University of Washington Through Its Center for Commercialization Chromophoric polymer dots with narrow-band emission
WO2013116614A1 (en) 2012-02-03 2013-08-08 University Of Washington Through Its Center For Commercialization Polyelectrolyte-coated polymer dots and related methods
CN104704359A (en) * 2012-10-25 2015-06-10 生命科技公司 Methods and compositions for enzyme-mediated site-specific radiolabeling of glycoproteins
CN104007091A (en) * 2013-02-26 2014-08-27 中国科学院天津工业生物技术研究所 High-throughput detection system for microbe based on droplet microfluidic chip
US20140302516A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-10-09 University Of Washington Through Its Center For Commercialization Polymer dot compositions and related methods
SG10201710033PA (en) * 2013-06-04 2018-01-30 Tribiotica Llc Methods and compositions for templated assembly of nucleic acid specific heterocompounds
EP3057618B1 (en) 2013-10-14 2022-12-14 SynAffix B.V. Glycoengineered antibody, antibody-conjugate and methods for their preparation
WO2015057066A1 (en) 2013-10-14 2015-04-23 Synaffix B.V. Glycoengineered antibody, antibody-conjugate and methods for their preparation
CN105814213B (en) * 2013-10-14 2021-05-04 西纳福克斯股份有限公司 Modified glycoproteins, protein-conjugates and methods of making the same
US9987373B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2018-06-05 Synaffix B.V. Modified glycoprotein, protein-conjugate and process for the preparation thereof
CN103604791B (en) * 2013-11-29 2016-01-20 广西师范大学 A kind of fluorescence spectrum method measuring azides ion
JP2017505770A (en) 2014-01-24 2017-02-23 シンアフィックス ビー.ブイ. Process for cycloaddition of (hetero) aryl 1,3-dipole compounds with (hetero) cycloalkynes
US10266502B2 (en) 2014-01-24 2019-04-23 Synaffix B.V. Process for the cycloaddition of a halogenated 1,3-dipole compound with a (hetero)cycloalkyne
WO2015112013A1 (en) 2014-01-24 2015-07-30 Synaffix B.V. Process for the attachment of a galnac moiety comprising a (hetero)aryl group to a glcnac moiety, and product obtained thereby
JP5847213B2 (en) * 2014-02-06 2016-01-20 ホーユー株式会社 Two-dimensional electrophoresis method
CA2944539A1 (en) 2014-04-08 2015-10-15 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Site-specific antibody-drug glycoconjugates and methods
WO2015156264A1 (en) * 2014-04-08 2015-10-15 国立大学法人弘前大学 Novel glucose derivative, and cell imaging method and imaging agent using said derivative
JP2017528124A (en) 2014-08-04 2017-09-28 シンアフィックス ビー.ブイ. Method for modifying glycoprotein using beta- (1,4) -N-acetylgalactosaminyltransferase or a mutant thereof
US20160130324A1 (en) 2014-10-31 2016-05-12 Shire Human Genetic Therapies, Inc. C1 Inhibitor Fusion Proteins and Uses Thereof
CN107208313B (en) 2014-12-02 2022-01-07 特里比奥迪卡有限责任公司 Methods and kits for theranostic applications
CN104761726B (en) * 2015-01-08 2020-05-22 湖南工业大学 Method for regulating and controlling ordered pore diameter of ethyl cellulose grafted polystyrene copolymer material based on main chain length
CN115960981A (en) 2015-04-23 2023-04-14 西纳福克斯股份有限公司 Method for modifying glycoprotein with glycosyltransferase that is or is derived from beta- (1, 4) -N-acetylgalactosamine transferase
WO2017081069A1 (en) * 2015-11-10 2017-05-18 Eth Zurich Tri-functional crosslinking reagents
JP7189767B2 (en) 2015-11-19 2022-12-14 武田薬品工業株式会社 Recombinant human C1 esterase inhibitor and use thereof
CN105399639A (en) * 2015-12-14 2016-03-16 天津科技大学 Tyramine artificial antigen and antibody, and preparation methods and application thereof
US10858641B2 (en) 2016-02-08 2020-12-08 Synaffix B.V. Enzymes for trimming of glycoproteins
US11338043B2 (en) * 2016-02-08 2022-05-24 Synaffix B.V. Antibody-conjugates with improved therapeutic index for targeting HER2 tumours and method for improving therapeutic index of antibody-conjugates
US10874746B2 (en) 2016-02-08 2020-12-29 Synaffix B.V. Sulfamide linkers for use in bioconjugates
EP3471703A4 (en) * 2016-06-15 2020-03-18 The General Hospital Corporation Metabolic labeling and molecular enhancement of biological materials using bioorthogonal reactions
US20190177438A1 (en) * 2016-06-17 2019-06-13 Life Technologies Corporation Site-Specific Crosslinking of Antibodies
WO2018094070A1 (en) 2016-11-21 2018-05-24 Tribiotica Llc Methods for preventing titration of bimolecular templated assembly reactions by structurally-determined differential hybridizations
US11253536B2 (en) 2016-11-21 2022-02-22 Tribiotica Llc Methods for directed folding assembly or dimerization of proteins by templated assembly reactions
WO2018126092A1 (en) 2016-12-29 2018-07-05 Development Center For Biotechnology Processes for preparing glycoprotein-drug conjugates
CN108264372B (en) * 2016-12-30 2021-08-24 四川大学 High-strength low-heat-conductivity A-grade non-combustible aerogel foam and preparation and application thereof
CN108728397B (en) * 2017-04-17 2022-05-20 中国科学院微生物研究所 Method for marking insect protein or foreign protein expressed by insect expression system
WO2018206734A1 (en) 2017-05-11 2018-11-15 Vib Vzw Glycosylation of variable immunoglobulin domains
WO2018237334A1 (en) * 2017-06-23 2018-12-27 The Scripps Research Institute Lysine reactive probes and uses thereof
CN107486270B (en) * 2017-08-08 2020-10-23 上海格荣生物科技有限公司 Preparation method of microarray chip based on ball-brush double-layer nanostructure substrate
CN110093303A (en) * 2018-01-29 2019-08-06 浙江千禾生物科技有限公司 A kind of semisolid culturemedium and its application
CN112672764A (en) 2018-06-19 2021-04-16 格莱科斯生物医药公司 Conjugates
JP2021529163A (en) 2018-06-29 2021-10-28 グリコス バイオメディカル オーワイ Conjugate
US11168141B2 (en) 2018-08-02 2021-11-09 Dyne Therapeutics, Inc. Muscle targeting complexes and uses thereof for treating dystrophinopathies
US11911484B2 (en) 2018-08-02 2024-02-27 Dyne Therapeutics, Inc. Muscle targeting complexes and uses thereof for treating myotonic dystrophy
WO2020028864A1 (en) 2018-08-02 2020-02-06 Dyne Therapeutics, Inc. Muscle targeting complexes and uses thereof for treating facioscapulohumeral muscular dystrophy
SG11202100934PA (en) 2018-08-02 2021-02-25 Dyne Therapeutics Inc Muscle targeting complexes and uses thereof for treating dystrophinopathies
CN109316463B (en) * 2018-08-03 2021-03-19 暨南大学 Composite nanoparticle and preparation method and application thereof
WO2020094670A1 (en) 2018-11-05 2020-05-14 Synaffix B.V. Antibody-conjugates for targeting of tumours expressing trop-2
GB201901608D0 (en) 2019-02-06 2019-03-27 Vib Vzw Vaccine adjuvant conjugates
MA55017A (en) * 2019-02-20 2021-12-29 Diamidex METHODS FOR LABELING EUKARYOT CELLS FROM A MULTICELLULAR ORGANISM AND FOR THE TREATMENT AND/OR DIAGNOSIS OF CANCER USING MODIFIED MONOSACCHARIDIC COMPOUNDS
EP3970208A4 (en) * 2019-05-13 2023-07-26 Shanghai Polaris Biology Co., Ltd. A tag for labeling biomolecules
GB201918279D0 (en) 2019-12-12 2020-01-29 Vib Vzw Glycosylated single chain immunoglobulin domains
US20230038373A1 (en) 2019-12-18 2023-02-09 Glykos Biomedical Oy Stabile conjugate
US11672872B2 (en) 2021-07-09 2023-06-13 Dyne Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-transferrin receptor antibody and uses thereof
US11638761B2 (en) 2021-07-09 2023-05-02 Dyne Therapeutics, Inc. Muscle targeting complexes and uses thereof for treating Facioscapulohumeral muscular dystrophy
US11771776B2 (en) 2021-07-09 2023-10-03 Dyne Therapeutics, Inc. Muscle targeting complexes and uses thereof for treating dystrophinopathies
US11633498B2 (en) 2021-07-09 2023-04-25 Dyne Therapeutics, Inc. Muscle targeting complexes and uses thereof for treating myotonic dystrophy
TW202334429A (en) 2021-10-01 2023-09-01 中央研究院 Antibody specific to spike protein of sars-cov-2 and uses thereof
GB202116442D0 (en) * 2021-11-15 2021-12-29 Actome Gmbh High-efficacy labeling of antibodies with oligonucleotide labels
WO2023180485A1 (en) 2022-03-23 2023-09-28 Synaffix B.V. Antibody-conjugates for targeting of tumours expressing trop-2
WO2023180490A1 (en) 2022-03-23 2023-09-28 Synaffix B.V. Antibody-conjugates for targeting of tumours expressing nectin-4
WO2023180489A1 (en) 2022-03-23 2023-09-28 Synaffix B.V. Antibody-conjugates for targeting of tumours expressing carcinoembyronic antigen
WO2023180484A1 (en) 2022-03-23 2023-09-28 Synaffix B.V. Antibody-conjugates for targeting of tumours expressing ptk7
EP4285934A1 (en) 2022-05-30 2023-12-06 CER Groupe Modified trimannose-oligosacharides, bisected n-glycans comprising said trimannose core and method for obtaining them

Citations (81)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US527027A (en) * 1894-10-02 Method of and apparatus for producing letters or characters in bread
US4196265A (en) * 1977-06-15 1980-04-01 The Wistar Institute Method of producing antibodies
US4384042A (en) * 1980-07-30 1983-05-17 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Method and test composition for determination of hydrogen peroxide
US4520110A (en) * 1981-10-06 1985-05-28 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Fluorescent immunoassay employing a phycobiliprotein labeled ligand or receptor
US4542104A (en) * 1983-04-06 1985-09-17 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. Univ. Phycobiliprotein fluorescent conjugates
US4603209A (en) * 1984-09-07 1986-07-29 The Regents Of The University Of California Fluorescent indicator dyes for calcium ions
US4711955A (en) * 1981-04-17 1987-12-08 Yale University Modified nucleotides and methods of preparing and using same
US4714763A (en) * 1985-07-11 1987-12-22 Viomedics Inc. Novel oxazine-ureas and thiazine urea chromophors as fluorescent labels
US4774339A (en) * 1987-08-10 1988-09-27 Molecular Probes, Inc. Chemically reactive dipyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes
US4810636A (en) * 1986-12-09 1989-03-07 Miles Inc. Chromogenic acridinone enzyme substrates
US4812409A (en) * 1986-01-31 1989-03-14 Eastman Kodak Company Hydrolyzable fluorescent substrates and analytical determinations using same
US4816567A (en) * 1983-04-08 1989-03-28 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobin preparations
US4849362A (en) * 1988-05-19 1989-07-18 Smithkline Beckman Corporation Fluorescent intracellular calcium indicators
US4859582A (en) * 1981-10-06 1989-08-22 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. University Fluorescent conjugates for analysis of molecules and cells
US4945171A (en) * 1987-08-10 1990-07-31 Molecular Probes, Inc. Xanthene dyes having a fused (C) benzo ring
US4981977A (en) * 1989-06-09 1991-01-01 Carnegie-Mellon University Intermediate for and fluorescent cyanine dyes containing carboxylic acid groups
US5047519A (en) * 1986-07-02 1991-09-10 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Alkynylamino-nucleotides
US5055556A (en) * 1981-10-06 1991-10-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. Univ. Fluorescent conjugates for analysis of molecules and cells
US5132432A (en) * 1989-09-22 1992-07-21 Molecular Probes, Inc. Chemically reactive pyrenyloxy sulfonic acid dyes
US5187288A (en) * 1991-05-22 1993-02-16 Molecular Probes, Inc. Ethenyl-substituted dipyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes and their synthesis
US5196306A (en) * 1989-03-29 1993-03-23 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method for the detection or quantitation of an analyte using an analyte dependent enzyme activation system
US5208148A (en) * 1990-12-07 1993-05-04 Molecular Probes, Inc. Lipophilic fluorescent glycosidase substrates
US5225539A (en) * 1986-03-27 1993-07-06 Medical Research Council Recombinant altered antibodies and methods of making altered antibodies
US5227487A (en) * 1990-04-16 1993-07-13 Molecular Probes, Inc. Certain tricyclic and pentacyclic-hetero nitrogen rhodol dyes
US5242805A (en) * 1991-08-23 1993-09-07 Molecular Probes, Inc. Long wavelength lipophilic fluorogenic glycosidase substrates
US5248782A (en) * 1990-12-18 1993-09-28 Molecular Probes, Inc. Long wavelength heteroaryl-substituted dipyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes
US5268486A (en) * 1986-04-18 1993-12-07 Carnegie-Mellon Unversity Method for labeling and detecting materials employing arylsulfonate cyanine dyes
US5274133A (en) * 1993-01-21 1993-12-28 International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. p-Methylenedioxyphenyl propionitrile derivatives, process for producing same, intermediates used in said process and organoleptic uses of said derivatives and intermediates
US5279954A (en) * 1989-06-30 1994-01-18 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Nebraska And Bionebraska Exopeptidase catalyzed site-specific bonding of supports, labels and bioactive agents to proteins
US5316906A (en) * 1991-08-23 1994-05-31 Molecular Probes, Inc. Enzymatic analysis using substrates that yield fluorescent precipitates
US5362628A (en) * 1991-08-23 1994-11-08 Molecular Probes, Inc. Fluorescent haloalkyl derivatives of reporter molecules well retained in cells
US5451343A (en) * 1991-05-20 1995-09-19 Spectra Group Limited, Inc. Fluorone and pyronin y derivatives
US5459276A (en) * 1994-05-20 1995-10-17 Molecular Probes, Inc. Benzazolylcoumarin-based ion indicators for heavy metals
US5478741A (en) * 1992-09-11 1995-12-26 Becton, Dickinson And Company Antibodies to the HRPII protein of plasmodium falciparum
US5501980A (en) * 1994-05-20 1996-03-26 Molecular Probes, Inc. Benzazolylcoumarin-based ion indicators
US5545806A (en) * 1990-08-29 1996-08-13 Genpharm International, Inc. Ransgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5569587A (en) * 1986-04-18 1996-10-29 Carnegie Mellon University Method for labeling and detecting materials employing luminescent arysulfonate cyanine dyes
US5569825A (en) * 1990-08-29 1996-10-29 Genpharm International Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies of various isotypes
US5576424A (en) * 1991-08-23 1996-11-19 Molecular Probes, Inc. Haloalkyl derivatives of reporter molecules used to analyze metabolic activity in cells
US5625126A (en) * 1990-08-29 1997-04-29 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5633425A (en) * 1990-08-29 1997-05-27 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies
US5661016A (en) * 1990-08-29 1997-08-26 Genpharm International Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies of various isotypes
US5696157A (en) * 1996-11-15 1997-12-09 Molecular Probes, Inc. Sulfonated derivatives of 7-aminocoumarin
US5773236A (en) * 1997-04-25 1998-06-30 Molecule Probes, Inc. Assay for glutathiane transferase using polyhaloaryl-substituted reporter molecules
US5798276A (en) * 1995-06-07 1998-08-25 Molecular Probes, Inc. Reactive derivatives of sulforhodamine 101 with enhanced hydrolytic stability
US5808044A (en) * 1993-01-22 1998-09-15 Pharmacia Biotech Inc. Indocarbocyanine and benzindocarbocyanine phosphoramidites
US5830912A (en) * 1996-11-15 1998-11-03 Molecular Probes, Inc. Derivatives of 6,8-difluoro-7-hydroxycoumarin
US5846737A (en) * 1996-07-26 1998-12-08 Molecular Probes, Inc. Conjugates of sulforhodamine fluorophores with enhanced fluorescence
US5858731A (en) * 1991-05-08 1999-01-12 Stratagene Oligonucleotide libraries useful for producing primers
US5874532A (en) * 1997-01-08 1999-02-23 Nexstar Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for solution phase synthesis of oligonucleotides and peptides
US5877310A (en) * 1997-04-25 1999-03-02 Carnegie Mellon University Glycoconjugated fluorescent labeling reagents
US5948386A (en) * 1997-03-14 1999-09-07 The Curators Of The University Of Missouri Conjugate and method for forming aminomethyl phosphorus conjugates
US6002003A (en) * 1998-04-14 1999-12-14 Beckman Instruments, Inc. Cyanine dye activating group with improved coupling selectivity
US6004536A (en) * 1995-11-14 1999-12-21 Molecular Probes, Inc. Lipophilic cyanine dyes with enchanced aqueous solubilty
US6008373A (en) * 1995-06-07 1999-12-28 Carnegie Mellon University Fluorescent labeling complexes with large stokes shift formed by coupling together cyanine and other fluorochromes capable of resonance energy transfer
US6043025A (en) * 1995-04-20 2000-03-28 Carnegie Mellon University Difference gel electrophoresis using matched multiple dyes
US6130101A (en) * 1997-09-23 2000-10-10 Molecular Probes, Inc. Sulfonated xanthene derivatives
US6133445A (en) * 1997-12-17 2000-10-17 Carnegie Mellon University Rigidized trimethine cyanine dyes
US6162931A (en) * 1996-04-12 2000-12-19 Molecular Probes, Inc. Fluorinated xanthene derivatives
US6255475B1 (en) * 1995-01-31 2001-07-03 Marek Kwiatkowski Chain terminators, the use thereof for nucleic acid sequencing and synthesis and a method of their preparation
US6339392B1 (en) * 1999-01-13 2002-01-15 Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Gate for radar-mounted vehicle, having partition walls not grouped or detected by radar apparatus
US20020012989A1 (en) * 1993-02-01 2002-01-31 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Expression vectors encoding bispecific fusion proteins and methods of producing biologically active bispecific fusion proteins in a mammalian cell
US20030049721A1 (en) * 1997-05-15 2003-03-13 Bertozzi Carolyn C. Glycoconjugates and methods
US20030073149A1 (en) * 2001-10-12 2003-04-17 Archer Robert A. Antibody complexes and methods for immunolabeling
US6570040B2 (en) * 2000-03-16 2003-05-27 The Regents Of The University Of California Chemoselective ligation
US20030211579A1 (en) * 2002-03-27 2003-11-13 van Ness Kirk P. Methods for increasing polypeptide production
US20030219876A1 (en) * 1991-06-27 2003-11-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Expression vectors encoding bispecific fusion proteins and methods of producing biologically active bispecific fusion proteins in a mammalian cell
US6664047B1 (en) * 1999-04-30 2003-12-16 Molecular Probes, Inc. Aza-benzazolium containing cyanine dyes
US6716979B2 (en) * 2000-08-04 2004-04-06 Molecular Probes, Inc. Derivatives of 1,2-dihydro-7-hydroxyquinolines containing fused rings
US20040142856A1 (en) * 2001-10-10 2004-07-22 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US20040235076A1 (en) * 2000-10-09 2004-11-25 Yung-Hsiang Liu Immunological analytical method and device for the determination of glycosylated protein
US20050032081A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2005-02-10 Jingyue Ju Biomolecular coupling methods using 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition chemistry
US20050130235A1 (en) * 2003-11-18 2005-06-16 Linda Hsieh-Wilson Method and compositions for the detection of protein glycosylation
US6974873B2 (en) * 2000-09-29 2005-12-13 Molecular Probes, Inc. Modified carbocyanine dyes and their conjugates
US7052843B2 (en) * 2002-10-08 2006-05-30 New York University Transcription-based assay for identification of post-translational modification and its application in proteomics
US7070941B2 (en) * 2003-11-17 2006-07-04 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods and compositions for tagging via azido substrates
US20060205041A1 (en) * 2001-12-14 2006-09-14 Frye Christopher C Recombinant bovine thrombin
US20070190597A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2007-08-16 Invitrogen Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US20080108557A1 (en) * 2004-09-29 2008-05-08 Novo Nordisk Healthcare A/G Modified Proteins
US7375234B2 (en) * 2002-05-30 2008-05-20 The Scripps Research Institute Copper-catalysed ligation of azides and acetylenes
US20100261181A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2010-10-14 Life Technologies Corporation Labeling and detection of nucleic acids

Family Cites Families (49)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6147500A (en) 1984-08-15 1986-03-07 Res Dev Corp Of Japan Chimera monoclonal antibody and its preparation
EP0173494A3 (en) 1984-08-27 1987-11-25 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Chimeric receptors by dna splicing and expression
GB8422238D0 (en) 1984-09-03 1984-10-10 Neuberger M S Chimeric proteins
JPS61134325A (en) 1984-12-04 1986-06-21 Teijin Ltd Expression of hybrid antibody gene
FR2574415B1 (en) * 1984-12-11 1987-05-29 Rhone Poulenc Spec Chim LOW TEMPERATURE FLEXIBLE TECHNICAL COPOLYETHERAMIDES
US4676980A (en) 1985-09-23 1987-06-30 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services Target specific cross-linked heteroantibodies
US5627027A (en) 1986-04-18 1997-05-06 Carnegie Mellon University Cyanine dyes as labeling reagents for detection of biological and other materials by luminescence methods
US5202422A (en) * 1989-10-27 1993-04-13 The Scripps Research Institute Compositions containing plant-produced glycopolypeptide multimers, multimeric proteins and method of their use
US5433896A (en) 1994-05-20 1995-07-18 Molecular Probes, Inc. Dibenzopyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes
US5274113A (en) 1991-11-01 1993-12-28 Molecular Probes, Inc. Long wavelength chemically reactive dipyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes and conjugates
US5723289A (en) 1990-06-11 1998-03-03 Nexstar Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Parallel selex
AU4801393A (en) * 1992-08-03 1994-03-03 New York University Cloning, expression and uses for neurocan as a chondroitin sulfate proteoglycan
US5767259A (en) 1994-12-27 1998-06-16 Naxcor Oligonucleotides containing base-free linking groups with photoactivatable side chains
JP3240866B2 (en) * 1995-01-19 2001-12-25 豊田工機株式会社 Power steering device
US5843650A (en) 1995-05-01 1998-12-01 Segev; David Nucleic acid detection and amplification by chemical linkage of oligonucleotides
CA2251985A1 (en) 1996-04-19 1997-10-30 Alan Lewis Hamilton Squarate dyes and their use in fluorescent sequencing method
FR2751430B1 (en) * 1996-07-16 1998-09-11 Aerospatiale TRANSLATION SUSPENSION AND GUIDANCE DEVICE FOR AN APPARATUS AND APPARATUS PROVIDED WITH SUCH A DEVICE
EP2319854B1 (en) 1997-01-08 2016-11-30 Sigma-Aldrich Co. LLC Bioconjugation Of Macromolecules
ES2306477T3 (en) 1997-09-05 2008-11-01 Altus Pharmaceuticals Inc. GLICOPROTEIN CRYSTALS RETICULATED BY CARBOHYDRATES.
US6861254B1 (en) * 1997-10-24 2005-03-01 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Heparan sulfate D-glucosaminyl 3-O-sulfotransferases, and uses therefor
US7427678B2 (en) 1998-01-08 2008-09-23 Sigma-Aldrich Co. Method for immobilizing oligonucleotides employing the cycloaddition bioconjugation method
WO1999051702A1 (en) 1998-04-08 1999-10-14 Terpetschnig Ewald A Luminescent compounds
ES2329572T3 (en) 1999-07-02 2009-11-27 Visen Medical, Inc. NEW FLUORESCENT Cyanine Markers CONTAINING A SULFAMID LINKER GROUP.
AU7316900A (en) 1999-09-20 2001-04-24 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Compounds for fluorescence labeling
JP2004510433A (en) 2000-10-06 2004-04-08 ザ・トラスティーズ・オブ・コランビア・ユニバーシティー・イン・ザ・シティー・オブ・ニューヨーク Massively parallel methods for decoding DNA and RNA
KR20100018071A (en) 2001-08-03 2010-02-16 글리카트 바이오테크놀로지 아게 Antibody glycosylation variants having increased antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity
US6406926B1 (en) 2001-08-15 2002-06-18 Motorola, Inc. Method of forming a vacuum micro-electronic device
FI20011671A (en) 2001-08-20 2003-02-21 Carbion Oy Tumor-specific oligosaccharide sequences and their use
WO2003031464A2 (en) 2001-10-10 2003-04-17 Neose Technologies, Inc. Remodeling and glycoconjugation of peptides
US7214660B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2007-05-08 Neose Technologies, Inc. Erythropoietin: remodeling and glycoconjugation of erythropoietin
AU2002351199A1 (en) 2001-11-28 2003-06-10 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoprotein remodeling using endoglycanases
CA2489467C (en) * 2002-06-14 2015-02-24 Immunomedics, Inc. Humanized monoclonal antibody hpam4
DK3587433T3 (en) 2002-08-23 2020-05-18 Illumina Cambridge Ltd MODIFIED NUCLEOTIDES
AU2004204463B2 (en) 2003-01-10 2009-02-12 Government Of The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services National Institutes Of Health Catalytic domains of beta(1,4)-galactosyltransferase I having altered donor and acceptor specificities, domains that promote in vitro protein folding, and methods for their use
EP1685117B1 (en) 2003-10-31 2015-01-07 Life Technologies Corporation Fluorinated resorufin compounds and their application in detecting hydrogen peroxide
PL2380911T3 (en) 2003-11-05 2018-10-31 Roche Glycart Ag Antigen binding molecules with increased Fc receptor binding affinity and effector function
CA2545685A1 (en) * 2003-11-14 2005-06-02 Irm Llc Fluorous labeling for selective processing of biologically-derived samples
US20070258986A1 (en) 2003-11-19 2007-11-08 Govt of the US as represented by the secretary, Targeted Delivery System for Bioactive Agents
EP1642129B1 (en) * 2004-02-10 2008-08-20 Korea Basic Science Institute Method for the phosphorylated site analysis and selective labeling agent
EP2436778A3 (en) 2004-03-03 2012-07-11 The Trustees of Columbia University in the City of New York Photocleavable fluorescent nucleotides for DNA sequencing on chip constructed by site-specific coupling chemistry
JP4601060B2 (en) 2004-03-30 2010-12-22 ヤマサ醤油株式会社 Azido amino sugar nucleotides and their applications
US20080181847A1 (en) 2004-10-07 2008-07-31 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Targeted Imaging and/or Therapy Using the Staudinger Ligation
US20060147963A1 (en) 2004-12-30 2006-07-06 Affymetrix, Inc. Detection of polynucleotides on nucleic acid arrays using azido-modified triphosphate nucleotide analogs
EP2256126B1 (en) 2005-05-02 2015-07-01 baseclick GmbH New labelling strategies for the sensitive detection of analytes
EP3591069A3 (en) 2005-10-27 2020-03-04 The President and Fellows of Harvard College Methods and compositions for labeling nucleic acids
IT1395574B1 (en) 2009-09-14 2012-10-16 Guala Dispensing Spa DISTRIBUTION DEVICE
CN115960981A (en) 2015-04-23 2023-04-14 西纳福克斯股份有限公司 Method for modifying glycoprotein with glycosyltransferase that is or is derived from beta- (1, 4) -N-acetylgalactosamine transferase
KR20210157943A (en) 2020-06-22 2021-12-30 현대자동차주식회사 Integrated control apparatus for autonomous driving vehicle
US11820402B2 (en) 2020-07-02 2023-11-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Motion sickness detection system for autonomous vehicles

Patent Citations (96)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US527027A (en) * 1894-10-02 Method of and apparatus for producing letters or characters in bread
US4196265A (en) * 1977-06-15 1980-04-01 The Wistar Institute Method of producing antibodies
US4384042A (en) * 1980-07-30 1983-05-17 Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Method and test composition for determination of hydrogen peroxide
US4711955A (en) * 1981-04-17 1987-12-08 Yale University Modified nucleotides and methods of preparing and using same
US4520110A (en) * 1981-10-06 1985-05-28 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Fluorescent immunoassay employing a phycobiliprotein labeled ligand or receptor
US5055556A (en) * 1981-10-06 1991-10-08 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. Univ. Fluorescent conjugates for analysis of molecules and cells
US4859582A (en) * 1981-10-06 1989-08-22 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. University Fluorescent conjugates for analysis of molecules and cells
US4542104A (en) * 1983-04-06 1985-09-17 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. Univ. Phycobiliprotein fluorescent conjugates
US4816567A (en) * 1983-04-08 1989-03-28 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobin preparations
US4603209A (en) * 1984-09-07 1986-07-29 The Regents Of The University Of California Fluorescent indicator dyes for calcium ions
US4714763A (en) * 1985-07-11 1987-12-22 Viomedics Inc. Novel oxazine-ureas and thiazine urea chromophors as fluorescent labels
US4812409A (en) * 1986-01-31 1989-03-14 Eastman Kodak Company Hydrolyzable fluorescent substrates and analytical determinations using same
US5225539A (en) * 1986-03-27 1993-07-06 Medical Research Council Recombinant altered antibodies and methods of making altered antibodies
US5569587A (en) * 1986-04-18 1996-10-29 Carnegie Mellon University Method for labeling and detecting materials employing luminescent arysulfonate cyanine dyes
US5268486A (en) * 1986-04-18 1993-12-07 Carnegie-Mellon Unversity Method for labeling and detecting materials employing arylsulfonate cyanine dyes
US5569766A (en) * 1986-04-18 1996-10-29 Carnegie Mellon University Method for labeling and detecting materials employing arylsulfonate cyanine dyes
US5486616A (en) * 1986-04-18 1996-01-23 Carnegie Mellon University Method for labeling and detecting materials employing arylsulfonate cyanine dyes
US5047519A (en) * 1986-07-02 1991-09-10 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Alkynylamino-nucleotides
US4810636A (en) * 1986-12-09 1989-03-07 Miles Inc. Chromogenic acridinone enzyme substrates
US4774339A (en) * 1987-08-10 1988-09-27 Molecular Probes, Inc. Chemically reactive dipyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes
US4945171A (en) * 1987-08-10 1990-07-31 Molecular Probes, Inc. Xanthene dyes having a fused (C) benzo ring
US4849362A (en) * 1988-05-19 1989-07-18 Smithkline Beckman Corporation Fluorescent intracellular calcium indicators
US5196306A (en) * 1989-03-29 1993-03-23 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method for the detection or quantitation of an analyte using an analyte dependent enzyme activation system
US5731158A (en) * 1989-03-29 1998-03-24 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Catalyzed reporter deposition
US5583001A (en) * 1989-03-29 1996-12-10 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method for detection or quantitation of an analyte using an analyte dependent enzyme activation system
US4981977A (en) * 1989-06-09 1991-01-01 Carnegie-Mellon University Intermediate for and fluorescent cyanine dyes containing carboxylic acid groups
US5279954A (en) * 1989-06-30 1994-01-18 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Nebraska And Bionebraska Exopeptidase catalyzed site-specific bonding of supports, labels and bioactive agents to proteins
US5132432A (en) * 1989-09-22 1992-07-21 Molecular Probes, Inc. Chemically reactive pyrenyloxy sulfonic acid dyes
US5227487A (en) * 1990-04-16 1993-07-13 Molecular Probes, Inc. Certain tricyclic and pentacyclic-hetero nitrogen rhodol dyes
US5442045A (en) * 1990-04-16 1995-08-15 Molecular Probes, Inc. Biological conjugates of fluorescent rhodol dyes
US5633425A (en) * 1990-08-29 1997-05-27 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies
US5661016A (en) * 1990-08-29 1997-08-26 Genpharm International Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies of various isotypes
US5625126A (en) * 1990-08-29 1997-04-29 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5569825A (en) * 1990-08-29 1996-10-29 Genpharm International Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies of various isotypes
US5545806A (en) * 1990-08-29 1996-08-13 Genpharm International, Inc. Ransgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5208148A (en) * 1990-12-07 1993-05-04 Molecular Probes, Inc. Lipophilic fluorescent glycosidase substrates
US5248782A (en) * 1990-12-18 1993-09-28 Molecular Probes, Inc. Long wavelength heteroaryl-substituted dipyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes
US5858731A (en) * 1991-05-08 1999-01-12 Stratagene Oligonucleotide libraries useful for producing primers
US5451343A (en) * 1991-05-20 1995-09-19 Spectra Group Limited, Inc. Fluorone and pyronin y derivatives
US5187288A (en) * 1991-05-22 1993-02-16 Molecular Probes, Inc. Ethenyl-substituted dipyrrometheneboron difluoride dyes and their synthesis
US20030219876A1 (en) * 1991-06-27 2003-11-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Expression vectors encoding bispecific fusion proteins and methods of producing biologically active bispecific fusion proteins in a mammalian cell
US5242805A (en) * 1991-08-23 1993-09-07 Molecular Probes, Inc. Long wavelength lipophilic fluorogenic glycosidase substrates
US5576424A (en) * 1991-08-23 1996-11-19 Molecular Probes, Inc. Haloalkyl derivatives of reporter molecules used to analyze metabolic activity in cells
US5443986A (en) * 1991-08-23 1995-08-22 Molecular Probes, Inc. Enzymatic analysis using substrates that yield fluorescent precipitates
US5362628A (en) * 1991-08-23 1994-11-08 Molecular Probes, Inc. Fluorescent haloalkyl derivatives of reporter molecules well retained in cells
US5316906A (en) * 1991-08-23 1994-05-31 Molecular Probes, Inc. Enzymatic analysis using substrates that yield fluorescent precipitates
US5478741A (en) * 1992-09-11 1995-12-26 Becton, Dickinson And Company Antibodies to the HRPII protein of plasmodium falciparum
US5274133A (en) * 1993-01-21 1993-12-28 International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. p-Methylenedioxyphenyl propionitrile derivatives, process for producing same, intermediates used in said process and organoleptic uses of said derivatives and intermediates
US5808044A (en) * 1993-01-22 1998-09-15 Pharmacia Biotech Inc. Indocarbocyanine and benzindocarbocyanine phosphoramidites
US20020012989A1 (en) * 1993-02-01 2002-01-31 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Expression vectors encoding bispecific fusion proteins and methods of producing biologically active bispecific fusion proteins in a mammalian cell
US5459276A (en) * 1994-05-20 1995-10-17 Molecular Probes, Inc. Benzazolylcoumarin-based ion indicators for heavy metals
US5501980A (en) * 1994-05-20 1996-03-26 Molecular Probes, Inc. Benzazolylcoumarin-based ion indicators
US6255475B1 (en) * 1995-01-31 2001-07-03 Marek Kwiatkowski Chain terminators, the use thereof for nucleic acid sequencing and synthesis and a method of their preparation
US6127134A (en) * 1995-04-20 2000-10-03 Carnegie Mellon University Difference gel electrophoresis using matched multiple dyes
US6043025A (en) * 1995-04-20 2000-03-28 Carnegie Mellon University Difference gel electrophoresis using matched multiple dyes
US6562632B1 (en) * 1995-06-07 2003-05-13 Molecular Probes, Inc. Reactive derivatives of sulforhodamine 101 with enhanced hydrolytic stability
US5798276A (en) * 1995-06-07 1998-08-25 Molecular Probes, Inc. Reactive derivatives of sulforhodamine 101 with enhanced hydrolytic stability
US6130094A (en) * 1995-06-07 2000-10-10 Carnegie Mellon University Reagents including a carrier and fluorescent labeling complexes with large stokes shift formed by coupling together cyanine and other fluorochromes capable of resonance energy transfer
US6008373A (en) * 1995-06-07 1999-12-28 Carnegie Mellon University Fluorescent labeling complexes with large stokes shift formed by coupling together cyanine and other fluorochromes capable of resonance energy transfer
US6004536A (en) * 1995-11-14 1999-12-21 Molecular Probes, Inc. Lipophilic cyanine dyes with enchanced aqueous solubilty
US6162931A (en) * 1996-04-12 2000-12-19 Molecular Probes, Inc. Fluorinated xanthene derivatives
US5846737A (en) * 1996-07-26 1998-12-08 Molecular Probes, Inc. Conjugates of sulforhodamine fluorophores with enhanced fluorescence
US5696157A (en) * 1996-11-15 1997-12-09 Molecular Probes, Inc. Sulfonated derivatives of 7-aminocoumarin
US5830912A (en) * 1996-11-15 1998-11-03 Molecular Probes, Inc. Derivatives of 6,8-difluoro-7-hydroxycoumarin
US5874532A (en) * 1997-01-08 1999-02-23 Nexstar Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for solution phase synthesis of oligonucleotides and peptides
US5948386A (en) * 1997-03-14 1999-09-07 The Curators Of The University Of Missouri Conjugate and method for forming aminomethyl phosphorus conjugates
US5773236A (en) * 1997-04-25 1998-06-30 Molecule Probes, Inc. Assay for glutathiane transferase using polyhaloaryl-substituted reporter molecules
US5877310A (en) * 1997-04-25 1999-03-02 Carnegie Mellon University Glycoconjugated fluorescent labeling reagents
US20030049721A1 (en) * 1997-05-15 2003-03-13 Bertozzi Carolyn C. Glycoconjugates and methods
US6936701B2 (en) * 1997-05-15 2005-08-30 The Regents Of The University Of California Glycoconjugates and methods
US6130101A (en) * 1997-09-23 2000-10-10 Molecular Probes, Inc. Sulfonated xanthene derivatives
US6133445A (en) * 1997-12-17 2000-10-17 Carnegie Mellon University Rigidized trimethine cyanine dyes
US6002003A (en) * 1998-04-14 1999-12-14 Beckman Instruments, Inc. Cyanine dye activating group with improved coupling selectivity
US6339392B1 (en) * 1999-01-13 2002-01-15 Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Gate for radar-mounted vehicle, having partition walls not grouped or detected by radar apparatus
US6664047B1 (en) * 1999-04-30 2003-12-16 Molecular Probes, Inc. Aza-benzazolium containing cyanine dyes
US6570040B2 (en) * 2000-03-16 2003-05-27 The Regents Of The University Of California Chemoselective ligation
US7122703B2 (en) * 2000-03-16 2006-10-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Chemoselective ligation
US6716979B2 (en) * 2000-08-04 2004-04-06 Molecular Probes, Inc. Derivatives of 1,2-dihydro-7-hydroxyquinolines containing fused rings
US6977305B2 (en) * 2000-09-29 2005-12-20 Molecular Probes, Inc. Modified carbocyanine dyes and their conjugates
US6974873B2 (en) * 2000-09-29 2005-12-13 Molecular Probes, Inc. Modified carbocyanine dyes and their conjugates
US20040235076A1 (en) * 2000-10-09 2004-11-25 Yung-Hsiang Liu Immunological analytical method and device for the determination of glycosylated protein
US7265085B2 (en) * 2001-10-10 2007-09-04 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US20040142856A1 (en) * 2001-10-10 2004-07-22 Neose Technologies, Inc. Glycoconjugation methods and proteins/peptides produced by the methods
US20030073149A1 (en) * 2001-10-12 2003-04-17 Archer Robert A. Antibody complexes and methods for immunolabeling
US20060205041A1 (en) * 2001-12-14 2006-09-14 Frye Christopher C Recombinant bovine thrombin
US20030211579A1 (en) * 2002-03-27 2003-11-13 van Ness Kirk P. Methods for increasing polypeptide production
US7375234B2 (en) * 2002-05-30 2008-05-20 The Scripps Research Institute Copper-catalysed ligation of azides and acetylenes
US7052843B2 (en) * 2002-10-08 2006-05-30 New York University Transcription-based assay for identification of post-translational modification and its application in proteomics
US20050032081A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2005-02-10 Jingyue Ju Biomolecular coupling methods using 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition chemistry
US20090240030A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2009-09-24 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Biomolecular coupling methods using 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition chemistry
US7070941B2 (en) * 2003-11-17 2006-07-04 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods and compositions for tagging via azido substrates
US20050130235A1 (en) * 2003-11-18 2005-06-16 Linda Hsieh-Wilson Method and compositions for the detection of protein glycosylation
US7332355B2 (en) * 2003-11-18 2008-02-19 California Institute Of Technology Method and compositions for the detection of protein glycosylation
US20080108557A1 (en) * 2004-09-29 2008-05-08 Novo Nordisk Healthcare A/G Modified Proteins
US20070190597A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2007-08-16 Invitrogen Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US20100261181A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2010-10-14 Life Technologies Corporation Labeling and detection of nucleic acids

Cited By (82)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110207171A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2011-08-25 Life Technologies Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US20070190597A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2007-08-16 Invitrogen Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US9645140B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2017-05-09 Life Technologies Corporation Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US8785212B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-07-22 Life Technologies Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US8716033B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2014-05-06 Life Technologies Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US10676771B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2020-06-09 Life Technologies Corporation Oligosaccharide modification and labeling of proteins
US8034396B2 (en) 2008-04-01 2011-10-11 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Bioadhesive composition formed using click chemistry
US11319526B2 (en) 2008-05-02 2022-05-03 Seagen Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US10443035B2 (en) 2008-05-02 2019-10-15 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US20090317869A1 (en) * 2008-05-02 2009-12-24 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US8993326B2 (en) 2008-05-02 2015-03-31 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US9816069B2 (en) 2008-05-02 2017-11-14 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US8163551B2 (en) 2008-05-02 2012-04-24 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US8574907B2 (en) 2008-05-02 2013-11-05 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods and compositions for making antibodies and antibody derivatives with reduced core fucosylation
US20100189660A1 (en) * 2009-02-14 2010-07-29 Genentech, Inc. Methods for the detection of fatty-acylated protein
WO2010093916A1 (en) * 2009-02-14 2010-08-19 Genentech, Inc. Methods for the detection of fatty-acylated proteins
US8512728B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2013-08-20 Sofradim Production Method of forming a medical device on biological tissue
US8968818B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-03-03 Covidien Lp Medical devices having activated surfaces
US8535477B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2013-09-17 Sofradim Production Medical devices incorporating functional adhesives
US9421296B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-08-23 Covidien Lp Crosslinked fibers and method of making same by extrusion
US8648144B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2014-02-11 Sofradim Production Crosslinked fibers and method of making same by extrusion
US8663689B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2014-03-04 Sofradim Production Functionalized adhesive medical gel
US9375699B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-06-28 Sofradim Production Apparatus and method of reacting polymers by exposure to UV radiation to produce injectable medical devices
US9511175B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-12-06 Sofradim Production Medical devices with an activated coating
US10632207B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2020-04-28 Sofradim Production Compounds and medical devices activated with solvophobic linkers
US10167371B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2019-01-01 Covidien Lp Medical devices having activated surfaces
US9273191B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-03-01 Sofradim Production Medical devices with an activated coating
US8877170B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2014-11-04 Sofradim Production Medical device with inflammatory response-reducing coating
US9510810B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-12-06 Sofradim Production Medical devices incorporating functional adhesives
US8956603B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-02-17 Sofradim Production Amphiphilic compounds and self-assembling compositions made therefrom
US8968733B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-03-03 Sofradim Production Functionalized surgical adhesives
US9517291B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-12-13 Covidien Lp Medical devices having activated surfaces
US8969473B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-03-03 Sofradim Production Compounds and medical devices activated with solvophobic linkers
US9216226B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-12-22 Sofradim Production Compounds and medical devices activated with solvophobic linkers
US9039979B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2015-05-26 Sofradim Production Apparatus and method of reacting polymers passing through metal ion chelated resin matrix to produce injectable medical devices
US9523159B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2016-12-20 Covidien Lp Crosslinked fibers and method of making same using UV radiation
US9555154B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2017-01-31 Covidien Lp Medical devices having activated surfaces
US9550164B2 (en) 2009-02-21 2017-01-24 Sofradim Production Apparatus and method of reacting polymers passing through metal ion chelated resin matrix to produce injectable medical devices
EP2253635A1 (en) 2009-04-28 2010-11-24 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der Wissenschaften e.V. Novel hydrophilic and lipophilic rhodamines for labelling and imaging
WO2010149190A1 (en) * 2009-06-26 2010-12-29 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Novel fluorinated rhodamines as photostable fluorescent dyes for labelling and imaging techniques
US8735444B2 (en) 2009-06-26 2014-05-27 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Foerderung Der Wissenschaften E.V. Fluorinated rhodamines as photostable fluorescent dyes for labelling and imaging techniques
US20110073172A1 (en) * 2009-09-25 2011-03-31 Chicago State University Copper Complex Dye Sensitized Solar Cell
US8440905B2 (en) * 2009-09-25 2013-05-14 Robert J. LeSuer Copper complex dye sensitized solar cell
US9090542B2 (en) * 2009-11-11 2015-07-28 University Of Georgia Research Foundation, Inc. Methods for labeling a substrate using a hetero-diels-alder reaction
US20110257047A1 (en) * 2009-11-11 2011-10-20 Popik Vladimir V Methods for Labeling a Substrate Using a Hetero-Diels-Alder Reaction
US20110108411A1 (en) * 2009-11-11 2011-05-12 Popik Vladimir V Methods for labeling a substrate using a hetero-diels-alder reaction
US9272074B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2016-03-01 Sofradim Production Surgical fasteners and methods for sealing wounds
US9554782B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2017-01-31 Covidien Lp Medical devices incorporating functional adhesives
US8795331B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2014-08-05 Covidien Lp Medical devices incorporating functional adhesives
US10143471B2 (en) 2010-03-25 2018-12-04 Sofradim Production Surgical fasteners and methods for sealing wounds
US9247931B2 (en) 2010-06-29 2016-02-02 Covidien Lp Microwave-powered reactor and method for in situ forming implants
US8865857B2 (en) 2010-07-01 2014-10-21 Sofradim Production Medical device with predefined activated cellular integration
US9987297B2 (en) 2010-07-27 2018-06-05 Sofradim Production Polymeric fibers having tissue reactive members
US10179143B2 (en) 2010-07-28 2019-01-15 Life Technologies Corporation Anti-viral azide containing compounds
CN103237546A (en) * 2010-07-28 2013-08-07 生命科技公司 Anti-viral azide-containing compounds
CN103237546B (en) * 2010-07-28 2016-06-08 生命科技公司 The antiviral compound that contains azide
WO2012016048A1 (en) 2010-07-28 2012-02-02 Life Technologies Corporation Anti- viral azide-containing compounds
WO2012016044A1 (en) 2010-07-28 2012-02-02 Life Technologies Corporation Anti-viral azide containing compounds
US9855287B2 (en) 2010-07-28 2018-01-02 Life Technologies Corporation Anti-viral azide containing compounds
US9144575B2 (en) 2010-07-28 2015-09-29 Life Technologies Corporation Anti-viral azide containing compounds
US10632133B2 (en) 2010-07-28 2020-04-28 The Johns Hopkins University Anti-viral azide containing compounds
US9504702B2 (en) 2010-08-05 2016-11-29 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods of inhibition of protein fucosylation in vivo using fucose analogs
US10342811B2 (en) 2010-08-05 2019-07-09 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Methods of inhibition of protein fucosylation in vivo using fucose analogs
US11033561B2 (en) 2010-08-05 2021-06-15 Seagen Inc. Methods of inhibition of protein fucosylation in vivo using fucose analogs
US9164086B2 (en) 2011-10-18 2015-10-20 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Foerderung Der Wissenschaften E.V. Fluorescent dyes with phosphorylated hydroxymethyl groups and their use in light microscopy and imaging techniques
WO2013056720A1 (en) 2011-10-18 2013-04-25 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Foerderung Der Wissenschaften E.V. Fluorescent dyes with phosphorylated hydroxymethyl groups and their use in light microscopy and imaging techniques
US9523678B2 (en) 2011-10-18 2016-12-20 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft Zur Foerderung Der Wissenschaften E.V. Fluorescent dyes with phosphorylated hydroxymethyl groups and their use in light microscopy and imaging techniques
US20180201907A1 (en) * 2012-01-26 2018-07-19 Life Technologies Corporation Methods for increasing the infectivity of viruses
CN104220588A (en) * 2012-01-26 2014-12-17 生命科技公司 Methods for increasing infectivity of viruses
US11906523B2 (en) 2012-03-27 2024-02-20 Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. Signaling conjugates and methods of use
US10557851B2 (en) 2012-03-27 2020-02-11 Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. Signaling conjugates and methods of use
US10350228B2 (en) 2012-08-23 2019-07-16 Seattle Genetics, Inc. Treatment of sickle cell disease and inflammatory conditions
CN105142672A (en) * 2012-10-23 2015-12-09 西纳福克斯股份有限公司 Modified antibody, antibody-conjugate and process for the preparation thereof
US10973922B2 (en) * 2013-05-02 2021-04-13 Glykos Finland Oy Glycoprotein-toxic payload conjugates
US20180256732A1 (en) * 2013-05-02 2018-09-13 Glykos Finland Oy Glycoprotein-toxic payload conjugates
US9775928B2 (en) 2013-06-18 2017-10-03 Covidien Lp Adhesive barbed filament
KR102037956B1 (en) * 2016-09-02 2019-10-30 한국과학기술원 Method for preparing site-specifically modified protein based on novel carbon-carbon bond formation
US10723760B2 (en) * 2016-09-02 2020-07-28 Korea Advanced Institute Of Science And Technology Method for preparing site-specifically modified protein based on novel carbon-carbon bond formation
WO2018044130A1 (en) * 2016-09-02 2018-03-08 한국과학기술원 Novel method for producing protein having a carbon-carbon bond-based site-specific modification
US20180066011A1 (en) * 2016-09-02 2018-03-08 Korea Advanced Institute Of Science And Technology Method for preparing site-specifically modified protein based on novel carbon-carbon bond formation
KR20180026350A (en) * 2016-09-02 2018-03-12 한국과학기술원 Method for preparing site-specifically modified protein based on novel carbon-carbon bond formation
CN115951070A (en) * 2023-01-19 2023-04-11 北京青莲百奥生物科技有限公司 Method for detecting protein in sample

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20170362624A1 (en) 2017-12-21
US20140206848A1 (en) 2014-07-24
DK1987068T3 (en) 2018-09-03
EP1991273A2 (en) 2008-11-19
DK1991273T4 (en) 2022-02-07
EP2623610B1 (en) 2015-04-29
US9645140B2 (en) 2017-05-09
US20200216871A1 (en) 2020-07-09
EP4092418A1 (en) 2022-11-23
EP2623986A2 (en) 2013-08-07
JP2016190863A (en) 2016-11-10
EP2623610A2 (en) 2013-08-07
WO2007095506A1 (en) 2007-08-23
WO2008029281A2 (en) 2008-03-13
US20070190597A1 (en) 2007-08-16
DK1991273T3 (en) 2013-09-08
US10676771B2 (en) 2020-06-09
EP1987068A4 (en) 2012-12-26
JP6646537B2 (en) 2020-02-14
WO2008029281A3 (en) 2009-09-11
EP1991273B2 (en) 2022-01-05
EP2623609A3 (en) 2013-08-28
US8785212B2 (en) 2014-07-22
JP2009528988A (en) 2009-08-13
JP2015044828A (en) 2015-03-12
EP1987068B1 (en) 2018-08-08
JP2018158943A (en) 2018-10-11
WO2007095506A8 (en) 2007-11-01
US20110207171A1 (en) 2011-08-25
US8716033B2 (en) 2014-05-06
EP2623609A2 (en) 2013-08-07
EP1991273B1 (en) 2013-07-03
EP1987068A1 (en) 2008-11-05
EP2623986A3 (en) 2013-08-28
EP1991273A4 (en) 2010-09-22
EP2623610A3 (en) 2013-09-04
US20120301894A1 (en) 2012-11-29
US20140377837A1 (en) 2014-12-25
DK3438131T3 (en) 2022-04-11
EP3438131B1 (en) 2022-03-16
EP2623986B1 (en) 2017-06-14
US20150051096A1 (en) 2015-02-19
US20170166943A1 (en) 2017-06-15
EP3438131A1 (en) 2019-02-06
EP2623609B1 (en) 2017-01-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20200216871A1 (en) Labeling and detection of post translationally modified proteins
US11067580B2 (en) Compounds and methods for conjugation of biomolecules
JP2013056934A (en) Methods of modifying and labeling proteins with oligosaccharide
JP2013056934A6 (en) Method for modifying and labeling proteins with oligosaccharides
JP2009531289A6 (en) Method for modifying and labeling proteins with oligosaccharides
EP2516386B1 (en) Protein modification from the oxidation of clickable polyunsaturated fatty acid analogs
US11639342B2 (en) 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions, and Staudinger ligations for conjugating biomolecules using click chemistry

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: INVITROGEN CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:AGNEW, BRIAN;GEE, KYLE R.;NYBERG, TAMARA G.;REEL/FRAME:018900/0431

Effective date: 20070214

AS Assignment

Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, WASHIN

Free format text: SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:LIFE TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:021975/0467

Effective date: 20081121

Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT,WASHING

Free format text: SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:LIFE TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:021975/0467

Effective date: 20081121

AS Assignment

Owner name: LIFE TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION,CALIFORNIA

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:INVITROGEN CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:023882/0551

Effective date: 20081121

Owner name: LIFE TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:INVITROGEN CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:023882/0551

Effective date: 20081121

AS Assignment

Owner name: LIFE TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: LIEN RELEASE;ASSIGNOR:BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.;REEL/FRAME:030182/0461

Effective date: 20100528

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: LIFE TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE APPLICATION NO 09452626 PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 023882 FRAME 0551. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE MERGER SHOULD NOT HAVE BEEN RECORDED AGAINST THIS PATENT APPLICATION NUMBER;ASSIGNOR:INVITROGEN CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:034217/0490

Effective date: 20081121